Pioneer BONUS VIEW BDP-51FD Operating Instructions
Operating Instructions Blu-ra y Disc PLA YER
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT D3-4-2-1-1_En-A IMPORT ANT NOTICE î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî D1-4-2-6-1_En NOTE: îÂÂî îÂÂ!îÂÂî îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂî !îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ"î !"îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂ#îÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ'îÂÂ%îÂÂ"î îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"!îÂÂî î îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî !!îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂ"î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî $îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ# !#î îÂÂ"îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂî "î î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ" îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î #î îÂÂ! îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ! îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"!î î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ!î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ$î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ" îÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ!"î îÂÂî î îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ" î îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î î î !îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!"î îÂÂîÂÂî "îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ!îÂÂî îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î "î !î îÂÂ#!î !î îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî "î î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂ#î îÂÂî 'îÂÂî îÂÂî î 'îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"î îÂÂîÂÂ!" îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ#! îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ%îÂÂ" îÂÂîÂÂ" îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!" # îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ! îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ'î îÂÂîÂÂ#! îÂÂî îÂÂî î îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ" î îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ#îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ! î îÂÂî î îÂÂ%î $î î îÂÂ"îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî #î î îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂî "îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"î îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ%îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî # îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî "îÂÂî #îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!"î îÂÂîÂÂî "îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"î îÂÂ!îÂÂî îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂî !î îÂÂî #!î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî #îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"î îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"î îÂÂî $îÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ%î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî "î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî 'îÂÂ"# îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂ#!î îÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂ# îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂ" 'îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂ" îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ" î îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ'îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ" îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ%îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ!# îÂÂ! î îÂÂ( î îÂÂî î î îÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ" îÂÂîÂÂ" îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ" îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂ( î î îÂÂî îÂÂî !î îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂ!î îÂÂî î "îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî "%îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ$î î îÂÂ( î î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî "îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ#"îÂÂî "îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î î #îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂî "îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂ%î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ$î îÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî " îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ( î î îÂÂîÂÂ!#îÂÂ"îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî &îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î D8-10-1-2_En îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ# îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî CAUTION: îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î D8-10-3a_En Infor mat ion to User Alterations or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user âÂÂs right to operate the equipment. D8-10-2_A_En Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. CAUTION : USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MA Y RESUL T IN HAZARDOUS RADIA TION EXPOSURE. CAUTION : THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD. D6-8-2-1_En 2 En
CAUTION This product is a class 1 lase r product, but this pr oduct contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. T o ensu re continued safety, do not remove any cove rs o r attem pt to gain access to the inside of the product. Ref e r all ser vicing to qualified p er sonnel. D3-4-2-1-8_B_En The following caution label a ppea rs on you r unit. Location: inside of the unit î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î "îÂÂ#% îÂÂ)îÂÂ!'îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ%îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ%îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂ!"'îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!*îÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ&"(%îÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂ&(îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ'îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"!îÂÂ'îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ$(îÂÂ# îÂÂ!'îÂÂî î î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ! îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ$!) îÂÂ%) ./îÂÂ''%)# îÂÂ/$% .îÂÂ0)% /îÂÂîÂÂ(îÂÂ&! îÂÂ.0-! îÂÂ/* îÂÂ'!î 1! îÂÂ. îÂÂîÂÂ! î î -* 0) îÂÂ/$! îÂÂ0)% /îÂÂ"* -îÂÂ1!) /%'î /%*) îÂÂ/* îÂÂ%( - * 1! îÂÂ$!î /î - î %îÂÂ/ %*)îÂÂî îÂÂ/î '!îÂÂ./î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ(î îÂÂ/îÂÂ/ * îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ(î îÂÂ/îÂÂ- !î -î î îÂÂ) î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ( îÂÂî /îÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂ$ îÂÂ.% ! îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ'* /.îÂÂîÂÂ) îÂÂ* !)%)# .îÂÂ%) îÂÂ/$! îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ%)! /îÂÂî -! î - * 1% ! îÂÂ"* -î 1 !)/ %'îÂÂ/ %*)îÂÂ/ *î !).0- ! îÂÂ- !'%îÂÂîÂÂ'! îÂÂ* ! -î /%*) îÂÂ*" îÂÂ/$! î -* 0î /îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ) îÂÂ/* î - * /!î /îÂÂ% /îÂÂ" -*( îÂÂ* 1! -$!î /%)# îÂÂî îÂÂ* î -! 1!) /îÂÂ"% - ! îÂÂ$î 4î - îÂÂîÂÂ/$! îÂÂ* !)%)# .îÂÂ.$* 0' îÂÂ)! 1! -îÂÂîÂÂ! î îÂÂ'*îÂÂ&! îÂÂ* -îÂÂîÂÂ* 1! -! îÂÂ2% /$ îÂÂ% /!( .îÂÂîÂÂ.0îÂÂ$ îÂÂî .îÂÂ)! 2. î ! -.îÂÂî / îÂÂîÂÂ'!î îÂÂ'*/ $.îÂÂî îÂÂ0-/ îÂÂ%).îÂÂî *-î îÂÂ3î * !- îÂÂ/ %)#îÂÂ/ $!î ! ,0% (!) /îÂÂ*) îÂÂ/$%îÂÂ& îÂÂîÂÂî - ! /îÂÂ* -îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ! î î îÂÂî î î î î î î î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ) Operating Environment îÂÂ#îÂÂ$îÂÂ&îÂÂ!î îÂÂîÂÂ!(îÂÂ$"! îÂÂ!& îÂÂ&î #îÂÂ$îÂÂ&'$î îÂÂîÂÂ!î îÂÂîÂÂ' îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ& * î î î î î îÂÂ&" îÂÂî îÂÂî î î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î î îÂÂ&" îÂÂî îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ%% îÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂ! îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂ""îÂÂîÂÂ!î îÂÂ(îÂÂ!&% îÂÂ!"& îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ" îÂÂ!"& îÂÂîÂÂ!%&îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂ% îÂÂ'!îÂÂ& îÂÂîÂÂ! îÂÂî îÂÂ#""$î *îÂÂ(îÂÂ!&îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ$îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"$ îÂÂîÂÂ! î îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂ"!% îÂÂî )#"%îÂÂî îÂÂ&" îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ' îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ& *îÂÂ"$ îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$îÂÂîÂÂ& îÂÂ%'!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ& îÂÂîÂÂ"$ î %&$"!î îÂÂîÂÂ$&îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ&î D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En W ARNING This equipment is not waterproof. T o prevent a fir e or shock hazard, do not place any container filled with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_B_En î î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î $!)îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ$î îÂÂ)îÂÂî îÂÂî î !îÂÂîÂÂ!î îÂÂ%$,îÂÂ' îÂÂ(*%%!- îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ'( î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$'î #î îÂÂ)$ îÂÂîÂÂ$*#)'- îÂÂ$' îÂÂ' îÂÂî $# îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ(*'î îÂÂ)îÂÂîÂÂ) îÂÂ)îÂÂî î %$,îÂÂ' îÂÂ(*%%!- î $!)îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ$î îÂÂ)îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ'îÂÂî îÂÂ,îÂÂîÂÂ' î îÂÂ)î ( îÂÂ*# ) î , !! îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ*(îÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂ)( îÂÂ)îÂÂî îÂÂ'îÂÂ&* ' îÂÂî î $!)îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î $' îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ,' ))îÂÂ# îÂÂ$# îÂÂ)îÂÂî îÂÂ'îÂÂîÂÂ' îÂÂ%îÂÂ#îÂÂ! îÂÂî îÂÂî î î î î î î î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ# î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î 3 En
îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ! îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ! îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ! î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ! îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ!îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ!îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî î !îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. CAUTION The îÂÂîÂÂST ANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not com pletely shut off all powe r f rom the AC outlet. Since the powe r co rd se r ves as the main disconnect device fo r the unit, you will need to un plug it f rom the AC outlet to shut down all powe r . The refo re, make su re the unit has been installed so that the p ower cor d can be easily unp lugged fr om the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fi re haza rd, the powe r co rd should also be un plugged f rom the AC outlet when left unused fo r a long pe riod of time (fo r exam ple, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ$î îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$ îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$ îÂÂîÂÂ$ îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî !îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$ îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ$ îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂî îÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î W ARNING: î î î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î î D36-P4_A_En W ash hands after handling î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î 4 En
S001_En Selecting fine audio equi pment such as the unit youâÂÂve just pu rchased is only the sta rt of you r musical enjoyment. Now itâÂÂs time to conside r how you can maximize the fun and excitement you r equi pment offe rs. This manufactu re r and the Elect ronic Indust ries AssociationâÂÂs Consume r Elect ronics G rou p want you to get the most out of you r equi pment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come th rough loud and clea r without annoying bla ring o r disto rtion-and, most im po rtantly , without affecting you r sensitive hea ring. Sound can be deceiving. Ove r time you r hea ring âÂÂcomfo rt levelâ ada pts to highe r volumes of sound. So what sounds âÂÂno rmalâ can actually be loud and ha rmful to you r hea ring. Gua rd against this by setting you r equi pment at a safe level BEFORE you r hea ring ada pts. T o establish a safe level: ⢠Sta rt you r volume cont rol at a low setting. ⢠Slowly inc rease the sound until you can hea r it comfo rtably and clea rly , and without disto rtion. Once you have established a comfortable sound level: ⢠Set the dial and leave it the re. T aking a minute to do this now will hel p to prevent hea ring damage o r loss in the futu re. Afte r all, we want you listening fo r a lifetime. We W ant Y ou Listening For A Lifetime Since hea ring damage f rom loud noise is often undetectable until it is too late, this manufactu re r and the Elect ronic Indust ries AssociationâÂÂs Consume r Elect ronics G rou p recommend you avoid pr olonged exp osur e to excessive noise. This list of sound levels is included fo r you r protection. Decibel Level Example 30 Quiet lib ra r y , soft whis pe rs 40 Living room, ref rige rato r , bed room away f rom t raffic 50 Light t raffic, no rmal conve rsation, quiet office 60 Ai r conditione r at 20 feet, sewing machine 70 V acuum cleane r , hai r d r ye r , noisy restau rant 80 Ave rage city t raffic, ga rbage dis posals, ala rm clock at two feet. THE FOLL OWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS UNDER CONST ANT EXPOSURE 90 Subway , moto rcycle, t ruck t raffic, lawn mowe r 100 Ga rbage t ruck, chain saw , pneumatic d rill 120 Rock band conce rt in f ront of s peake rs, thunde rcla p 140 Gunshot blast, jet plane 180 Rocket launching pad Info rmation cou rtesy of the Deafness Resea rch F oundation. 5 En
6 En Contents 01 Before you start WhatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Putting the batteries in the remo te control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Types of discs/files that can be pla yed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Playable discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Playable files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 02 Connecting up Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Connecting using a com mercially available HDMI cable . . . . . . 14 Connecting using a com mercially availabl e component video cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Connecting using the included audio cable and video cable . . . 16 Connecting an AV rece iver or amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Connecting using a com mercially available HDMI cable . . . . . . 17 Connecting using audio cable s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Connecting using a com mercially available digital audio cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Connecting the po wer cord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 03 Getting Started Making settings using the Setup Navigator menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Operating the TV with the playerâÂÂs remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 TV Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Using the TOOLS menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Erasing the additional data from BD- ROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Switching the video o utput terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Switching the output video resolu tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 04 Playback Playing discs or file s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Forward and reverse scann ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Playing specific titles, ch apters or tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Skipping con tent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Step forward and step reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Switching the camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Switching the subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Switching the audio streams/channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Switching the secondary video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Displaying the disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Using the Play Mode functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Playing from a specific time (Tim e Search) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Playing a specific title, cha pter or track (Sear ch) . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Playing a specif ic section wi thin a title or tr ack repeatedly (A-B Repeat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Playing repeatedly (Repeat P lay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Playing in random order (Rando m Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 About Play Mode types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Playing from the Home M edia Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Playing music files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Playing in the desired order (HMG Playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 05 Adjusting audio and video Adjusting the video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 7 Adjusting the Audio DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 06 Advanced settings Changing the settin gs (Initial Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 9 Operating the Initial Setup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Changing to other language a t language setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Changing the speaker se tup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Adjusting the output level of the various speakers (Channel Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Registering or Changing the password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 4 Changing the Age Restriction for watching BD-ROMs . . . . . . . . 45 Changing the Parental Lock level fo r watc hing DVDs . . . . . . . . . 46 Changing the Countr y/Area code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Changing the terminals fo r outputting video and audio signals (Output Terminal Priority) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Restoring all the settings to the factory de fault settings . . . . . . . 49 About the audio outp ut settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 0 07 Additional information Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 1 When connected using an HDMI cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 5 Language Code Table an d Country/Area Code Ta ble . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Language Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Country/Area Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 6 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Cautions on use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 8 Turn the power off wh en not using the player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Cleaning the player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 8 Cleaning the picku p lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
01 7 En Chapter 1 Before you start WhatâÂÂs in the box Putting the batteries in the remote control 1 Open the rear cover. 2 Insert the batteries (AA/R6 x 2). Insert as indi cated by the ï« /ïª marks into the battery compartment. 3 Close the rear cover. Close securely (a click should be heard). Caution ⢠Do not mix new and ol d batteries together. ⢠Batteries may have differen t voltages, even if th ey look similar. Do not use different kinds of batteries together. ⢠To prevent leakage of batte ry fluid, remove the batteries if yo u do not plan to use the remote control for a lo ng period of time (1 month or more). If the flu id should leak, wipe it carefully off the inside of the case, then insert new batteries. ⢠When d isposing o f used batterie s, please c omply with governmental regulations or envi ronment al public ins tructionâÂÂs rules that apply in your country/area. ⢠WARNING Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause batteries to lea k, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries. D3-4-2-3-3_En STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER CLEAR ENTER VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN BD PLAYER PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE VIDEO ADJUST INPUT SELECT TV CONTROL CH VOL AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION ENTER Remote control x 1 Audio cable (white/red plugs) x 1 Video cable (yellow plugs) x 1 Power cable x 1 AA/R6 dry cell batteries x 2 Warranty card Operating instructions (this manual) Press lightly on this part and slide into the direction of the arrow. Insert the negative ( ïª ) side first.
01 8 En Types of discs/files that can be played Playable discs Discs with the logo marks below indicated on the disc label, package or jacket can be played. ï° Discs that cannot be played ⢠HD DVDs â¢D V D A u d i o d i s c s â¢D V D - R A M d i s c s ⢠Non-finalized DVD-R/DVD-RW /DVD R/DVD RW discs in the DVD-Video format and AVCHD format ⢠Non-finalized Dua l Layer DVD-R discs in the DVD VR format â¢S A C D s â¢V i d e o C D s This player conf orms to NTSC s tandards. Discs for whi ch âÂÂNTSCâ is indicated on the disc label, pac kage or jacket can be played. âÂÂBlu-ray Discâ and are trademarks. is a trademark of DVD Form at/Logo Licensing Corpo ration. Disc type Logo Application format BDMV 1 1. Including the AV CHD format. BDAV DVD-Video DVD VR CD-DA DTS-CD DATA-DISC 2 2. Discs on which music files are recorded BD BD-ROM ï± ï± ï³ï³ï³ï³ BD-R ï± ï± ï³ï³ï³ï³ BD-RE ï± ï± ï³ï³ï³ï³ DVD DVD-ROM ï±ï³ï±ï³ ï³ï± DVD-R ï±ï³ï± ï±ï³ï± DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) ï±ï³ï± ï±ï³ï± DVD-RW ï±ï³ï± ï±ï³ï± DVD R ï±ï³ï±ï³ ï³ï± DVD RW ï±ï³ï±ï³ ï³ï± CD CD-DA (Music CD) ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï±ï³ CD-R ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï± CD-RW ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï± CD-ROM ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï±
01 9 En Note ⢠Some discs can not be played, even if one of the abo ve logo marks is indica ted. ⢠To play 8 cm discs, set the disc in the 8 cm disc depression in the center of th e disc tray. No adapter is necessa ry. 8 cm BD- ROM discs cannot be played. ï° About audio formats The following audio formats are supported on this player: â¢D o l b y T r u e H D â¢D o l b y D i g i t a l P l u s â¢D o l b y D i g i t a l ⢠DTS-HD Ma ster Audio â¢D T S - H D H i g h R e s o l u t i o n A u d i o ⢠DTS Digital Surround â¢M P E G ⢠MPEG-2 AAC â¢L i n e a r P C M To enjoy the surround so und of Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio and DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, it is recommended to connect the player to an AV r eceiver or amplifier compatible with these audio formats using an HD MI cable. After loading a BD containing sound in one o f these audio formats, select the audio format on the me nu screen. See About the audio output setti ngs on page 50 for the o utput conditions of the diffe rent formats. Manufactured under licens e from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademar ks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under lic ense under U.S. Patent #: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5, 974,380; 5,978, 762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwi de patents issued & pending. DTS is a regi stered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Advanced Digital Out are trademarks of DTS, Inc. é 1996-2007 D TS, Inc. All Right s Reserved. ï° Playing BDs ⢠BDs (BDMV) compa tible with th e formats belo w can be played. â Blu-ray Disc Read-Only (ROM) Format Version 2 â Blu-ray Disc Recorda ble (R) Format Version 2 â Blu-ray Disc Re writable (RE) For mat Version 3 This player supports BD-ROM Profile 1 Version 1. 1. BONUSVIEW Functi ons such as playb ack of second ary video (Picture-in-Pict ure) and seco ndary audio can be used. For details on secondary video an d secondary audio playback, ref er to the discâÂÂs instructions. âÂÂBONUSVIEWâ is trademark of Blu-ray Disc Associ ation. When a BD-ROM is played, addition al data may be stored in the playerâÂÂs memory area (local stor age). If the m essage indicating low memory (local storage) appears, erase the BDM V data (page 24). ⢠BDs (BDAV) compatible with the formats below can be played. â Blu-ray Disc Recorda ble (R) Format Version 1 â Blu-ray Disc Re writable (RE) For mat Version 2 ⢠Dual Layer BD s can be played. ⢠Music files rec orded on BDs cannot be played. ⢠8 cm BD-ROM discs cannot be played. ï° Playing DVDs ⢠DVD-Video ca n be played. ⢠DVD-R/-RW/ R/ RW discs record ed in th e DVD-Video format can be played (finalize them before playing them on this player). ⢠DVD-R/-RW discs rec orded in th e VR format (Video Recording format) can be played. ⢠This label indicates playback compatibility with DVD-RW di scs recorded in VR mode (Video Recording format). However, for discs recorded with a record-o nly-once encrypted program, playback can only be achieved using a CPRM compatibl e device. ⢠DVDs recorded in the AVCHD format ca n be played (finalize them before playing them on this player). âÂÂAVCHDâ and the âÂÂAVCHDâ logo are tradem arks of Matsushita Electric Industrial C o., Ltd. and Sony Corporati on. ⢠Music files rec orded on DV D-R/-RW/ R/ RW discs can be played. See Playable file s on page 10. ⢠Dual Layer DV Ds can be played. However, Non-fina lized Dual Layer DVD-R discs recorded in th e VR format cannot be played. (Finalize them before playing them on this player. ) ⢠HD DVD, DVD Audio and DVD-RAM discs cannot be played.
01 10 En ï° About region numbers Blu-ray Disc Player and BD-ROM or DVD-Video discs are assigned region numbers according to the region in which they are sold. This playerâÂÂs region numbers are: â¢B D - R O M : A â¢D V D - V i d e o : 1 Discs not in cluding these n umb ers cannot be played. Discs playable on this player are as shown below. ⢠BDs: A (including A) and ALL ⢠DVDs: 1 (inc luding 1) and ALL ï° Playing CDs ⢠CD-DA/DTS-C Ds (music CDs) can be played. ⢠Music files recorded on CDs ca n be played. See Playable files on page 10. ⢠SACD, Video CD and Super VCD discs cannot be played. ⢠Rega rding copy pro tected CDs: Thi s product is designed to conform to the specifications of the Audio CD format. This player does not su pport the playback or function of discs th at do not conform to these specifications. ï° DualDisc playback A DualDisc is a new two-sided disc , one side of which contains DVD content â video, audio, etc. â while the other side contains non- DVD content such as di gital audio material. The DVD side of a DualDisc will be played on this player (excluding any DVD-Audio conten t). The non-DVD , audio side of th e disc is not compatible wi th this player. It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc, the o pposite side to that being played will be scratched. Scratched discs may not be playable. For more detailed inf ormation on the DualDisc specif ication, please refer to the di sc manufacturer o r disc retailer. ï° Playing discs created on computers ⢠It may n ot be possible to play DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW discs recorded using a persona l record er or comp uter. (This can be due to vario us reasons, including disc properties, scratches, dirt on the disc, dirt on the playerâÂÂs lens, condensation and so on.) ⢠It may not be possible to play disc s recorded using a computer due to the application settings or environment. Record discs in the proper format. Fo r details, contact the dealer. Playable files Music files recorded on DV Ds and CDs can be played. Caution ⢠In DVD, on ly the one recorded by the ISO9660 file system can be played. ⢠Some files may not be playable. ⢠For some files, it ma y not be possible to use certain functions during playback. ⢠It may not be possible to play so me files, even if they hav e the extension of a fi le playable on this p layer. ⢠Files protected by DRM (Digital Rights Management) cannot be played. ï° Supported music file formats ⢠Windows Media⢠Audio 9 (WMA9) Bit rate: Up to 192 kbps Sampling frequencies: 22.05 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz ⢠MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3) Bit rate: Up to 320 kbps Sampling frequencies: 8 kHz, 1 1.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz ï° Playable file extensions ⢠Music files .wma and .mp3 ⢠Windows Media is either a reg istered trademark or t rademark of Microsoft Corporation in the Unit ed States and/or other countries. ⢠This product includes t echnology owned by Micr osoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Lice nsing, Inc.
01 11 En Part Names and Functions Remote Control 1 ïµ STANDBY/ON Press to turn the power on and off. 2 TV CONTROL Your TV can be controlle d using the playerâÂÂs remote control (page 22). ïµ â Press to turn the TVâÂÂs p ower on and off. INPUT SELECT â Press to switch the TVâÂÂs input. CH /â â Press to select the TV channel. VOL /â â Press to adjust the volume. 3 AUDIO Press to switch the audio streams/channels (page 28). 4 SUBTI TLE Press to switch the subtitles (page 28). 5 Number buttons â Use these to select and play the title/ chapter/tra ck you want to watc h or listen to and to select items from menus. CLEAR â Press to clear the numeric number, etc. ENTER â Press to execute the selected item or enter a setting that has been changed, e tc. 6 SECO NDARY AUDIO â When playing a BD-ROM on which secondary audio is recor ded, pr ess to switch to the secondary audio (page 28). SECONDARY VIDEO â When pl aying a BD-ROM on which secondary video (Pic ture-in-Pictur e) is recorded, press to switch to the secondary video (page 29). 7 VIDEO SELECT Press to switch the terminal fr om which the video signals are output. Use to switch between di gital output (HDMI output) and analog output (Component Video o utput, S-Video output or V ideo output) (the signals are only output from the selected vide o output terminal) (page 24). 8 HOME MEDIA GALLERY Press to display/hide the Home Media Gallery screen (page 34). 9T O P M E N U Press to display the top menu o f the BD-ROM or DVD-Video. 10 ï© /ïª /ï« /ï¬ â Use to select items, change settings and move the cursor. ENTER â Press to execute the selected item or enter a setting that has been changed, e tc. 11 HOME MENU Press to display/hide the Home Menu. 12 ï¤ PLAY â Press to star t playba ck. ïÂÂ¥ PAUSE â Press to pause playba ck. Press aga in to resta rt playback. ï§ STOP â Press to stop playback. ï¯ PREV/ï° NEXT â Press to skip to the beginning of the previous/next title/chapter/track/file (page 27). ï /ï± / â Press during playback to start reverse scanning. While playback is paused, press for step reverse playback. Press and hold while playback is paused for reverse slo w motion playback (pages 26 and 27). / ï²/ ï® â Press during playback to start fo rward scanning. While playback i s paused, press for step f orward playback. Press and hold while playback is paused for forward slo w motion playback (pages 26 and 27). 13 RED/GREEN/BLUE /YELLOW Us e these to navigate BD-ROM m enus. 14 VIDEO ADJUST Press to display/hide the Video Adjust menu (page 37). 15 ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE Press to open and close the disc tray. 16 FL DIMMER Press to switch the brightness of the front panel dis play. The FL OFF indicator li ghts when Off is selected . 17 ANGLE Press to switch the BD-ROM or DV D-Video camera angle (page 28). 18 OUTPUT RES OLUTION Use these to switch the output vid eo resolution from the HDMI OUT or COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals (page 25). STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER CLEAR ENTER VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN BD PLAYER PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE VIDEO ADJUST INPUT SELECT TV CONTROL CH VOL AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION ENTER 10 7 8 4 12 13 1 2 3 5 6 9 11 14 18 20 17 19 21 15 16 22 23
01 12 En 19 P LAY MODE Press to display/hide the Play Mode screen (page 29). 20 POP UP MENU/MENU Press to display the BD-ROM or DVD-Video menus. 21 DISPLAY Press to display disc informatio n (page 29). 22 TOOLS Press to display/hide the TOOLS menu (page 23). 23 RETURN Press to return to the previous screen. Front Panel 1 ïµ STANDBY/ON Press to turn the power on and off. 2 Remote control sensor Point the remote control to this, then operate it within approximately 23 feet. The player may have trouble ca pturing remote control signals if there is a fluorescent light nearby. If this happen s, move the player away from the fluorescent light. 3 Front pa nel displa y 4 ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE Press to open and close the disc tray. 5 RESOLUTION Press to switch the output video re solution fr om the HDMI output or component video output term inals (page 25). 6 ï¯/ ï Press to skip to the beginnin g of the previous title/chapter/track/file. Press and hold to start reverse scanning (pages 26 and 27). 7 ï®/ ï° Press to skip to the beginning of the next title/chapter/track/file. Press and hold to start forward scannin g (pages 26 and 27). 8 ïÂÂ¥ Press during playback to pause. Press again to restart playback. 9 ï§ Press to stop playback. 10 ï¤ Press to start playback. 11 HDMI indic ator This lights when video signals fr om the HDMI terminal is output (page 14). 12 Disc tra y 13 F L OFF indicator This lights when Off is selected wit h FL DIMMER . 14 HD indicator This lights w hen an HDMI cable is connected and the video output resolution is set to 1080/60i, 1080/60p, 1080/24p or 720/60p. It also lights when a com ponent video ca ble is connected and the ou tput video resolution is set to 1080/60i or 720/60p. ï± 1 1 0 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 4 11 1 2 1 3 1 4
01 13 En Front Panel Display 1 ï¤ Lights during playback. 2 ïÂÂ¥ Lights when playback is paused. 3P Q L S Lights when the PQLS function is activate d (page 15). 4 Character display Displays the title/chapter /track numbe r, elapsed ti me, etc. 5 24HZ/50 HZ/60HZ The frequency of the video fram e or field bei ng output li ghts. 6C O N T R O L Lights when the HDMI Control fun ction is activated (page 15). Rear Panel 1 DIGITAL OUT (COAX IAL/OPTICAL) Connect wi th the digital audio inpu t terminal on an AV receiver or amplifier, etc. 2 AUDIO OUT (2 ch) t erminals Connect wi th the audio i nput termina ls on a TV, A V receiver or amplifier, etc. 3 AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) ter minals Connect with the multi-channel (7.1- o r 5.1-channel) audio input terminals on an AV receiver or ampl ifier, etc. 4 VIDEO OUT terminals VIDEO â Connect with the video input term inal on a TV, AV receiver or amplifier, etc. S-VIDEO â Connect with the S-Video input terminal on a TV, AV receiver or amplifier, etc. COMPONENT VIDEO â Connect with the component video input terminal s on a TV, AV receive r or amplifier, etc. 5A C I N Connect the power cord here. 6 HDMI OUT terminal Connect wi th an HDMI-co mpatible TV , AV receiver or amplifier, etc. 7 CONTROL IN terminal Use to control th is player from the remote sensor of anothe r Pioneer component with a CONTROL OUT terminal and bearing the ï± mark. Connect the CONTROL OUT of th e other component to the CONTROL IN of this player using a mini-plug cord. Caution ⢠Be sur e to connect ca bles for outp utting the au dio and video signals (pages 14 and 17). ⢠When connected via System Control, point the remote con trol toward the connected component (such as an AV receive r or amplifier). The remote will not work correctly when p ointed at this player. ⢠You can not use System Control with compon ents that do not have a System Control te rminal or with compo nents manufactured by com panies other than Pioneer. PQLS 24HZ 50HZ 60HZ CONTROL 4 1 2 5 6 3 R R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN L L Y P B P R FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AC IN SURROUND CENTER VIDEO S-VIDEO SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
02 14 En Chapter 2 Connecting up Connecting a TV Be sure to turn off the power and un plug the power cord from the power outlet whenever making or changing connections. Note ⢠Ma ke the settings in the Setup N avigator menu according to the type of cable connected (page 20). Connecting using a commercially available HDMI cable The audio and video signals can be transferre d to HD MI-compatibl e devices as digital signals with no lo ss of sound or video quality. After connecting, make the settings at the Setup Navigator menu according to the connected HDMI-compatible device (page 20). Also ref er to the oper ating inst ructions of the device being connected. Note ⢠The HDMI in dicator on the playerâÂÂs front panel lights when video signals are being output from the HDMI OUT terminal. (Depending on the connected device, in some cases it may only light when the player is selected as the deviceâÂÂs input.) ⢠1080p video signals ma y not be output, depending on the HDMI cable bein g used. Caution ⢠Hold the plug when connecting and disconnec ting the cable. ⢠Placi ng a load on the plu g could resu lt in fault y contact and no video signals being output. ï° About HDMI This player inc orporates Hig h-Definition M ultimedia I nterface (HDMIâ¢) technology. The conventional players can transmit a video signal with 8 bit color depth in the YCbCr 4:4:4 or RGB formats, the players supporting Deep Color can transmit a vide o si gnal with a color bit depth of greater than 8 bits per color component. Subtle color gradations can be reproduced when connec ted to a TV that supports Deep Color. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definitio n Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registere d trademarks of HDMI Licensi ng LLC. R R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN L L Y P B P R FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AC IN SURROUND CENTER VIDEO S-VIDEO SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK P B P R VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMI OUT R R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN L L Y P B P R FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AC IN SURROUND CENTER VIDEO S-VIDEO SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK P B P R VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMI OUT PlayerâÂÂs rear panel TV Match the direction of the plug to the terminal and insert straight. To HDMI input te rminal HDMI cable (commercially available) It is also possible to connect to an AV receiver or amplifier using an HDMI cable (page 17). Direction of signal flow
02 15 En ï° Audio signals that can be transferred with the playerâÂÂs HDMI output terminal â¢D o l b y T r u e H D â¢D o l b y D i g i t a l P l u s â¢D o l b y D i g i t a l ⢠DTS-HD Ma ster Audio â¢D T S - H D H i g h R e s o l u t i o n A u d i o ⢠DTS Digital Surround ⢠MPEG-2 AAC â¢L i n e a r P C M Linear PCM audio si gnals meeting the following c onditions can be output: â Sampling frequency: 32 kHz to 192 kHz â Number of channels: Up to 8 (up to 6 for a 192 kHz sampling frequency) For details, see About the audio output settings on pa ge 50. ï° About the HDMI high speed transmission This player outputs 1080/60p and D eep Color video signa ls. If your TV supports 1080/60p or Deep Color signals, use a High Speed HDMI⢠cable in order to take advantage of the maximum performance the player and TV ca n offer. Also set HDMI High- Speed Transmission to On (page 41). High Speed HDMI⢠cables are test ed to carry signals up to 1080p. 1080/60i, 1080/60p, 1080/24p and 720/60p vide o signals that are capable of Deep Color can also be ca rried. Note â¢S e t HDMI High-Speed Transmission to Off when using an HDMI cable other than a High Speed HDMI⢠cable (a Standar d HDMI⢠cable). ⢠The following rest rictions appl y when HDMI High-Speed Transmission is set to Off : â Deep Color signals are not outpu t. â If output video resol ution is set to Auto , the signals are output with a resolution of 108 0/60i, even if the TVâÂÂs preferred resolution is 1080/60p. â When the output video resolution i s set to 480i or 480p , Dolby TrueHD and DTS -HD Master Audio signal s are not output as such. They are either o utput as Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround signals or converted into linear PCM. Also, 96 kHz and 192 kHz multi-channel lin ear PCM audio signals can not be output. They are output as 2 -channel signals (page 50). ⢠When an HDMI cabl e with a built- in equalizer is co nnected, it may not operate properly. ï° About HDCP HDCP (High-bandwidth Digit al Content Protection) is a copyright protection system by which digi tal video signal s are encrypted. ï° When connected to a DVI device ⢠It is not possible to connect DVI devices (computer displays, for example) that are not compatible with HDCP . ⢠No au dio signals are output. Conn ect using an audio cable (included), etc. ⢠This player is designed for co nnection with HDMI-compati ble devices. When conne cted to a DVI device, it may not o perate properly depending on the DVI device. ï° About HDMI Control function ⢠When the player is con nected to a Pioneer Flat Panel TV or AV system (AV receiver or amplifier, etc.), supporting the HDM I Control function, it can be opera ted from the Flat Panel TV o r AV system (AV receiver or amplifier, etc.). ⢠The Flat Panel TVâÂÂs in put is switched automatica lly when playback is started on the player or the Home Menu or the Home Media Gallery is displayed. When the input is switched, the playback picture, the Home Menu or the Home M edia Gallery appears on the Flat Panel TV (Aut o-sel ect function). If the Flat Panel TVâÂÂs powe r is being t urned off at t his time, it ma y turn on automatical ly (Simultaneo us power functi on). When th e language information from a c onnected Flat Panel TV is received, you can have the playerâÂÂs on-screen display language change auto matically to that of th e Flat Panel T V (Unified language func tion). This function is ava ilable only wh en playback is stopped and the me nu screen is not displayed. ⢠Also refer to the op erating instructions of the Flat Panel TV or AV system (AV receiver or amplifier, etc.). ï° To use the HDMI Control function ⢠The HDMI Control fu nction only works when outp utting video signals from the HDMI terminal. ⢠The HDMI Control functio n operates when HDMI Control is set to On for all devices co nnected with HDMI cables. Once connections and the settings of all the devices a re finished, be sure to check that the playerâÂÂs pi cture is output to the Flat Panel TV. (Also check after changing the conn ected devices and reconnecting HDMI cables.) The HDMI Control function may no t operate properly if the playerâÂÂs pi cture is not p roperly ou tput to the Flat Panel TV. ⢠Use High Speed HDMI⢠cables when using the HDMI Control function. The HDM I Control function may not operate properly if other HDMI cables are used. ⢠The function name of KURO LINK used on the web and in catalogues is referred to as HDMI Control i n the operating instructio ns and on the p roduct. ï° About PQLS function The PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a transfer control technology using the H DMI Contro l function . The playerâÂÂs output signals are controlled from the AV receiver or amplifier to achieve high qualit y sound playba ck using t he quartz osc illator of AV receiver or ampl ifier. This elim inates the inf luence of the jit ter generated upon transfer which can adversely affect the sound quality. ⢠The PQLS function is only activated when the player is connected to a Pioneer AV receiver or amplifier compatible with the PQLS function vi a HDMI connecti on. ⢠The PQLS function is activat ed wh en th e player is set as follows (page 41): HDMI Control : On PQLS : Auto ⢠Also refer to the opera ting instructions of AV receiver or amplifier.
02 16 En Connecting using a commercially available component video cable Caution ⢠When co nnected to the TV using a component video cable (commercially available), video signals are not output with resolutions of 1080/60p or 1080/24p. ⢠Depending on the output video resolution setting, the picture may not be output (page 25). ⢠When connected to the TV using compo nent video cables, also connect using either an optical digital audio cable (commercially a vailable), a c oaxial digital audio cable (commercially a vailable), or a u dio cables (use the included cable for 2-channel connectio ns, a combination of the in cluded cable and commercially availa ble cables for 7.1-channel connections). It is not possible to listen to the sound fro m devices connected with HDMI ca bles (commercially available). Connecting using the included audio cable and video cable R R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN L L Y P B P R FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AC IN SURROUND CENTER VIDEO S-VIDEO SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK R AUDIO OUT (7. 1 c h) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DI GITAL OUT L L FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL S URROUND CENTER VIDEO S -VIDEO S UB WOOFER S URROUND BACK R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) VIDEO OUT L Y P B P R COMPONENT VIDEO TV PlayerâÂÂs rear panel To audio input terminals To component video input terminals Component cable or three video cables (commercially available) Audio cable (included) Red White It is also possible to connect to an AV receiver or am plifier. Connect the audio signals using audio cables (7.1 channels), an optical di gital audio cable or a coaxial digital audio cable (page 18). Direction of signal flow R R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN L L Y P B P R FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AC IN SURROUND CENTER VIDEO S-VIDEO SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK R AUDIO OUT (7. 1 c h) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DI GITAL OUT L Y P B P R FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO S URROUND CENTER S UB WOOFER S URROUND BACK R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) VIDEO OUT L VIDEO S -VIDEO TV PlayerâÂÂs rear panel To audio input terminals To S-Video inpu t termin al Video cable (included) Audio cable (included) An S-Video cable (commercially available) can also be used for connection. To video input terminal Red White Yellow It is also possible to connect to an AV receiver or amplifier. Connect the audio signals using audio cables (7.1 channels ), an optical digital audio cable or a coaxial digital audio cable (page 18). Direction of signal flow
02 17 En Caution ⢠Video signal s are only output wi th a resolution of 480/60i wh en connected using a video cable (i ncluded) or an S-Video cable (commercially a vailable). ⢠When connected to a TV using a video ca ble or an S-Video cab le, also connect usin g either audio cables (use the included ca ble for 2-channel connections, a combination of the included cable and commercially avai lable cables for 7.1-channel con nections), an optical digital audio cable (commercially available), or a coaxial dig ital audio cabl e (commercially ava ilable). It is not possible to listen to the sound from devices connec ted with HDMI cables (com mercially avai lable). ⢠Connect the playerâÂÂs video output directly to you r TV. This player supports an alog copy protectio n technology. Therefore the picture may no t be displayed properly if connected to a TV via a DVD recorder/video deck or when playing the playerâÂÂs output material that is r ecorded by a DVD recorder/ video deck. Furthermore, the picture ma y not be displayed properly due to the copy protection when the player is connected to a TV with a built-in video deck. For details, contact the manufacturer of your TV. Connecting an AV receiver or amplifier Connect to an AV receiver or amplifier in order to enjoy the surround sound of Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digi ta l Plus, Dolby Di gital, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Re solution Audio or DTS Digital Surround. For instru ctions on connec ting the TV and speakers to the AV receiver or amplifier, r efer to the operating instructions of AV receiver or amplifier. Note ⢠Ma ke the settings in the Setup N avigator menu according to the type of cable connected (page 20). ⢠To input video si gnals, connect using one of the following (not includin g when connected using an HDMI cable): a component video cable (commercially available), an S-Video cable (commercially a vailable) or a video cable (included). Connecting using a commercially available HDMI cable Caution ⢠When c onnected to an AV receiver or amp lifier using an H DMI cable (commercially available), use another HDM I cable (commercially avai lable) to connect t he AV receiver or amp lifier with the TV. If a compon ent video cable (commercially available ), an S-Video cab le (co mmercially availa ble) or a video cable (included) is connected to watch th e picture, it is not possible to listen to the sound of devices connected with HDMI cables. ⢠When DTS-HD Master Audio and DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals are output as linea r PCM signals, the DTS Digital Surround signals are converted to linear PCM for output (page 50). R R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN L L Y P B P R FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AC IN SURROUND CENTER VIDEO S-VIDEO SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK P B P R VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMI OUT PlayerâÂÂs rear panel To HDMI input terminal From HDMI output terminal AV receiver or amplifier HDMI cab le (commercially available) To HDMI input terminal TV HDMI cabl e (commercially available) Match the direction of the plug to the terminal and insert straight. Direction of signal flow
02 18 En Connecting using audio cables Caution ⢠For DTS -HD Master Audio and DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals, the DTS Digital Surround signals are converted to linear PCM for output (page 50). When conn ecting to a 7.1-c hannel comp atible AV rece iver or amplifie r â Connect using the included audio ca ble and 3 commercially available audio cables (diagram below). When conn ecting to a 5.1-c hannel comp atible AV rece iver or amplifie r â Connect using the included audio ca ble and 2 commercially ava ilable audio cables (do not connect to the surround back left and right terminals). ⢠After connectin g, set Audio Output Mode to Multi- channel (page 40). Connecting using a commercially available digital audio cable Connect either a n optical di gital audio cable or a c oaxial digit al audio cable. Caution ⢠Dolby Tr ueHD and Dolby Di gital Plus sign als are output as the Dolby Digital signals or signal s converted from Dolby Digital to linear PCM (p age 50). ⢠DTS-HD Master Audio and DTS- HD High Resolution Audio signals are output as the DTS Digital Surround signal s or signals convert ed from DTS Digit al Surround to linear PCM (page 50). R R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN L L Y P B P R FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AC IN SURROUND CENTER VIDEO S-VIDEO SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK R AUDIO OUT (2 c h) HDMI OUT DI GITAL OUT L L COAXIAL OPTICAL R AUDIO OUT (7. 1 ch) L FRONT S URROUND CENTER S UB WOOFER S URROUND BACK VIDEO OUT VIDEO S -VIDEO VIDEO OUT Y P B P R COMPONENT VIDEO PlayerâÂÂs rear panel To multi-channel audio input terminals AV receiver or amplifier Audio cable (included) Audio cable (commercially available) Audio cable (commercially available) Audio cable (commercially available) Red White Compon ent cable or three video cable s (commercially available) To component video input terminals Direction of signal flow R R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN L L Y P B P R FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AC IN SURROUND CENTER VIDEO S-VIDEO SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK R R AUDIO OUT (2 c h) AUDIO OUT (7.1 c h) HDMI OUT L L L FRONT S URROUND CENTER S UB WOOFER S URROUND BACK DI GITAL OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL VIDEO OUT VIDEO S -VIDEO VIDEO OUT Y P B P R COMPONENT VIDEO AV receiver or amplifier Coaxial digital cable (commercially available) Optical digita l cable (commercially available) To coaxial digital audio input terminal To optical digital audio input terminal PlayerâÂÂs rear panel To component video input terminals Component cable or three video cables (commercia lly available) Direction of signal flow
02 19 En Connecting the power cord Connect the power cord after a ll the connections between devices have been completed. R R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN L L Y P B P R FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AC IN SURROUND CENTER VIDEO S-VIDEO SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK AC IN UT VIDEO S - VIDEO PlayerâÂÂs rear panel Power cable (included) To wall o utlet
03 20 En Chapter 3 Getting Started Making settings using the Setup Navigator menu Be sure to perform th ese settings when using the player for the first time. Caution ⢠Before turning on the power, check that the connections between the player and o ther devices are correct. 1 Turn on the power. Press ïµ STANDBY/ON . 2 Turn on the TVâÂÂs power and switch the input. See the TVâÂÂs operating instructions for instructio ns on operating the TV. Check that the Setup Navigator menu is displayed. If TV Contr ol is s et, the TV can be ope rated with t he pla yerâÂÂs remo te control (page 22). ï° If the Setup Navigator menu is not displayed ï¦ Press HOME MENU to display the Home Menu, select Initial Setup ï¤ Setup Navigato r ï¤ Start, then press ENTER. 3 Select the OSD language. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . When you have the player co nnected to a Pioneer Flat Panel TV tha t is compatible with HDMI Control, language sett ings are imported from the Pioneer Flat Panel TVâ s language settings before Setup Navigator begins. 4 Select and set the vi deo and audio output terminals. Select the actually connected vi deo and audio output terminals. Use ï© /ïª /ï« /ï¬ to select, then ENTER . When HDMI is select ed for Video or Audio , proceed to step 5. When Component Video is selected for Video , proceed to step 6. When S-Video/Video is selected for Video , proceed to step 7. Caution â¢W h e n HDMI is selected for Video , no video signals are output from the COMPONENT VIDEO , S-VIDEO or VIDEO output terminals. â¢W h e n Component Video or S-Video/Video is selected for Video , no video signals are o utput from the HDMI OUT terminal. ⢠The video and a udio signals output from the set output termina ls are ou tput sync hronously ( lip sync hronizati on). â¢W h e n S-V ideo/Video or Component Vide o is selected at Video , no sound is output if HDMI is selected at Audio (the warning message shown below is displayed). Follow the procedure below to redo the connections, then select the proper connection at the setup screen. â When connecting using componen t video cables, an S-Video cable or a video cable to watch the picture, connec t to an AV receiver or amplifier, or a TV using either analog audio cables (7.1 channels or 2 c hannels), an optic al digital aud io cable or a coaxial digital audi o cable (page 18). STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE TV CONTROL INPUT SELECT CH VOL TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER S etup Navigator BD PLAYER Please select the on-screen display language. Audio, subtitle and BDMV/DVD- Video menu language will also be set. Setting it em Output termina l name Video HDMI HDMI Output Component Vide o Vid eo Output Component Vide o S-Video/Vi deo S-Video Video Audio HDMI HDMI Output Digital Audio Digital Audio Output Coaxial Optical Analog Audio Audio Output (2ch) Audio Output (7.1ch) TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER S etup Navigator BD PLAYER Select the output terminals to be used for the video and audio signals of this player . Use [ ][ ] to select video or audio, then press [ ][ ] to select the output terminal. HDMI HDMI Video Audio
03 21 En â When connecting the p layer to an AV receive r or amplifier using an HDMI cable in orde r to listen to the Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digi tal Plus, DT S-HD Ma ster Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals conver ted into li near PCM, connect the TV to the AV receiver or amplifier u sing an HDMI cable (pages 14 and 17). ⢠Linear PC M audio signals (2 channels) ar e output from all terminals other than the ones selected at Audio , regardless of the audio format or the playerâÂÂs settings. 5 Select and set the HDMI High -Speed Transmission setting. Use ï« /ï¬ to select, th en press ENTER . When HDMI High-Speed Transmission is set to On , use a High Speed HDMI⢠cable. The p icture and sound may not be o utput properly if any other HDMI cable (s tandard HD MI⢠cable) is used. Proceed to step 8. 6 Select the output video re solution from the COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . For details on the resolution setti ngs, see Switching the output video resolution on page 25. 7 Select the aspect rati o of your TV. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 8 Check the settings. Select Proceed , then press ENTER . 9 Output test tones. Use ï« /ï¬ to select Yes , then press ENTER . Caution ⢠The screen in step 10 and test tones are outp ut simultaneo usly according to the settings in steps 4 to 7. Lower the volume o f the devices connected with the player. Go Back Audio is not out put f rom HDMI te rminal when S- Video/Video o r Com p onent Video is selected. Please go back and make the pr op er selection again. TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Setup Navigator BD PLAYER Select the HDMI Hi-s peed t ransmission setting. No rmally select [On] (Recommended). Select [Off] if the video o r audio of HDMI-connected was not out put in the test out put. On Off Setup Navigator BD PLAYER Select the out put video resolution at the Com ponent video te rminal. If you select [Sou rce Di rect], the out put r esolution is deter mined accor ding to the video fo rmat of the playing sou rce. Setup Navigator BD PLAYER Select the sc reen as pect ratio to match you r TV . Setup Navigator BD PLAYER Select [P r oceed] if you want to star t testing you r audio and video settings. Procee d Setup Navigator BD PLAYER The test tone will be out put. Reduce the volume to an a ppro priate level. The video and/o r audio may not be out put unde r ce rtain setu p. The setu p menu comes back in 30 seconds. Ye s No
03 22 En 10 F inish the Setup Navigator menu. Use ï« /ï¬ to select Finish , then press ENTER . To redo the settings from the start, select Go Back . Depending on the ou tput terminal setting of step 4 or the HDMI cable being used, it may happen that no picture and/or so und is output. If this happens, the setup returns to step 4 if there is no operation for over 3 0 seconds. Once the setup returns to step 4, redo the settings according to the connected device s and the HDMI cable being used. ï° About the screen saver The screen saver is automatically activated if there is no o peration for over 1 minute after pla yback is stopped or paused. The screen saver turns off when an operation is perfor med on the player or remote cont rol. The screen saver is automatically activated if there is no o peration for over 1 minute after the Home Menu or Home Media Gallery is displayed while playing a BD or DVD. With CDs and music files, the screen saver is automatically activated if no button is ope rated for over 1 minute, even while the CD or music file is playing. Operating the TV with the playerâÂÂs remote control When the man ufacturer code for your brand of TV is set on the playerâÂÂs remote control, the TV can be operated using the player âÂÂs remote cont rol. 1 Input the 2-digit manu facturer code. Press the number buttons (0 to 9) to input the code while pressing TV CONTROL ïµ . Note ⢠The factory setting is PIONEER 00 . ⢠If you make a mistake when inpu tting the code, start over from the beginning. ⢠When ther e are multiple code s fo r a manuf acturer, try in putting them in the indicated order until the TV can be operated. 2 Check that the TV can be operated. Caution ⢠For some m odels it may not be possible to operate the TV with the playerâÂÂs remote control, even for TVs of brands listed on the manufacturer code list. ⢠The setting may be restored to the default after the batteri es are replaced. If this happ ens, reset it. TV Preset code list Manufacturer Code(s) Setup Navigator BD PLAYER Setu p is com plete! The setu p menu comes back in 30 seconds. Finish Go Back TV CONTROL STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER ENTER INPUT SELECT CH VOL AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR PIONEER 00 , 31, 32, 07, 36, 42 , 51 ACURA 44 ADMIRAL 31 AIWA 60 AKAI 32, 35, 42 AKURA 41 ALBA 07, 39, 41, 44 AMSTRAD 42, 44, 47 ANITECH 44 ASA 45 ASUKA 41 AUDIOGONIC 07, 36 BASIC LINE 41, 44 BAUR 31, 07, 42 BEKO 38 BEON 07 BLAUP UNKT 31 BLUE SKY 41 BLUE STAR 18 BPL 18 BRANDT 36 BTC 41 BUSH 07, 41, 42, 44, 47, 56 CASCADE 44 CATHAY 07 CENTURION 07 CGB 42 CIMLINE 44 CLARIVOX 07 CLATRONIC 38 CONDOR 38 CONTEC 44 CROSLEY 32 CROWN 38, 44 CRYSTAL 42 CYBERTRON 41 DAEWOO 07, 44, 56 DAINICHI 41 DANSAI 07 DAYTON 44 DECCA 07, 48 DIXI 07, 44 DUMONT 53 ELIN 07 ELITE 41 ELTA 44 EMERSON 42 ERRES 07 FERGUSON 07, 36, 51 FINLANDIA 35 , 43, 54 FINLUX 32, 07, 45, 48, 53, 54 FIRSTLINE 40, 44 FISHER 32 , 35, 38, 45 FORMENTI 32, 07, 42 FRONTECH 31, 42, 46 FRONTECH / PROTECH 32 FUJITSU 48 FUNAI 40, 46, 58 GBC 32, 42 GE 00, 01, 08, 07, 10, 11, 17, 02, 28, 18 GEC 07, 34, 48 GELOSO 32, 44 GENERAL 29 GENEXXA 31, 41 GOLDSTAR 10, 23, 21, 02, 07, 50 GOODMANS 07, 39, 47 , 48, 56 GORENJE 38 GPM 41 GRAETZ 31, 42 GRANADA 07, 35, 42, 43, 48 GRADIENTE 30, 57 GRANDIN 18 GRUNDIG 31, 53 HANSEATIC 07, 42 HCM 18, 44 HINARI 07, 41, 44 HISAWA 18 HITACHI 31, 33, 34, 36, 42, 43, 54, 0 6, 10, 24, 25, 18 HUANYU 56 HYPSON 07, 18, 46 ICE 46, 47 IMPERIAL 38, 42 INDIANA 07 INGELEN 31 INTERFUN K 31, 32, 07 , 42 TV CO NTRO L STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE INPUT SELECT CH VOL
03 23 En Using the TOOLS menu Various function s can be called out according to the playerâÂÂs operating status. 1 Display the TOOLS menu . Press TOOLS . 2 Select and set the ite m. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . Note ⢠Items that cannot be cha nged are displayed in gray. The items that can be selected depend on the playerâÂÂs status. ï° To close the TOOLS menu Press TOOLS or RETURN . ï° TOOLS menu item list INTERVISION 46, 49 ISUKAI 41 ITC 42 ITT 31, 32, 42 JEC 05 JVC 13, 23 KAISUI 18, 41, 44 KAPSCH 31 KENDO 42 KENNEDY 32, 42 KORPEL 07 KOYODA 44 LEYCO 07, 40 , 46, 48 LIESENK & TTER 07 LOEWE 07 LUXOR 32, 42, 43 M - ELECTRONIC 31, 44, 45, 54, 56, 07 , 36, 51 MAGNADYNE 32, 49 MAGNAFON 49 MAGNAVOX 07, 10, 03, 12, 29 MANESTH 39, 46 MARANTZ 07 MARK 07 MATSUI 07, 39, 40, 42, 44, 4 7, 48 MCMICHAEL 34 MEDIATOR 07 MEMOREX 44 METZ 31 MINERVA 31, 53 MITSUBISHI 09, 10, 02, 21, 31 MULTITECH 44, 49 NEC 59 NECKERMANN 31, 07 NEI 07, 42 NIKKAI 05, 07, 41, 46, 48 NOBLIKO 49 NOKIA 32, 42, 52 NORDMENDE 32, 36, 51 , 52 OCEANIC 31, 32, 42 ORION 32, 07, 39, 40 OSAKI 41, 46 , 48 OSO 41 OSUME 48 OTTO VERSAND 31, 32, 07, 42 PALLADIUM 38 PANAMA 46 PANASONIC 31, 07, 08, 42, 22 PATHO CI NEMA 42 PAUSA 44 PHILCO 32, 42 PHILIPS 31, 07, 34, 56, 68 PHOENIX 32 PHONOLA 07 PROFEX 42, 44 PROTECH 07, 42, 44, 46, 49 QUELLE 31, 32, 07 , 42, 45, 53 R - LINE 07 RADIOLA 07 RADIOSHACK 10, 23, 21, 02 RBM 53 RCA 01, 10, 15, 16, 17, 18, 61, 62, 09 REDIFFUSION 32, 42 REX 31, 46 ROADSTAR 41, 44, 46 SABA 31, 36, 42, 51 SAISHO 39, 44, 46 SALORA 31, 32, 42, 43 SAMBERS 49 SAMSUNG 07, 38, 44, 46, 69 , 70 SANYO 35, 45, 48, 21, 14, 91 SBR 07, 34 SCHAUB LORENZ 42 SCHNEIDER 07, 41, 47 SEG 42, 46 SEI 32, 40, 49 SELECO 31, 42 SHARP 02, 19, 27, 67, 90 SIAREM 32, 49 SIEMENS 31 SINUDYNE 32, 39, 40, 49 SKANTIC 43 SOLAVOX 31 SONOKO 07, 44 SONOLOR 31, 35 SONTEC 07 SONY 04 SOUNDWAVE 07 STANDARD 41, 44 STERN 31 SUSUMU 41 SYSLINE 07 TANDY 31, 41, 48 TASHIKO 34 TATUNG 07, 48 TEC 42 TELEAVIA 36 TE LEFUNKEN 36, 37, 52 TELETECH 44 TENSAI 40, 41 THOMSON 36, 51, 52, 63 THORN 31, 07, 42, 45 , 48 TOMASHI 18 TOSHIBA 05, 02, 26, 21 , 53 TOWADA 42 ULTRAVOX 32, 42, 49 UNIDEN 92 UNIVERSUM 31, 07, 38, 42, 45, 46, 54 VESTEL 07 VICTOR 13 VOXSON 31 WALTHAM 43 WATSON 07 WATT RADIO 32, 42, 49 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 07 YOKO 07 , 42, 46 ZENITH 03, 20 Item Descripti on Output Vide o Resolution Switch the output video resolution f rom the various out put te rminals (page 25). Play from Begi nning Play the selected title, track or file from the start. Play Mode Display th e Play Mode scre en (page 29) . Angle Switch the BD-ROM/D VD-Video discâÂÂs cam era angles (page 28) . Subtitle Switch the subtitles (page 28). Audio Switch t he audio streams/c hannels (page 28). Secondary Audio Switch the BD-ROMâÂÂs secondary audio streams/channels (page 28). Secondary Video Switch the BD-ROMâÂÂs secondary video (Picture-in-Picture) (page 29). Original/Play Li st S witch the DVD-R/-R WâÂÂs (VR format) list screen between th e original list and the playlis t. HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS ENTER Vi deo A djust Au dio DRC A dd to HMG Playlist Au dio Subtitle BD PLAYER TOOLS TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER
03 24 En Erasing the additional data from BD-ROMs When a BD-ROM is played, addition a l data may be stored in the playerâÂÂs memory (local storage). If the message indicating low memory (local storage) appe ars, erase the BDMV data. Caution ⢠When th e BDMV data is erased, all the data of secondary video (Picture-in-Pic ture), secondary audio and/o r bookmark, etc. that has been stored is erased. 1 Display the Tools menu. With no disc loaded, press the TOOLS button. 2 Select and set the item. Use ï© /ïª to select BDMV Data Erase , then press ENTER . 3 Erase the data. Use ï« /ï¬ to select Yes , then press ENTER . Caution ⢠It takes time to erase th e BDMV data for a while. Do no t unplug the power cord for about 10 seconds after performing the above procedure. Switching the video output terminal Use the procedure below to switch th e video output terminal. Switch between the d igital outp ut (HDMI outpu t) and the an alog output (Component Video output, S -Video output or Video output). ï¦ Switch the termin al from wh ich the vi deo signa ls are output. The video output terminal switches each time the button is pressed. Caution ⢠The picture may not be displa yed for a while whe n the video output te rminal is swit ched. â¢W h e n t h e HDMI OUT terminal is selected, no vi deo signals are output fr om the other video o utput termin als. ⢠When a video o utput terminal other than the HDMI OUT terminal is s elected, no audio an d video signals are output fr om the HDMI OUT termina l. Add to HMG Pl aylist Add the select ed track or file to the HMG Playlist (page 35). Delete from HMG Playlist Dele te the selected tra ck or file from the H MG Playlist (page 36). Now Playing Display the playback scre en of the curr ently playing track or file. Video Adjust Display the picture quality adjustment screen (page 37). Audio DRC Adjust the Aud io DRC (page 38). BDMV Data Erase Erase the additional data from BD-ROMs. Item Description HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS ENTER Output Video Resolution BDMV Data Erase BD PLA YER T OOLS TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Ye s No Erases all of the data added from BDMV . Please wait a while. OK to erase data? VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY O UTPUT RESOLUTION
03 25 En Switching the output video resolution Use the procedure below to switch the output video resolution from the various video ou tp ut terminals. ï¦ Press OUTPUT RESOLUTION . The current output video resolu tion are displayed on the TV screen and on the playerâÂÂs fro nt panel display. When pressed again, the output video resolution switches. The output video resolution can also be switched using ï© /ïª . The output video resolution can also be switched by pressing RESOLUTION on the playerâÂÂs front panel. The output video resolution can also be switched by selecting Output Video Re solution from the TOOLS menu. The output video resolution dep ends on the video output term inal. See the table below. Caution ⢠On some TVs, the picture may not be displaye d properly when the resolution is switched. If this happens, use OUTPUT RESOLUTION to set to a resolution at which the picture is properly displayed. ⢠When video signals ar e being output with a resolution of 1080/ 60i, 1080/60p, 1080/24p or 720/60p from the HDMI output terminal or component video outp ut terminals, the picture may be output with an aspect ratio of 16:9, even if the TV Aspect Ratio is set to 4:3 (Standard) . ⢠The picture may not be displayed for a while when the resolution is switched. ï° About Film material The film materia l is a video signa l with a frame rate of 24 frames/ second. For example, these ma terials include 1080/24p, 720/24p, etc. ï° To output film material To output 1080/24p film materia l from the HDMI output terminal, set the output vid eo resolution to either Auto or Source Direct . Caution ⢠1080/24p signals can only be output from the HD MI OUT terminal. They canno t be output from other vi deo terminals. â¢W h e n Auto is selected, the pictur e is output at 60 frames/ second if you r TV is not co m patible with 1080/24p signals. â¢W h e n Source Direct is selected, the signals are output as such, even if your TV is not compatib le with 1080/24p signals. If the picture is not dis played properly, use OUTPUT RESOLUTION to set to the output video resolution at which the picture is prop erly displayed. ⢠720/24p video signals are output at 60 frames/second, even if the resolution is set to Aut o or Source Dire ct . Output video resolution setting HDMI OUT terminal COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals 1 1. Depending on the BD, the p ictures may not be output. S-VIDEO/VIDEO output terminal 1 Auto 2 2. Cannot be selected when the video sign als are being output from the COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals, S-VIDEO output ter minal or the VID EO output terminal. Resolution preferred by TV 3,4 3. For details on the output of film mate rial (1 080/24p or 720/2 4p video signals), see To output film material . 4. Sources with a re solution of 720/60p and 720/24p are output at 1080/60i, even if the TVâÂÂs recommended resolution is 1080/60p. âÂÂâ 480i 480/60i 480/60i 480/60i 480p 480/60p 480/60p 1080i 1080/60i 1080/60i 5 5. Depending on the BD or DVD, the signals may be output at 480/60p. 1080p 2 1080/60p 6 6. Depending on the connected HDMI cable, the video signals may not be output. Also, sources with a resolution of 720/60p and 720/24p are output at 1080/60i. âÂÂâ Source Direct Resolution recorded on disc 3,7,8 7. Depending on the connected TV, the video signals may not be output. 8. 720/24p film material is output at 720/60p. Resolution recorded on disc 7,8,9 9. 1080/24p film material is output at 1080/60i. 480/60i CLEAR ENTER VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION Auto î î Output Video R esolution Source : 1 08 0/6 0i Current Output : 1 08 0/6 0i Video resolution of currently playing discs Output video resolution from the player Example: Auto î î Output Video R esolution Source : 1 08 0/24p Current Output : 1 08 0/24p Video resolution of currently playing discs Output video resolution from the player Example:
04 26 En Chapter 4 Playback Playing discs or files This section describes the playerâÂÂs main operations. For the types of discs that can be played, see Playable discs on page 8. For the types of files that can be played, see Playable files on page 10. Music files recorded on di scs are played with Home Media Gallery (page 34). 1 Press ïµ STANDBY/ON to tu rn on the power. Turn the TVâÂÂs power on and switch its input beforehand. 2 Press ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray and load the disc. Note ⢠Load the disc with the printed side facing up. ⢠Several dozen seconds are required to read the disc. Once reading is completed, the type of disc is displayed on the playerâÂÂs front panel display. 3 Press ï¤ PLAY to play the disc. To pause, press ïÂÂ¥ PAUSE during playba ck. To stop, press ï§ STOP during play back. Note ⢠So me discs star t playing a utomatically when the dis c tray is closed. ⢠DVD-Video discs have parental lock feature s. Input the password registered in the playerâÂÂs settings to unlo ck the parental lock. For details, see page 46. ⢠For some BD- R/RE, playback protection is set for the disc or titles. Input the code number set for the disc to unlock the protection. ï° If the disc menu is displayed For some discs, the disc menu is displayed automatically wh en playback starts. The con tents of the disc menu and the way to operate differ from disc to disc. ï° Resuming playback from where it was stopped (resume playback function) â¢W h e n ï§ STOP is pressed during playback, the point at which the disc stopped is stored in th e memory. When ï¤ PLAY is pressed, playback resumes from that point. ⢠For CD and music files, playback starts from the beginning of the track/file that was playing. ⢠To cancel the resume playback fun ction, press ï§ STOP while playback is stop ped. Note ⢠The resume playback f unction is canceled automatically in the following cases: â When the disc tray is open ed. â When the file list window i s switched. â When the power is turned off. (Fo r BDs and DVDs this does not cancel the resume playback function.) ⢠The resume playback f unction cannot be used for some disc s. Forward and reverse scanning 1 During playback, press ï or ï® . ⢠The scanning speed switches each time the button is pressed. The speed steps depend on the disc or file (the speed is displayed on the TV screen). ⢠Forward or reverse scann ing is also possible by holding the button down. Normal playback resumes when the button is released. Note ⢠No sound is output when scanning BDs and DVDs. ⢠Sound is output when scanning CDs and music files. ⢠For some discs, normal playba ck resumes automatically when the chapter switches. ï° To resume normal playback ï¦ Press ï¤ PLAY. STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE TV CONTROL INPUT SELECT CH VOL TV CONTROL STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE INPUT SELECT CH VOL PLAY PREV PAUS E STOP NEXT RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD PLAY PREV PAUS E STOP NEXT
04 27 En Playing specific ti tles, chapters or tracks ï¦ Input the number of the title, chap ter or track you want to play. ⢠Use the number buttons (0 to 9) to input th e number, then press ENTER . Note ⢠For some disc s, it is not poss ible to specify and play titles, chapters or tracks. ⢠Press CLEAR to clear the values you have inpu t. Skipping content ï¦ Press ï¯ PREV or ï° NEXT. â¢W h e n ï° NEXT is pressed, the disc skips ahead to the beginning of the next ti tle/chapter/track/file. â¢W h e n ï¯ PREV is pressed, the disc skips back to the beginning of the currently pl aying title/ch apter/track/f ile. Press twice to sk ip back to t he beginnin g of the previou s title/chap ter/ track/file. Note ⢠There are some discs and file s for which skipping is not possible. Playing in slow motion ï¦ While playback is pau sed, press and hold ï± / o r / ï² . ⢠The speed switches each time th e button is pressed (the speed is displayed on the TV screen). The speed steps depen d on the disc. Note ⢠It is not possible to switch the speed during reverse slow motion playback. ⢠No sound is outpu t during slow motion playback. ⢠For some discs, normal playba ck resumes automatically when the chapter switches. ⢠There are some discs for which slow motion pla yback is not possible. ï° To resume normal playback ï¦ Press ï¤ PLAY. Step forward an d step reverse ï¦ While playback is paused, press ï± / o r / ï² . ⢠The disc moves a ste p forward or reverse each time the button is pressed. Note ⢠For some discs, normal playba ck resumes automatically when the chapter switches. ⢠There are some discs and files for which step fo rward/reverse playback is not possible. ï° To resume normal playback ï¦ Press ï¤ PLAY. BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD CLEAR ENTER AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD PLAY PREV PAUS E STOP NEXT RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD PLAY PREV PAUS E STOP NEXT BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD PLAY PREV PAUS E STOP NEXT
04 28 En Switching the camera angles For BD-ROM and DVD-Video disc s on which mu ltiple angles ar e recorded, the angles can be switched during playback. ï¦ During playback, press ANGLE. ⢠The cu rrent angle and total n umber of recorded angles are displayed on the TV screen and o n the playerâÂÂs front panel display. When pressed ag ain, the angle switches. ⢠The angles can also be switched using ï© /ïª . ⢠The angles can also be switched by selecting Angle from the TOOLS menu. ⢠Angle mark is displayed for scenes at which multiple angles are recorded. Note ⢠For some discs, the angle can also be switched on the menu screen. ⢠Angle ma rk is not displayed if Angle/Seconda ry Indicator is set to Off (page 42). Switching the subtitles For discs on which multiple subtit les are recorded, the subtitles can be switched during playback. ï¦ During playback, press SUBTITLE. ⢠The current subtitles and total nu mber of recorded subtitles are displayed on the TV screen and o n the playerâÂÂs front panel display. When pressed again, the subtitle switches. ⢠The subtitles can also be switched us ing ï© /ïª . ⢠The subtitles can also be switched by selecting Subtitl e from the TOOLS menu. Note ⢠The types of recorded subtitles depend on the disc. ⢠If the subtitles are not switched when SUBTIT LE is pressed, switch them from the menu screen . ï° Turning the subtitles off ï¦ Press SUBTITLE, then pre ss CLEAR. Switching the audio streams/ channels For discs on whic h multiple aud io streams/chan nels are recorded, audio streams/channels can be swi tched during playback. Also use this procedure to switch the secondary audio for BD-ROMs o n which secondary audio is recorded. ï¦ During playback, press AUDIO. ⢠To switch the secondary audio, press SECONDARY AUDIO . ⢠The current audio stre ams/channel s and total num ber of recorded audio streams/cha nne ls are displayed on th e TV screen and on the playerâÂÂs fron t panel display. When pressed again, the audio stream/c hannel switches. ⢠The audi o streams/channels can also be switched using ï© /ïª . ⢠The audio stream s/channels can also be switched by selecting Audio or Secondary Aud io from the TOOLS menu. ⢠Secondary audio mark is displayed for scenes at which secondary audio is recor ded. BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER INPUT SELECT CH VOL 1 /4 î î Angle Example: Current angle/Total number of recorded angles BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER INPUT SELECT CH VOL 1 /2 Englis h Subtitle î î Example: Current subtitle/Total number of recorded subtitles BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER CLEAR ENTER VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION 2/2 Engli sh Dol by True HD 9 6kHz 7. 1ch L C R L s R s L b R b LFE Audio î î Current audio stream/Total number of recorded audio streams Example: Audio ty pe Number of channels Channels recorded on disc
04 29 En Note ⢠The typ es of recorded audio streams/cha nnels depend on the disc. ⢠If the audio stream/channel is not switched when AUDIO is pressed, switch it from the menu screen. ⢠Some BD-ROMs do not in clude secondary audio. ⢠Seconda ry audio mark is not displayed if Angle/ Seconda ry Indicator is set to Off (page 42). Switching the secondary video Use the procedure below to switch the secondary video (Picture-in- Picture) recorded on the BD-ROM. ï¦ During playback, pr ess SECONDARY VIDEO. ⢠The cu rrent secondary video strea m and to tal number of recorded secondary video stre ams are displayed on the TV screen and on the playerâÂÂs front pa nel display. When pressed again, the secondary video stream switches. ⢠The secondary video streams can also be switched using ï© /ïª . ⢠The secondary video streams can also be switched by sele cting Seconda ry Video from the TOOLS menu. ⢠Secondary video mark is displayed for scenes at which secondary video is recorded. Note ⢠Some BD-ROMs do not in clude secondary video. ⢠Seconda ry video mark is not disp layed if An gle/Secondary Indicator is set to Off (page 42). Displaying the di sc information ï¦ Press DISPLAY. The disc information appears on the TV screen. The info rmation switches each time the button is pressed. The information dis play differs duri ng playback and whe n playback is stopped. Using the Play Mode functions Playing from a specific time (Time Search) 1 During playba ck, press PLAY MODE to dis play the Play Mode screen. The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by selecting Play Mo de from the TOOLS menu. 2 Select Ti me Search. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD CLEAR ENTER VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION HOME MEDIA GALLERY DISPLAY POPUP MENU 1 /4 Secondar y Video î î Example: Current secondary video stream/Total number of recorded secondary video streams BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Play Mo de Time Search Title Sea rch Cha pte r Sea rch A-B Re peat Re p eat/Random
04 30 En 3 Input the time. Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ï© /ïª to input the time. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu rsor. Note ⢠To play from 4 5 minutes, input 0 , 0 , 4 , 5 , 0 and 0 , th en press ENTER . ⢠To play from 1 hour 20 minutes, input 0 , 1 , 2 , 0 , 0 and 0, then press ENTER . ⢠Press CLEAR to clear the values you have inpu t. 4 Startin g playback from the specified time. Use ï« /ï¬ to select Search , then press ENTER . ï° To cancel Time Search Press PLAY M ODE or RETURN . Note ⢠There ar e some discs for which Time S earch is not available. Playing a specific title, chapter or track (Search) 1 Press PLAY MODE to display the Pl ay Mode screen. The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by select ing Play Mode from the TOOLS menu. 2 Select the type of search . Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . See the table on pa ge 33 for the search types. 3 Input the nu mber. Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ï© /ïª to input the number. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cursor. 4 Starting playback from the spec ified title, chapter or track. Use ï« /ï¬ to select Search , then press ENTER . ï° To cancel the search ï¦ Press PLAY MODE or RETURN. Note ⢠To search for title 32, input 0 , 3 and 2 , then press ENTER . ⢠There are some discs for whic h searching is n ot available. ⢠Press CLEAR to clear the values you have input. VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR ENTER ENTER Time Sea rch ï© ïª 1 2:45:00 Sea rch VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Play Mo de Time Sea rch Title Search Cha pte r Sea rch A-B Re peat Re p eat/Random VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR ENTER ENTER Title Sea rch ï© ïª 0 32 Title Sea rch
04 31 En Playing a specific section within a title or track repeatedly (A-B Repeat) Use this procedure to play a specif ic sectio n within a ti tle or track repeate dly. 1 During playb ack, press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode screen. The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by select ing Play Mode from the TOOLS menu. 2 Select A-B Repeat. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 3 Select the starting point for A- B Repeat. Use ï« /ï¬ to select A (Start) , then press ENTER . 4 Select the end poin t for A-B Repeat. Use ï« /ï¬ to select B (End) , then press ENTER . A-B Repeat playback starts. ï° To cancel A-B Repeat play ⢠Select Off from the Repeat/Random screen, then press ENTER . ⢠During playback, press ï§ STOP or CLEAR . Note ⢠A-B Repeat p lay is canceled in the following cases: â When the angle is switched (for BD-ROM and DVD-Video discs only). â When you search ou tside the repeat range. â When you start other repeat or r andom play. Playing repeat edly (Repeat Play) Use this procedure to play the currently playi ng disc, title, chapter, track or file repe atedly. 1 During playba ck, press PLAY MODE to dis play the Play Mode screen. The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by selecting Play Mo de from the TOOLS menu. 2 Selec t Repeat/Random. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 3 Select the type of Repeat Play. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . See the table on pa ge 33 for the types of repea t playback. ï° To cancel Repeat Play â¢S e l e c t Off from the Repeat/Random screen, then press ENTER . ⢠During playback, press ï§ STOP or CLEAR . Note ⢠There are some discs and files for which R epeat Play is not available. ⢠The type of repeat modes depends on the disc and file bei ng played. See the table on page 33. ⢠Repeat Pla y is canceled in the following cases: â When the angle is switched (for BD-R OM and DVD-Video discs only). â When yo u search out side the repe at range. â When yo u start othe r repeat o r random pla y. VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS Play Mo de Time Sea rch Title Sea rch Cha pte r Sea rch A-B Repeat Re p eat/Random A-B Re peat A (Start) B (End) Off VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Play Mo de Time Sea rch Title Sea rch Cha pte r Sea rch A-B Re peat Repeat/Ran dom Re p eat/Random Off Re p eat All Re p eat T r ack Random T r ack
04 32 En Playing in random order (Random Play) Use this procedure to play the tr acks or files in random order. 1 During playb ack, press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode screen. The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by select ing Play Mode from the TOOLS menu. 2 Select Repeat/Random. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 3 Select the R andom Play. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . ï° To cancel Random Play ⢠Select Off from the Repeat/Random screen, then press ENTER . ⢠During playback, press ï§ STOP or CLEAR . Note ⢠There are some discs and files for which Random Play is not available. ⢠Random Play is canceled in the following cases: â When you use th e search function. â When you start repeat play. VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Play Mo de Time Sea rch Title Sea rch Cha pte r Sea rch A-B Re peat Repeat/Ran dom Re p eat/Random Off Re p eat All Re p eat T r ack Random T r ack
04 33 En About Play Mode t ypes The functions that can be used di ffer according to the typ e of disc and fil e. In some cases, some of the functions cannot be us ed. Ch eck the usable functions on the table below. Play Mode type Mark 1 1. During playback in a Play Mode, the type of Play Mode is in dicated by the mark. Disc/file ty pe BD-ROM 2 2. For BD-ROM and DVD-Video discs, some of the functions cannot be used with some titles. BD-R BD-RE DVD- Video 2 DVD-R DVD-RW (VR format) AVCHD Music file CD Repeat play Playing a specific section within a title or track repeatedly (A-B Repeat) ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï± Playing a title re peat edly (Title Repeat) ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ Playing a chapter re peatedly (Chapter Repeat) ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ Playing a track or file r epeatedly (Track Repeat) ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï± Playing all the titles, tra cks or files on the disc repeatedly (All Repeat) ï³ï±ï³ ï± 3 3. The original titles are played repeatedly. Howeve r, the playlist titles cannot be pla yed repeatedly. ï³ ï± 4 4. The files in the folder or HM G Playlist are played repeatedly. ï± Random play Playing the tracks or files in rando m order (Random Track) ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï± Search Playing from a specific tim e (Time Search) â ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï± Playing a specific title (Tit le Search) â ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ Playing a specific chapter (Chapter Search) â ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ Playing a specific track (Track Search) â ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï±
04 34 En Playing from the Home Media Gallery The Home Media Gallery lets you displa y a list of the titles, tracks or files recorded on the disc. The di scs that can be pla yed from the Home Media Gallery are a s shown below (see also page 8 ). â¢B D - R / - R E d i s c s ⢠DVDs recorded in VR format ⢠Music CDs (CD-DAs and DTS-CDs) ⢠DVDs/CDs on which only data files of music files, etc. are recorded Playing discs 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery . The Home Media Gallery can also be displayed by select ing Home Media Gallery from Home Menu then pressi ng ENTER . 2 Select the disc. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 3 Select the title or track to be played. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . Playback st arts. ï° Closing the Home Media Gallery Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY (or HOME MENU ). Note ⢠When playing a mu sic CD (CD-DA or DTS-CD), the Now Playing screen is displayed. ⢠Some BD-R/-RE discs have playba ck protectio n. To cancel the protection, input the pa ssword set for the disc. ⢠To play DVD-R/-RW (VR format) playlists, switch to the playlist using the Original/Play List command on the TOOLS m enu (page 23). Playing music files 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery. The Home Media Gallery can a lso be displayed by selecting Home Media Gallery from Home Menu then pressing ENTER . 2 Select th e disc. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY O UTPUT RESOLUTION TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Home Me dia Gallery BD PLAYER Sea rch fo r the pa rt you want to play f rom a list of the disc's content. BD-R BDAV HMG Playlist BD-R BDAV My F avorite TV P rogram Original 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 items 0 h 54 m 30 s 7/0 1/200 8 Title T otal : Recording Date : Morning serial drama News at noon Evening movie Midnight variety show Playback protection W orld heritage Drama: Blank time Music and us VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY O UTPUT RESOLUTION TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Home Me dia Gallery BD PLAYER Sea rch fo r the pa rt you want to play f rom a list of the disc's content. CD-ROM HMG Playlist
04 35 En 3S e l e c t M u s i c . Press ENTER . 4 Select Fol ders or All Songs. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . ⢠Fold ers â The files in the selected fo lder are displayed. ⢠All Songs â All the recorded files are displayed. If you have selected All Songs , proceed to step 6. 5 Select the fo lder containing the file you wa nt to play. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . A list of t he files in the selected folder (o r in the fold ers below it) is displayed. 6 Select and set the file you want to play. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . Playback st arts. The Now Playi ng sc reen (shown below) is displayed. Playing in the desired order (HMG Playlist) The discs that can add tracks an d files to the HMG (Home Media Gallery) Pla ylist are as sho wn below. ⢠Music CDs (CD-DAs and DTS-CDs) ⢠DVDs/C Ds on mu sic files are r ecorded ï° Adding tracks/files Use this proce dure to add tracks and files, an d create the HMG Playlist. 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery. The Home Media Gallery can a lso be displayed by selecting Home Media Gallery from Home Menu pressing ENTER . 2 Select th e disc. Load the disc beforehand. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . CD-ROM View available music. Music Music CD-ROM Fol d ers All Songs Folder s CD-ROM/Mu si c 15 items Mu si c Folder00 1 Mu si c Folder002 Mu si c Folder003 Mu si c Folder004 Mu si c005.mp3 Mu si c00 6.mp3 Mu si c007.mp3 Mu si c00 8.mp3 Mu si c Folder00 1 CD-ROM/Mu si c/Folder s 15 items Mu si c00 1.mp3 Mu si c002.mp3 Mu si c003.mp3 Mu si c004.mp3 Mu si c005.mp3 Mu si c00 6.mp3 Mu si c007.mp3 Mu si c00 8.mp3 Mu s ic 001 .mp3 DATA DI SC 0.05.34 0.02.33 Play Currently playing file Total file playing time Elapsed time VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY O UTPUT RESOLUTION TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Home Me dia Gallery BD PLAYER Sea rch fo r the pa rt you want to play f rom a list of the disc's content. CD-ROM HMG Playlist
04 36 En 3 Select the track/fi le to be adde d. Use ï© /ïª to select. 4 Press TOOLS to display the TOOLS menu. 5 Select Add to HMG Playlist. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . The track or file selected in st ep 3 is added to the HMG Playlist. To add more tracks or files, re peat steps 3 to 5. ï° To add the currently playing track/file to the HMG Playlist ï¦ While the track/file is playing, press TOOLS to display the TOOLS menu. ï¦ Use ï© /ïª to select Add to HMG Playlist, then press ENTER. Note ⢠A maximum of 24 tracks/files can be added to the HMG Playlist. ⢠The HMG Playlist is cleared in the following cases: â When the power is turn ed off. â When the disc tray is opened. ï° Playing the HMG Playlist 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery. The Home Media Gallery can a lso be displayed by selecting Home Media Gallery from Home Menu pressing ENTER . 2 Select HMG Playlist. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 3 Select the track/file to be played. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . Playback st arts. The Now Playi ng sc reen (shown below) is displayed. Press ï§ STOP to stop playback. When a music CD is stopped, the Now Playing screen tu rns off. When a music file is stopped, the HMG Playlist screen reappears. ï° Deleting tracks/files from the HMG Playlist ï¦ Select the track/file to be de leted, then press TOOLS to display the TOOLS menu. ï¦ Use ï© /ïª to select Delet e from HMG Playlist, then press ENTER. Folder s CD-ROM/Mu si c 15 items Mu si c00 1.mp3 Mu si c002.mp3 Mu si c003.mp3 Mu si c004.mp3 Mu si c005.mp3 Mu si c00 6.mp3 Mu si c007.mp3 Mu si c00 8.mp3 HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS ENTER Folder s CD-ROM/Mu si c 15Items Mu si c00 1.mp3 Mu si c002.mp3 Mu si c003.mp3 Mu si c004.mp3 Mu si c005.mp3 Mu si c00 6.mp3 Mu si c007.mp3 Mu si c00 8.mp3 Play from Beginning Add to HM G Playli st Now Playing BD PLAYER TOOL S VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY O UTPUT RESOLUTION Home Me dia Gallery BD PLAYER Dis play the HMG Playlist. CD-ROM HMG Playlist HM G Playli st CD-ROM 21 items Tra ck 15.mp3 Tra ck07.mp3 Tra ck03.mp3 Tra ck 16.mp3 Tra ck0 8.mp3 Tra ck05.mp3 Tra ck 10.mp3 Tra ck03.mp3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Mu s ic 001 .mp3 DATA DI SC 0.05.34 0.02.33 Play HM G Currently playing track/file Total track/file playing time Elapsed time
05 37 En Chapter 5 Adjusting audio and video Adjusting the video The quality of the playback picture can be adju sted according to the TV you are using. 1 During playback, press VIDEO ADJUST to display th e Video Adjust screen. The Video Adjust screen can al so be displayed by selecting Video Adjust fr om the TOOLS menu. 2 Select a prese t. Select using ï« /ï¬ according to the TV being used . ⢠LC D â Select this when connected to a liquid crysta l display TV. ⢠PD P â Select this when c onnected to a plasma TV of an other brand. ⢠Pioneer PDP â Select this when connected to a Pioneer plasma TV. ⢠Pr ojector â Select this when con n ected to a front projector. ⢠Professional â With this setting, video signal processing is restrained. Select this when connected to a professional monitor. ⢠Memory1 to 3 â Picture quality settings with ad justed parameters can be stored in the memory. For a description of the parameters , see When Memory1, 2 or 3 i s selected below. ï° When Memory1, 2 or 3 is selected 1 Select Adjustments. Use ïª to select Adjustments , th en press ENTER . A detailed settings screen appears. 2 Select the item to be adjusted. Use ï© /ïª to select. 3 Adjust the picture qual ity. When ï« /ï¬ are pressed, the adjustments can be made wa tching the picture. The detailed se ttings screen reappears when ENTER is pressed. ⢠Prog.M otion â Adjust according to the type of image (movie or still image). This i s effective wh en outputting vide o materials as progressive images. ⢠Pure Cinema â This se tting optim izes the operation of the progressive scanning circuit for playing film materials. Normally set it to Auto1 . If the picture seems unnatural, switch this to Auto 2 , On or Off (page 38). ⢠YNR â Reduces noise in the luminance (Y) sig nal. ⢠CNR â Reduces noise in the chroma (C) signal. ⢠BNR â Reduces the block noise (block-shaped distorti on generated upon MPEG compression). ⢠MNR â Reduces the mosquito noise (distortion along the contours of the pict ure generated upon MPEG compre ssion). ⢠Detail â Emphasizes the pict ureâÂÂs co ntours. ⢠Black Setup â Select the black level as the setup level. Normally select 7.5 IRE . If the black le vel is too bright due to th e combination with the connected monitor, sel ect 0 IRE . ⢠Gamma Correction â Adjusts how the dark portions of the picture look. ⢠White Level â Adjusts the level of the white portions. ⢠Black Level â Adjusts the level of the black portions. ⢠Hue â Adjusts the balance betwee n green and red. ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts the densi ty of the col ors. Note ⢠Prog.M otion an d Pure Cinema have the effect only for pictures recorded in the interlaced sca n format (480i or 1080i signals). ⢠Prog.M otion is disabled when P ure Cinema is se t to On. ⢠Bl ack Setup have the effect only fo r pictures output from th e VIDEO and S-VIDEO ou tput termin als. ⢠YNR , CNR, BNR and MNR have no effect for 1080/24p signals output from the HDMI OUT terminal. RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE VIDEO ADJUST TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Adjustments Vi deo A djust PDP Prog. Motion Pure Cinema YNR CNR BNR MNR Video Adju st [ Memory 1 ] Use [ ][ ] to adjust the picture to progressive scan . Motion Still Auto1 Off Max Off Max Off Max Off Max 1/2 P age Motion Still Prog. Motion
05 38 En ï° Closing the Video Adjust screen Press HOME MENU . ï° About Pure Cinema There are two types of video signals: ⢠Vide o material â Video signals recorded at 30 fram es/second ⢠Film material â Video signals recorded at 24 frames/second âÂÂPure Cinemaâ u ses signal processi ng suited for âÂÂfilm mat erialâ when converting 480i or 1080i in terlaced video signals into progressive video signals, resultin g in clear picture reproduction without losing the quality of the material. is displayed on the disc information scre en when playing the âÂÂfilm materi alâ pictures of DVD-Video discs (page 29). Adjusting the Audio DRC Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) has the effect o f playing loud sounds softly and soft sounds loudly . Adjust the setting for example when watching movies late at ni ght and the dialogues are difficult to hear. 1 During playb ack, display the TOOLS menu. Press TOOLS . 2 Select and set Audio DRC. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 3 Adjust the setting. Use ï« /ï¬ to switch between Off , Lo w, Me dium, High and Auto . ï° Closing the Au dio DRC screen Press ENTER or HOME MENU . Note ⢠This only affects the Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby Digital audio signals of BDs and DVDs. â¢W h e n Auto is selected, the setting has the same effect as High or Off for Dolby TrueHD signals, depending on the content. For Dolby Digital Plus an d Dolby Digita l, the setting has the sam e effect as Off . ⢠Audio DR C affects the aud io signals output from the foll owing audio output terminals: â Analog audio signals output from the AUDIO OUT (2 ch) or AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) terminals. â Linear PCM audio signals output from the DIG ITAL OU T terminals o r HDMI OUT terminal. ⢠The effect may be weak for some discs. HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS ENTER TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Au dio Subtitle Au dio DRC Vi deo A djust Output Vi deo Resolution BD PLAYER TOOLS TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Au dio DRC Off Adjust the audio dynamic range. This setting is ineffective de pending on the p laying audio.
06 39 En Chapter 6 Advanced settings Changing the settings (Initial Setup) Operating the Initial Setup screen 1 When playback is stopped, display the Home Menu scre en. Press HOME MENU . 2 Select and set Initia l Setup. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 3 Select the i tem and change th e setting. Use ï© /ïª /ï« /ï¬ to select, then press ENTER . ï° Closing the Initial Setup screen Press HOME MENU . HOME MENU RETURN PLAY ENTER TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER HOME MENU BD PLAYER Set u p the playe r fo r use. Home Me dia Gallery Initial Setup TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER
06 40 En Note ⢠Items that cannot be changed are indicated in gray. The it ems that can be selected depen d on the playerâÂÂs status. ⢠The factory default settings are indicated in bold. Setting Options Explanation Video Out TV Aspect Ratio 16:9 (Widescr een) Select th is when connected to a wide (16:9) T V. 4:3 (Stand ard) Select this wh en connecte d to a convent ional TV. 4:3 Video Out Full 4:3 pictures are di splayed over the entire screen. Normal 4:3 pictures are display ed with black b ands along the sides. Sele ct this when you cannot switch the aspect ratio to 4:3 on th e TV. DVD 16:9 Video Out Letter Box 16:9 pictu res are displayed with black ba nds at the top and bottom. Sele ct this when watching on a 4 :3 screen. Pan & Scan The picture is displaye d over the entire scre en, with the left and right sides of the 1 6:9 picture cut off. Sele ct this to watch 4:3 pictures over the entire screen. Still Picture Field This eliminates instabilit y of the picture when playback is pa used. Frame This makes pictures clear when playback is paused, but instabi lity may be observed. Auto Field and Frame is se lected automaticall y according to the disc being played. Audio O ut Dolby Digital Out * Only valid for digital audio outputs. Dolby Digital 1 Dolby Digital audio s ignals are output. With BD -ROM discs, the secondar y audio and interactive audio are mixed for ou tput. Dolby Digital 2 Dolby Digital audio signals a re output. With BD-RO Ms, the signals are output without mixing the secondar y audio and in teractive audi o signals. Dolby Digital ï¤ PCM Select this when the c onnected AV receiver or amplifier, etc., is not compatible with Dolby Digital audio si gnals. The Dol by Digital audio sig nals are converted into li near PCM audi o signals for output. DTS Out * Only valid for digital audio outputs. DTS 1 DTS Digital Surro und audio signals ar e output . With BD-ROM discs, the secondary audio and interactive audio are mixed for output. DTS 2 DTS Digit al Surround audio sig nals are output . With BD-ROMs, the signals are output without mixing the secondary audio an d interactive audi o signals. DTS ï¤ PCM Select this when the connected AV receiver or amplifier, etc., is no t compatible with DTS Digital Su rround audio signal s. The DTS Digital Surr ound audio signals ar e converted into linear PC M audio sign als for outpu t. AAC Out * Only valid for digital audio outputs. AAC Select this when the connecte d AV receiver or amplifier, etc., is compatible with AAC audio signals. The AAC audio sign als are output. AAC ï¤ PCM Select this when the connecte d AV receiver or amplifier, et c., is not compatible with AAC audio signals. The AA C audio signals are converted into linear PCM audio sign als for output. DTS Downmix Stereo DTS-HD Master Audio signals, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio sign als or DTS Digital Surround a udio signals conv erted to line ar PCM audio sign als are converted into 2-channel (stereo) signals fo r output. Lt/Rt DTS-HD Master Audio signals, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals or DTS Dig ital Surround a udio signals conv erted to line ar PCM audio sign als are converted into 2-channel signals compatible with Dolby Surround for output (when the connected AV receiver or amplifier, etc., is compat ible with Dolby Pro Logic, the AV receiver or am plifier output s the linear PCM audio signals as su rround audio signals). Speakers Audio Output Mode 2 Channel Select this when the TVâÂÂs ana log 2-channel (s tereo) audio input termin als are connected t o the playerâÂÂs AUDIO OUT (2 ch) terminals. Multi-channel Select this when the mu lti-channel audio input terminals of an AV receiver or amplifier, etc., are connected to the playerâÂÂs AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) terminals. Speaker S etup When an AV receiver or amplif ier, et c., is connect ed to the playerâÂÂs AUDIO OUT (7.1 c h) terminals, this sets whether or not to use the speakers which are con nected to the AV receiv er or amplifier, as well as the size of the speakers. For details, see Changing the speaker setup on page 43. Channel Level Fix The output for the various sp eakers is set to the m aximum. Variable The output level of the various speaker s is set within the range of âÂÂ6.0 dB to 6.0 dB ( in 0.5 dB steps) (page 4 4).
06 41 En HDMI HDMI High-Speed Transmission On Se lect this when connected with a High Speed HDMI⢠ca ble (page 15). Off Select this when connected with a Standard HDMI⢠cable (page 15). The playerâÂÂs setting screen is close d if the output video resolution is switc hed by changing the HDMI High-Speed Transmis sion setting. HDMI Color Space Auto The video signal tha t is output (YCb Cr or RGB) is swit ched auto matically. YCbCr 4:4:4 Select this to output the vi deo signals as YCbCr 4:4:4 sig nals. YCbCr 4:2:2 Select this to output the vi deo signals as YCbCr 4:2:2 sig nals. RGB (16 to 235) Select this to output the vide o signals as RGB signals. Choose this if t he colors seem too dense and all the dark colors are display ed in a unifo rm black when RGB (0 â 255) is selected. RGB (0 to 25 5) Select thi s to output the vi deo signals as RGB signals. Choose this if the colors seem too faint and the black too bright when RGB (16 â 235) is select ed. Normally it is recomm ended to set th is to Auto . When set to Auto , the optimum video si gnals for yo ur TV are output . HDMI Audio Out Auto The signals are output with as many audio ch annels as possible. In cases when the number of channels does not decrease wh en the sign als are output as such without conver ting them to li near PCM, they are out put as such (page 50) . PCM Select this when you wa nt the secondary au dio an d interactive audio signals t o be mixed for output o r when you want to output priori tizing sampling frequency over the number of channels ( page 50). PQLS Auto Enables PQLS function (pag e 15). Off Disables PQLS function (page 15). HDMI Control On Select thi s to control the player with th e remote contro l of the AV de vice connected u sing an HDMI cable . Also refer to About HDMI Control function on page 15. Off Select this when you do not wa nt to contro l the player with the remo te control of the AV device connecte d using an HDMI cable. Language OSD Language English Select thi s to set the lang uage of the on-screen displays to En glish. available languages Choose a langu age for the on-scree n displays from the list ed languages. Audio Language * For some discs, it may not be possible to change to the selected language. English Select thi s to set both th e BD-ROM and DVD -Video default audio languag e to English. available languages Choose a langua ge from the listed lan guages to set the defaul t audio languag e for BD-ROM and DVD-Video pla yback. Other Continue to the next scre en to set th e default a udio langua ge for BD -ROM and DVD-Vi deo disc playback. You can select the language name or enter the code num ber (see on page 56 for the code tab le). If a language n ot recorded on the BD /DVD is set, one of th e recorded languages is automatically selected and played. Subtitle Language * For some discs, it may not be possible to change to the selected language. English Select this to set the de fault subtitle la nguage for BD-RO M and DVD-Video playba ck to English. available languages Choose a lan guage from the listed languag es to set the de fault subtitle language for BD - ROM and DVD- Video playba ck. Other Continue to the next screen to set the defau lt subtitle langu age for BD-ROM and DVD-V ideo disc playback. You can select the language name or enter the code num ber (see on page 56 for the code tab le). If a language n ot recorded on the BD /DVD is set, one of th e recorded languages is automatically selected and played. BDMV/DVD-Video Menu Lang. * For some discs, it may not be possible to change to the selected language. w/Subtitle Language Sets the lang uage of BD -ROM and DVD-VId eo menus to the same as that set for the su btitle language. available languages Choose a lang uage from the l isted languages to set the defa ult language for BD-ROM and DVD-Video menus. Other Co ntinue to the next scree n to set the default men u language for BD-ROM and DVD-Video disc menus. Y ou can select the lang uage name or ent er the code numbe r (see on page 56 for the code tab le). If a language n ot recorded on the BD /DVD is set, one of th e recorded languages is automatically selected and played. Subtitle Display On Select this to display the subtitles. Off Select this if you do not want to display the subti tles. Note that on some discs the subtitles are displayed by fo rce. Parental Lock Set Password (Cha nge Password) Regist er (change) the password for parental lock settings or for unlocki ng to play DVD-Vi deo with parental lock feature. For details, see Registering or Changing the password on page 44. DVD-Video Parental Lo ck Chan ge the player âÂÂs parental lock leve l. For details, see Changing the Parental Lock level for watching DVDs on page 46 . BDMV Parental Lock Change the res tricted age. For details, s ee Changing th e Age Restricti on for watchin g BD-ROMs on page 45. Country Cod e Change the C ountry/Area code . Refer to the Changing the Country/Are a code on page 47. Setting Options Explanation
06 42 En Options Output Terminal Priority Select the terminals for output ting video and audio signals with priority. For d etails, see Changing the terminals for outputting video and audio signals (Output Terminal Priority) on page 48. On Screen Display On Select this to display the operation indi cators (Play, Stop, etc.) on the TV screen. Off Select this if you do not want to displ ay the operatio n indicators (Pl ay, Stop, etc.) on the TV screen. Angle/Secondary In dicator On Select this to display the angle mark, sec ond ary video m ark and secon dary audio ma rk on the TV scre en (pages 28 and 29). Off Select this if you do no t want to disp lay the angle mark, secondary video mark and secondary audio mark on the TV scree n. Hybrid Disc Playback BD The BD layer of hybrid discs with two or more layers (BD and DVD or CD) is played. DVD The DVD layer of hybrid d iscs with two or mo re layers (BD and DVD) is played. If there is no DVD layer, the BD layer is played. CD The CD layer of hybrid discs with two or more layers ( BD and CD) is played. If there is no CD layer, the BD layer is played. BDMV/BDAV Playback Priority BDMV Select this to play the BDMV format on BD-R/RE discs cont aining both BDMV and BDAV formats. BDAV Select this to play the BDAV form at on BD-R /RE discs conta ining both BDMV and BDAV formats. Auto Power Off On Select this to turn t he power off a utomatica lly (the power turns of f automatically if no operation i s performed fo r over 30 min utes). Off Select this if you do not want the power to turn off automatic ally. Setup Navigator Start making the setting s using the Setup Na vigator menu. For det ails, see Making settings using the Se tup Navigator menu on page 20. Setting Options Explanation
06 43 En Changing to other language at language setting Note â¢R e f e r t o Language Code Table on page 56. ⢠If a la nguage not recorded on the BD/DVD is set, one of the recorded languages is automa tica lly selected and played. 1 Select and set Other. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 2 Change the la nguage. Use ï« /ï¬ to change, then press EN TER . ï° To change the language using numbers 1U s e ï© /ïª to select Number. 2 Use the number bu ttons (0 to 9) to input the number, then press ENTER. Changing the speaker setup Note ⢠Select Init ial Setu p from the HOME MENU, then p ress ENTER . 1 Select a nd set Speakers. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 2 Select and set Speaker Setu p ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . Caution ⢠This cannot be selected when Audio Output Mode is set to 2 Channel . Change the setting to Multi-channel (page 40). 3 Select the speaker and change the setting. Use ï© /ïª to select, then use ï« /ï¬ to change the setting. ⢠L/R (front left and ri ght speakers) : Small / Large (this setting also applies to the C, SL/SR and SBL/SBR speakers). ⢠C (center speaker): Yes/ No ⢠SL/SR (left and right su rround speakers): Yes/ No ⢠SBL/SBR (left and right surround back speakers): Yes/ No ï° Closing the speaker settings screen Press ENTER . TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Audio Out p ut Mode S peake r Setu p Channel Level î Multi-channel î Fix Video Out Audio Out S peake rs HDMI Language Pa r ental Lock O ptions Setu p Navigato r Initial Setup BD PLAYER TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER L/R C S L/S R S BL/S BR Large Ye s Ye s Ye s S peaker S etup BD PLAYER Use [ ][ ] to select a speaker , then press [ ][ ] to select speaker option.
06 44 En Adjusting the output level of the various speakers (Channel Level) Adjust each output level of the different speakers by using test tones. 1 Select a nd set Speakers. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 2 Select and set Channel Level, the n Fix or Variable. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . ⢠Fi x â The output level of all the speakers is set to the maximum. ⢠Variable â The output level of all the spea kers is set 6.0 dB lower than when Fix is selected. From this point, the output levels of the L , C , R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR and SW speakers can be adjusted within the range of âÂÂ6.0 dB to 6.0 dB. ⢠If you ha ve selected Variable , proceed to step 3. Caution ⢠This cannot be select ed when Audio Output Mode is set to 2 Channel . C hange the s etting to Multi-channel (page 40). 3 Select and se t the method for switchi ng the speaker to be adjusted. Use ï« /ï¬ to select, th en press ENTER . ⢠Auto â Switch the speaker to be adjusted automatically. ⢠Manual â Switch the speaker to be adjusted manually. Caution ⢠Test tones are output. Lower th e volume of the device connected to the player. 4 Adjust the output level. Use ï© /ïª to select, ï« /ï¬ to adjust . Note â¢W h e n Auto is selected, the spea ker cannot be selected with ï© /ïª . ï° Closing the Channel Level screen Press ENTER . Registering or Changing the password Use this procedure to register or change the code number required for the P arental Lo ck settings . 1 Select and set Parental Lock . Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 2 Select and set Set Password ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Audio Out p ut Mode S peake r Setu p Channel Level î Multi-channel î Fix Video Out Audio Out S peake rs HDMI Language Pa r ental Lock O ptions Setu p Navigato r Initial Setup BD PLAYER TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER T est T one Switching Select whethe r test tone out put is switched automatically o r manually . Video Out Audio Out S peake rs HDMI Language Pa r ental Lock O ptions Setu p Navigato r Speaker Setup BD PLAYER Auto Manual L C R S R S BR S BL S L S W 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB Channel Level BD PLAYER Use [ ][ ] to select a speaker , then press [ ][ ] to adjust the channel level and then press ENTER . BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Set P assword DVD-V ideo P arental Lock BDMV P arental Lock Countr y Code î Off î 255 î us Video Out Audio Out Speakers HDMI Language P arental Lock Options Setup Navigator Initial Setup BD PLAYER
06 45 En 3 Input the password . Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ï© /ïª to input the number, then press ENTER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu rsor. 4 Re-input th e password. Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ï© /ïª to input the number, then press ENTER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu rsor. ï° To change the code number Input the previously registered password, then input the new password. Note ⢠We recommend making a note of the password. ⢠If you forget the password, reset th e player to the factory default setting, then register the password again (page 49). Changing the Age Restriction for watching BD-ROMs For BD-RO Ms containin g scenes of violence, for example, watching can be restricted by setting an age re striction for the BD-ROMs. 1 Select and set Parental Lock . Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 2 Select and set BDMV Parental Lock ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR ENTER ENTER Ente r new passwo rd Set P asswo rd Video Out Audio Out S peake rs HDMI Language Pa r ental Lock O ptions Setu p Navigato r Initial Setup BD PLAYER Ente r new passwo rd Set P asswo rd Video Out Audio Out S peake rs HDMI Language Pa r ental Lock O ptions Setu p Navigato r Initial Setup BD PLAYER Re-ente r BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Set P assword DVD-V ideo P arental Lock BDMV P arental Lock Countr y Code î Off î 255 î us Video Out Audio Out Speakers HDMI Language P arental Lock Options Setup Navigator Initial Setup BD PLAYER
06 46 En 3 Input the password . Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ï© /ïª to input the number, then press ENTER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu rsor. 4 Change the ag e. Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ï© /ïª to input the number, then press ENTER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu rsor. Note â¢W h e n Age Restriction is set to 255 , watchi ng is not restricted . Changing the Parental Lock level for watching DVDs Some DVD-Video discs containing sc enes of violence, for example, have Parental Lock levels (check th e in dications on the discâÂÂs jacket or elsewhere). To restrict watching these discs, set the playerâÂÂs level to the level l ower than the dis câÂÂs. 1 Select and set Parental Lock . Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 2 Select and set DVD-V ideo Parental Lock ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR ENTER ENTER Ente r the passwo rd Video Out Audio Out S peake rs HDMI Language Pa r ental Lock O ptions Setu p Navigato r Initial Setup BD PLAYER BDMV P a r ental Lock Age Rest r iction BDMV P a r ental Lock Video Out Audio Out S peake rs HDMI Language Pa r ental Lock O ptions Setu p Navigato r Initial Setup BD PLAYER BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Set P assword DVD-V ideo P arental Lock BDMV P arental Lock Countr y Code î Off î 255 î us Video Out Audio Out Speakers HDMI Language P arental Lock Options Setup Navigator Initial Setup BD PLAYER
06 47 En 3 Input the password . Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ï© /ïª to input the number, then press ENTER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu rsor. 4 Change the le vel. Use ï« /ï¬ to change, then press EN TER to s et. Note ⢠The level ca n be set to Off or between Level1 and Lev el8 . When set to Off , watching is not restricted. Changing the Country/Area code Note ⢠Refer to Country/Area Code Table on page 56. 1 Select and set Parental Lock . Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 2 Select and set Country/Area C ode. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR ENTER ENTER Video Out Audio Out Speakers HDMI Language P arental Lock Options Setup Navigator Initial Setup BD PLAYER DVD-V ideo P arental Lock Enter the password Level Video Out Audio Out Speakers HDMI Language P arental Lock Options Setup Navigator Initial Setup BD PLAYER DVD-V ideo P arental Lock Off BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Set P assword DVD-V ideo P arental Lock BDMV P arental Lock Countr y Code î Off î 255 î us Video Out Audio Out Speakers HDMI Language P arental Lock Options Setup Navigator Initial Setup BD PLAYER
06 48 En 3 Input the password . Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ï© /ïª to input the number, then press ENTER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu rsor. 4 Change the country/area code. Use ï« /ï¬ to change, then press EN TER to s et. ï° To change the country/area co de using numbers 1U s e ï© /ïª to select Number. 2 Use the number bu ttons (0 to 9) to input the number, then press ENTER. Changing the terminals for outputting video and audio signals (Output Terminal Priority) Set the video and audio terminals to be used. Note ⢠2-channel linear PC M audio signals are output from the audio output term inals other than the set ter minal, regardles s of the audio format and setting. 1 Select an d set Options. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 2 Select an d set Output Terminal Priority ï¤ Next Sc reen. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR ENTER ENTER Count r y Code Video Out Audio Out S peake rs HDMI Language Pa r ental Lock O ptions Setu p Navigato r Initial Setup BD PLAYER Ente r the passwo rd Numbe r Count r y Code Video Out Audio Out S peake rs HDMI Language Pa r ental Lock O ptions Setu p Navigato r Initial Setup BD PLAYER Code TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Video Out Audio Out Speakers HDMI Language P arental Lock Options Setup Navigator Initial Setup BD PLAYER Output T erminal Priority On Screen Display Angle/Secondar y Indicator Hybrid Disc Playback BDMV/BDAV Playback P riority Auto P ower Off î On î On î On î BD î BDAV
06 49 En 3 Select the terminal for outputting video signa ls. Use ï« /ï¬ to select, th en press ïª . When a digital output is selected for the video outp ut terminal, Video is fixed at HDMI and cannot be changed. When an analog ou tput is select ed fo r the video output te rminal, Component Vid eo or S-Video/Vi deo can be selected for Video . ⢠HDMI â HDMI OUT terminal ⢠Component Video â COMPONENT VIDEO out put terminals ⢠S-Video/Video â S-VIDEO output terminal or VIDEO output terminal The video and audio signals output from the set output terminals are output sync hronously (l ip synchroniza tion). 4 Select the terminal for outputting audio sign als. Use ï« /ï¬ to select, th en press ENTER . ⢠HDMI â HDMI OUT terminal ⢠Digital Audio â DIGITAL OU T terminal ( COAXIAL / OPTICAL ) ⢠Analog Audio â AUDIO OUT (2 ch) terminals or AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) terminals The optimum audio signals fo r the audio format and the playerâÂÂs settings are output from the output terminal(s) set here. Caution ⢠If the output terminal you want to select at Video is not displayed, use the VIDEO SELECT button to switch between digital and analog ou tput (page 24). â¢W h e n S-Video/Video or Component Vi deo is selected at Video , no sound will be output if HDMI i s s e l e c t e d a t Audio (the warning message shown below is displayed). When li stening to the audio by the HDMI-compa tible device, connect to the TV with the HDMI cable to watch th e video (pages 14 and 17). ⢠Linear PCM (2-channel) audio signals are output from the audio ter minals othe r than the one s et at Audio , regardless of the audio format and the player âÂÂs settings. Restoring all the settings to the factory default settings 1 Check that the p layerâÂÂs power is tu rned on. 2 When a disc is pl aying, press ï§ to stop playback. Eject the disc from the player. 3 While pressing ï§ , press ïµ STANDBY /ON. Operate using the buttons on th e playerâÂÂs front panel. Note ⢠After restoring all the settings to the factory default settings, use Setup Navigator to reset the pla yer (page 20). TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Audio Out put T e r minal P rio rity Video Out Audio Out S peake rs HDMI Language Pa r ental Lock O ptions Setu p Navigato r Initial Setup BD PLAYER Video Analog Audio S-Vi deo/Vi deo Ye s No Audio is not out put f rom HDMI te rminal when [S- Video/Video] o r [Com p onent Video] is selected. OK to select this setting?
06 50 En About th e audio output settin gs The audio signals that are outp ut differ according to the audio format recorded on the disc and the playerâÂÂs settings. Ch eck on the table below. Caution ⢠Linear PC M audio signals (2 channels) ar e output fr om all terminals other than the ones selected at Audio under Output Terminal Priority , regardless of the audio format or the playerâÂÂs settings (pages 20 and 48). ⢠The audio signals output from the DIGITAL OUT terminals have a sampling frequency of 48 kHz (44.1 kHz for CDs). ⢠MPEG au dio is output in linear PCM. Audio form at AUDIO OUT terminal DIGITAL OUT terminal HDMI OUT termina l 1 1. When outputting linear PCM audio signals, if the number of compatible channels of the connected HDMI device is lowe r, the sig nals are output with the number of channels for which the device is compatible. 2ch 2 2. When Audio Output Mode is set to 2 Channel or Multi- channel (page 40). Multi-channel 2 Converted to linear PCM audio 3 3. When Do lby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital ï¤ PCM , DTS Out is set to DTS ï¤ PCM , or AAC Out is set to AAC ï¤ PCM (page 40). Not conv erted to linear PCM audio 4,5 4. When Do lby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital 1 / Dolby Digital 2 , DTS Out is set to DTS 1/ DTS 2 or AAC Out is set t o AAC (page 40). 5. The secondary audio and interactive a udio are not output when Dolby Digit al Out is set to Dolby Digital 2 , DTS Out is set to DTS 2 and you are outputting Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround bitstream signals. PCM 6 6. When HDMI Audio Out is set to PCM or Auto (page 41). Auto 6,7,8 7. When Dolby TrueHD, D olby Digital Plus, Dolb y Digital, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio or DTS Digital Surrou nd signals are being output in bitstream, the secondary audio and interactive audio signals are not mixed. 8. If the connected HDMI device is not compatible with Dolby True HD or Dolby Digital Plus bitstrea m, the signals are output in D olby Digita l bitstream. If the connec ted HDMI device is not compatib le with DTS-H D Mast er Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, the sig nals are output in DTS Digital Surround bitstream. If the connected HDMI device is not compatible with Dolby Digita l or DTS Digital Surround bitstr eam, the signals are output in linear PCM. BD-ROM Dolby Digital Converted to 2- channel audio 5.1-channel audio Converte d to 2- channel audio Dolby Digital 5.1-channel audi o Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus 7.1-channe l audio 9 9. Only co mpatible wi th 7.1-channel surround back. 6.1-c hannel surround back output in 7.1 channels. In other cases, output as a udio signals of 5.1-ch annels or less. 7.1-channel audio 9,10 10. When the output video resolution is set to 480i or 480 p, the signals may be output in 2 channel, depending on HDMI High-Speed Transmis sion setting and/or the connected HDMI device (page 15). Dolby Digital Plus Dolby True HD Dolby TrueHD 11 11. When the output video resolution is set to 480i or 480p, the signals may be output in Dolby Digital bitstream, depending on HDMI High-Speed Transmission setting and/or the connected HDMI device (p age 15). DTS Digital Surround 5.1-channel audio DTS Digital Surround 5.1-channel audio DTS Digital Surround DTS-HD High Resolution Audio 5.1-channel audio 12 12. DTS Digital Surround signals converted to linear PCM audio signals are output. 5.1-channel audio 12 DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio 13 13. When the output video resolution is set to 480i or 480p, the signals may be output in DTS Digital Surround bitstream, depend ing on HDMI High-Speed Transmission setting and/or the conn ected HDMI device (page 15). Linear P CM 7.1-channe l audio 9 Converted to 2- channel audio 7.1-channel audio 9,10 7.1-channel audio BD-R/RE Dol by Digital Converted to 2- channel audio 5.1-channel audio Converte d to 2- channel audio Dolby Digital 5.1-channel audio Dolby Digital MPEG-2 AAC MPEG-2 AAC MPEG-2 A AC MPEG 2-channel aud io Linear P CM DVD- Video Dolby Digital Converted to 2- channel audio 5.1-channel audio Converte d to 2- channel audio Dolby Digital 5.1-channel audio Dolby Digital DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround MPEG 2-channel aud io Linear P CM DVD (VR format) Dolby Digi tal Converted to 2- channel audio 5.1cha nnel audio Converte d to 2- channel audio Dolby Digital 5.1-channe l audio Dolby Digital MPEG 2-channel aud io Linear P CM
07 51 En Chapter 7 Additional information Troubleshooting Incorrect operation i s often mistaken for trouble or malfunction . If you think that there is someth ing wrong with this componen t, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Inspec t the other components an d electrical ap pliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified after checki ng the items below, please contact customer services. In the US, call Toll Free (80 0) 421 -1404. (Telephone lines are open Monday through F riday 6:00 AM to 4:30 PM (Pacific Time).) In Canada, call Local (905) 479-4411 , or Lo ng dis tanc e 1(877) 283-5901. (Telephone lines are open Monday thr ough Friday 9:00 AM to 5:30 P M (EST).) Playback Problem Check Remedy Disc does not play. Disc tray opens automatic ally. Is the disc scratched? It may not be possible to play scratche d discs. Is the dis c dirty? Clean the disc (page 5 9). Is the disc prop erly set in the dis c tray? ⢠Set the d isc with the printed s ide facing up. ⢠Set the disc pr operly in th e depression in the disc tray. Is the region numbe r co rrect? The region numbe rs of discs that can b e played on this set a re as shown bel ow (page 10). ⢠BDs: âÂÂAâ (or including âÂÂAâÂÂ) and âÂÂALLâ â¢ DVDs: âÂÂ1â (or incl uding âÂÂ1âÂÂ) and âÂÂALLâ Is the player set in a h umid place? There could be condensati on inside. Wait for th e condensatio n to dissipate. Do not set the playe r near an air-conditi oner, etc. (page 58). Picture f reezes an d the front panel and remote control buttons stop workin g. ⢠Press ï§ ST OP to stop playback, th en restart pla yback. ⢠If the playback cannot be stopped, press ïµ ST ANDBY/ON on the playerâÂÂs fr ont panel to turn of f the power, then turn the power back on. ⢠If the po wer cannot be tu rned off, press an d hold ïµ STANDBY/ON on the playerâÂÂs fron t panel f or over 5 seconds. The power will turn off. No picture is disp layed or the picture is no t displayed properly. Is the video cable properly c onnected? Insert the cable firm ly and all the way in. Is the video cable da maged? If the cable is damaged, rep lace it with a new one . Is the input setting on the connected TV or AV receiver or amplifier right? Read the oper ating instructi ons of the connected components and switch to the proper inpu t. Are the termina ls for outputtin g video signals pr operly set? Pr ess VIDEO SELECT to switch the termi nal from which the video signals are outp ut. Is the output video resolution prope rly set? Depending on the playerâÂÂs ou tput video resolution, the picture may not be displ aye d at all or d isplayed properly. Use OUT PUT RESOLUTION to switch to a resolution at which the picture is displayed properly (page 25). Is the player conne cted with an HDMI ca ble other than a High Speed HDMI⢠cable (with a Standard HDMI⢠cable)? Press ï§ while pressing ï¤ on the playerâÂÂs fron t panel to restore the video outputs to the factory de fault settings. Af ter use Setup Navigator to reset the player. There are so me BDs for whic h the picture will on ly be output when connecte d by HDMI cable. Picture is stretc hed. Aspect ratio cannot be switched. Is the TVâÂÂs aspect ratio properly set? Read the TVâÂÂs operating instructions an d set the TVâÂÂs aspect ratio properly. Is 4:3 Video Out properly set? ⢠Set 4:3 Video Out p roperly (pag e 40). ⢠When video signals with a resolution of 1080/60i, 1 080/60p, 1080/24p or 720 /60p are being output from the HDMI OUT terminal or the COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals, they may be output in the 16:9 (Wid escreen) mode even if TV Aspect Ratio is set to 4:3 (Standard) (p age 25). Sound and picture are not synchronized. Is Out put Terminal Priority properly set? Set Output Terminal Priority properly (pages 20 and 48 ).
07 52 En Picture is disturbed durin g playback. Picture is dark. ⢠This player su pports Macrov ision analog copy protection technology. With some TVs (such as with built-in vide o deck), the picture wil l not be disp layed properly when the copy protected DVD title is pl ayed . This is not a malfunction. ⢠If the pla yer and TV are con nected via a DVD reco rder/video deck, etc., the picture will not be displayed pro perly due to analog copy protection. Connec t the player and TV direct ly. No picture is displayed or picture is not ou tput in high definition when playing BDs. With some content protected di scs, it may not be poss ible to output the vi deo signals from the VIDEO output terminals, the S-VIDEO output terminal or the COMPONEN T VIDEO output terminals. In this case, co nnect using an HDMI ca ble (page 14). No sound is output. Sound is disturbed. Is the disc played back in slow motion? Is the disc played back in fa st forward or fa st reverse? No sound is out put during slow moti on play and forwar d and reverse scanning. Is the disc scratched? The sound may not be ou tput if the disc is scratched. Is the dis c dirty? Clean the disc (page 5 9). Is the player properly conne cted to the other component s (AV receiver or amplifier, etc.)? ⢠Check that you con nect the player to th e audio output terminals of a di fferent component , etc. ⢠Check that you con nect the player to th e PHONO input terminals of the AV receiver or amplifier, etc. Are the connec ted components (AV receiver or amplifier, et c.) properly set? Read the oper ating instructi ons of the connected components and check the volume, inpu t, speaker settings, etc. Are the audi o cables properly connecte d? Insert the cable s firmly and all the wa y in. Is the audio cable damaged? If the cable is damage d, replace it with a ne w one. Is the player connected to the TV using an HDMI cable to watch the picture? When connecting usin g component video cables, an S-Video cable or a video cable to watch the pic ture, it is not possible to listen to the sound of devices connected with HDMI cables. Take one of the measures below (pages 14 and 17). â To watch the picture on a device that is not HDMI compatible, connect us ing either an opt ical digital audi o cable, coaxi al digital audi o cable or anal og audio cables (7.1 or 2 channels) to listen to the sound. â To listen to the sound on an HDMI-co mpatible devi ce, connect to the TV using an HDMI c able to watch the picture. After one of the above measure s, use Setup Na vigator to reset the player (page 20) . Is Audio Output Mode properly set? If Audio Output Mode is set to Multi-channel , the aud io signals ma y not be output p roperly from the AUDIO OUT (2 ch) terminals ( page 40). Se t Audio Out put Mode to 2 Channel . Are the speakers properly se t? Set Speaker Setup properly (page 40). For some BDs, audio signals are only outp ut from the opt ical digital audio o utput termin al, the coaxi al digital audi o output terminal or the HDMI ou tput terminal. Multi-channel sou nd is not output. Is the AV receiver or ampl ifier, etc. connected to the HDMI OUT terminal, the AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) terminals or DIGITAL OUT ( COAXIAL / OPTICAL ) terminal? Read the oper ating instru ctions of the connec ted AV receiv er or amplif ier and check the audio output settings of A V receiver or amplifier. Is Output Terminal Priority properly se t? Linear PCM (2 -channel) audio si gnals are output fr om output terminals other than the one set at Audio under Output Terminal Priori ty . Set Output Terminal Priority properly (page 48). Is the audio output of the conn ect ed AV receiver or amplifier, etc., properly set? Read the oper ating instru ctions of the connecte d AV receiver or amplif ier and check the audio output settings of A V receiver or amplifier. Problem Check Remedy
07 53 En When connected usin g an HDMI cable Multi-channel sou nd is not output (conti nuous). Is multi-channel sound selected? Use the menu scre en or AUDIO to switch the dis câÂÂs sound to multi-channel. Is Audio O ut set to audio format s supported by the conne cted AV receiver or amplifier? ⢠Read the o perating instructions o f the connected AV re ceiver or amplifier and check the supported audio formats. ⢠Set Audio Out properly (page 40). Are Audio Output Mode and Speaker Setup properly set? ⢠When the AV receiver or amplifie r, etc., is connected to the AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) terminals, set Audi o Output Mode to Multi-channel (page 40). ⢠Set Sp eaker Setup properly (page 40). Digital audio signals are n ot output from the DIGITAL OUT output ( COAXIAL / DIGITAL ) terminals (analog audio signals are ou tput). Is Audio O ut set to audio format s supported by the conne cted AV receiver or amplifier? ⢠Read the o perating instructions o f the connected AV re ceiver or amplifier and check the supported audio formats. ⢠Set Audio Out properly (page 40). Noise can be h eard when outputting DTS Digital Surround signals. Is the connected AV receiver or amplifier compatibl e with DTS Digital Su rround? If an AV receiver or amplifier th at is not compatible wit h DTS Digital S urround is connec ted to the DIGITAL OUT terminal , set DTS Out to DTS ï¤ PCM . Noise will be heard if DTS Out is set to DTS (page 40) . 192 kHz or 96 kHz digital audio signals can not be output from the DIGITAL OUT ( COAXIAL / OPTICAL ) terminals. It is not p ossible to outp ut 192 kHz or 96 kHz digital aud io signals from this playerâÂÂs DIGITAL OUT ( COAXIAL / OPTIC AL ) terminals. The signals are au toma tically c onverted to und er 96 kHz for output . Secondary audio or interactive audio is not output. Is HDMI Audio Out properly set? Set HDMI Audio Out to PCM (pag e 41). Ar e Dolby Digital Out and DTS Out properly set? Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital 1 , DTS Out to DTS 1 (page 40). Sound is fast or slow. When an HDMI cable is connec ted, are audio signals be ing output from devices connected with cables other than HD MI cables? When this player is connected by HDMI cable to a Pioneer AV receiver or amplifier compatible with the PQLS function via HDMI connec tion, the PQLS function is activated when playing CDs. Because of th is, the sound output from components other than the ones connected by HDMI cable may be fast or slow. If this happens, set PQLS to Off (page 41). Files recorded on discs cannot be played. Is the disc one th at is playable on this player? Check wh ether the disc is one that can be played on this player (page 8). Is the file one that is pla yable on this player? ⢠Check whether the file is one that can be played on this player (page 10). ⢠Check whether or no t the file is damaged Is the file protected by DRM? Files protected by DRM cannot be played. A message indicating low memory (local sto rage) appears whi le playing a BD - ROM disc. Erase the BD MV data (page 24). Problem Check Remedy HDMI indicator does not light. Is the vi deo output te rminal othe r than the HDMI OUT terminal selected? The HDMI indica tor lights when video signal s are being output from the HDMI OUT terminal. Press VIDE O SELECT to switch to the HDMI OUT terminal (page 24) . Is the input of the connected H DMI device properly set? Read the HDMI deviceâÂÂs operat ing instructions and set the input properly. Is a DVI dev ice conn ected? Read the DVI deviceâÂÂs operating instructions and check whether it is compatible with HDCP. Problem Check Remedy
07 54 En No picture is displayed. Is the HDMI indica tor lit? ⢠If the H DMI indica tor is not lit, read the HDMI deviceâÂÂs operating instructions and sw itch to the proper input. ⢠If the HDMI indicator is lit, use OU TPUT RESOLUTION to switch the output vide o resolution ( page 25). Are the termina ls for outputtin g video signals pr operly set? Pr ess VIDEO SELECT to switch the HDMI OUT terminal. Is the resoluti on properly set? Depending on the ou tput video resolu tion setting, th e picture may not be output . Use OUTPUT RESOLUTION to switch the output video res olution (page 25). Is the HDMI cabl e pro perly connected? ⢠Inse rt the cable firmly and all the way in. ⢠With some cables, 1080p vide o signals cannot be properly output. Is a DVI device connected? The picture may not be displayed properly if a DVI device is connected. Is the HDMI cabl e damaged? If the cable is damage d, replace it with a ne w one. Pictures do not dis play properly on th e TV. Change th e HDMI Color Space setting (page 4 1). No sound i s produce d. Are you watc hing th e pi cture with the TV connected v ia an HDMI cable? If video signals are b eing output from a terminal oth er than the HDMI termina l, no audio signals ar e output from the HDMI terminal. Connect to the T V using an HDMI cable and press VIDEO SELECT to switch to the HDMI output ter minal (p ages 14, 17 and 24). Is a DVI device connected? The sound will not be o utput from the HDMI OUT terminal if a DVI device is connected. Connect the de vice to a DIGITAL OUT ( OPTICAL/ COAXIAL ) terminal or the AUDIO OUT (2 ch) terminals. HDMI Control fu nction does not work. Is the HDMI cabl e properly connec ted? Connect the HDMI cable pr operly. Is the HDMI ca ble you ar e using a High Spe ed HDMI⢠cable ? Us e a High Speed HDMI⢠cable. T he HDMI Control function may not work properly if HDMI cab le other than a Hig h Speed HDMI⢠cable is used. Are you co nnected to t he TV using a n HDMI cabl e to watch the picture? If video signals are b eing output from a terminal oth er than the HDMI terminal , HDMI Contro l function does not work. Connect to th e TV using an HDMI ca ble and press VIDEO SELECT to switch to the HDMI outp ut terminal (pages 14, 17 and 24). Is HDMI Control set to On on the player? Set HDMI Control to On on the player (page 41). Does the connected device support the HDMI Control function? ⢠The HDMI Control fu nction will not work with devices manufactur ed by companies othe r than Pioneer, even whe n connected using an H DMI cable. ⢠The HDMI Co ntrol functi on will not work i f devices that do not support the HDMI Co ntrol function or devices manufactu red by companies other th an Pioneer are co nnected between th e HDMI Control-compat ible device and the player. ⢠The HDMI Control fu nction may not work with certa in Flat Panel TVs. Also refer to the op er ating instructions of the connected device. Is HDMI Control set to On on the conn ected device? Set HDMI Control to On on the conne cted device. The HDMI Control function works when HDMI Control is set to On for all the devices connecte d by HDMI cable. Once connections and settings of all the devi ces are finished , be sure to check that the playerâÂÂs picture is output to the Flat Panel TV. (Also check after changing the conn ected devices and connecting and/or disconnect ing HDMI cables.) If th e playerâÂÂs picture is no t being output to the Flat Panel T V, the HDMI Control funct ion may not work properly. For details, refer to the ope rating instructio ns of the conne cted device. Are multiple players connected? The HDMI Contro l function may not work if t hree or more players, includin g this player, are connected by HDMI cable. Problem Check Remedy
07 55 En Others Problem Check Remedy The power turns off automatic ally. Is Auto Power Off set to On ?I f Auto Power Off is set to On , the power turns off automaticall y if no opera tion is perfor med for over 3 0 minutes (page 42). Is HDMI Control set to On ? The playerâÂÂs power ma y turn of f together with the power of th e connected TV . If you do not want the player âÂÂs power to turn off when the TVâÂÂs power is turned off, se t HDMI Control to Off (page 41). The power turns on automatic ally. Is HDMI Control set to On ? The playerâÂÂs power m ay turn on toge ther with the power of the connected TV. If you do not want the pl ayerâÂÂs power to turn o n when the TVâÂÂs power is turned on, set HDMI Control to Off (page 41). Inputs of connected TV a nd AV system, switches automatic ally. Is HDMI Control set to On ? The inputs of the c onnected TV or AV system ( AV receiver or amplifier, etc.) may automatica lly switch to the playe r when playback starts on the pla yer or the menu screen (Home Me dia Gallery, etc.) is displayed. If yo u do not want the in puts of the connected TV and/or AV system (A V receiver or amplifie r, etc.) to switch automatically, set HDMI Control to Off (page 41). Player cannot be operated with remote control. Is an AV receiver or amplifier connec ted to the CO NTROL IN terminal on the playerâÂÂs rear panel? Operate with the remote contro l of the devi ce connected to the CONTROL IN terminal. Are you operat ing the remote control from a po int too far away from the player? Operate from within 23 feet of the remote control sensor. Are the batt eries dead? Replace the ba tteries (pag e 7). Settings you have made have been cleare d. ⢠Have you discon nected the power cord while the playerâÂÂs power was on? ⢠Has there been a power failure? If the power cord is disconnect ed or there is a power failure while the playerâÂÂs power is on, the se ttings you have made may be cleared. Always press ïµ STANDBY/ON on the playerâÂÂs front pan el or ïµ S TANDBY/ON on the remote control and check that POWER OFF has turned off from the playerâÂÂs f ront panel display before disconn ecting the power cord. Be particularly careful when the power cord is connected to the AC outlet on another de vice because the player turns off in conjunction with t h e device. We recommend plugging the power cord into a wall ou tlet whenever possib le. After a disc is inserted, Loading stays di splayed and playb ack does not st art. Are there too many files recorded on the disc? When a di sc on which files are record ed is inserted, depending on the number of files recorded on the di sc, loading may t ake several dozen minutes. ï§ is displayed in file names, etc. The characters that cannot be display ed on this player are displayed in ï§ . The DVD layer of BD and DVD hybrid discs cannot be played. Is Hybrid Disc Playb ack properly set? Set Hybrid Disc Playback to DVD (page 42). The CD layer of BD and CD hybrid discs cannot be played. Is Hybrid Disc Playb ack properly set? Set Hybrid Disc Playback to CD (pag e 42). The Hybrid Disc Pl ayback setting cannot be changed (displayed in gray). Is a disc set in the disc tra y? The Hybrid Disc Playbac k setting ca nnot be change d when a disc is set. Remove the disc, then change the setting. BDMV/BDAV Playback Priority setting cann ot be changed ( displayed in gr ay). Is a disc set in the disc tra y? The BDMV/BDAV Playb ack Priority setting cann ot be changed when a disc is set. Re move the disc, then change the setting.
07 56 En Language Code Table and Country/Area Code Table Language Code Table Language name (langua ge code), input code Country/Area Code Table Country/Area name, input code, Country/Area code Japanese (ja/jpn), 1001 English (en/eng), 0514 French (fr/fra), 0618 German (de/deu), 0405 Italian (it/ita), 0920 Spanish (es/spa), 0519 Chinese (zh/zho), 2608 Dutch (nl/nld), 1412 Portuguese (pt/por), 1620 Swedish (sv/swe), 1922 Russian (ru/rus), 1821 Korean (ko/kor), 1115 Greek (el/ell), 0512 Afar (aa/aar), 0101 Abkhazian (ab/abk), 0102 Afrikaans (af/afr), 0106 Amharic (am/amh), 0113 Arabic (ar/ara), 0118 Assamese (as/asm), 0119 Aymara (ay/aym), 0125 Azerbaijani (az/aze), 0126 Bashkir (ba/bak), 0201 Belarusian (be/bel), 0205 Bulgarian (bg/bul), 0207 Bihari (bh/bih), 0208 Bislama (bi/bis), 0209 Bengali (bn/ben), 0214 Tibetan (bo/bod), 0215 Breton (br/bre), 0218 Catalan (ca/cat), 0301 Corsican (co/cos), 0315 Czech (cs/ces), 0319 Welsh (cy/cym), 0325 Danish (da/dan), 0401 Dzongkha (dz/dzo), 0426 Esperanto (eo/epo), 0515 Estonian (et/est), 0520 Basque (eu/eus), 0521 Persian (fa/fas), 0601 Finnish (fi/fin), 0609 Fijian (fj/fij), 0610 Faroese (fo/fao), 0615 Frisian (fy/fry), 0625 Irish (ga/gl e), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd/gla), 0704 Galician (gl/glg), 0712 Guarani (gn/grn), 0714 Gujarati (gu/guj), 0721 Hausa (ha/hau), 0801 Hindi (hi/hin), 0809 Croatian (hr/hrv), 0818 Hun garian (hu/hun), 0821 Armenian (hy/hye), 0825 Interlingua (ia/ina), 0901 Interlingue (ie/ile), 0905 Inupiaq (ik/ipk), 0911 Indonesian (in/ind), 0914 Icelandi c (is/isl), 0919 Hebrew (iw/heb), 0923 Yiddish (ji/yid), 1009 Javanese (jw/jav), 1023 Georgian (ka/kat), 1101 Kazakh (kk/kaz), 1111 Kalaallisut (kl/kal), 1112 Khmer ( km/khm) , 1113 Kannada (kn/kan), 1114 Kashmiri (ks/kas), 1119 Kurdish (ku/kur), 1121 Kirghiz (ky/kir), 1125 Latin (la/lat), 1201 Lingala (ln/lin), 1214 Lao (lo/lao), 1215 Lithuanian (lt/lit), 1220 Latvian (lv/lav), 1222 Malagasy (mg/mlg), 1307 Maori (mi/mri), 1309 Macedonian (mk/mkd), 1311 Malayalam (ml/mal), 1312 Mongolian (mn/mon), 1314 Moldavian (mo/mol), 1315 Marathi (mr/mar), 1318 Malay (ms/msa), 1319 Maltese (mt/mlt), 1320 Burmese (my/mya), 1325 Nauru (na/nau), 1401 Nepali (ne/nep), 1405 Norwegian (no/nor), 1415 Occitan (oc/oci), 1503 Oromo (om/orm), 1513 Oriya (or/ori), 1518 Panjabi (pa/pan), 1601 Polish (pl/pol), 1612 Pushto (ps/pus), 1619 Quechua (qu/que), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm/roh), 1813 Rundi (rn/run), 1814 Romanian (ro/ron), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw/kin), 1823 Sanskrit (sa/san), 1901 Sindhi (sd/snd), 1904 Sango (sg/sag), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh/scr), 190 8 Sinhalese (si/sin), 1909 Slovak (sk/slk), 1911 Slovenian (sl/slv), 1912 Samoan (sm/smo), 1913 Shona (sn/sna), 1914 Somali (so/som), 1915 Albanian (sq/sqi), 1917 Serbian (sr/srp), 1918 Swati (ss/ssw), 1919 Sotho, Southern (st/sot), 1920 Sundanese (su/sun), 1921 Swahili (sw/swa), 1923 Tamil (ta/tam), 2001 Telugu (te/tel), 2005 Tajik (tg/tgk), 2007 Thai (th/tha), 2008 Tigrinya (ti/tir), 2009 Turkmen (tk/tuk), 2011 Tagalog (tl/tgl), 2012 Tswana (tn/tsn), 2014 Tonga (Tonga Islands) (to/ton), 2015 Turkish (tr/t ur), 2018 Tsonga (ts/tso), 2019 Tatar (tt/tat), 2020 Twi (tw/twi), 2023 Ukrainian (uk/ukr), 2111 Urdu (ur/urd), 2118 Uzbek (uz/uzb), 2126 Vietnamese (vi/vie), 2209 Volapük (vo/vol), 2215 Wolof (wo/wol), 2315 Xhosa (xh/xho), 2408 Yoruba (yo/yor), 2515 Zulu (zu/zul), 2621 Anguilla, 0109, ai Antigua and Barbuda, 0107, ag Argenti na, 0118, ar Armenia, 0113, am Australia, 0121, au Austria, 0120, at Azerbaijan, 0126, az Bahamas, 0219, bs Barbados, 0202, bb Belarus, 0225, by Belgium, 0205, be Belize, 0226, bz Bermuda, 0213, bm Brazil, 0218, br Bulgaria, 0207, bg Canada, 0301, ca Cayman Islands, 1125, ky Chile, 0312, cl China, 0314, cn Colombia, 0315, co Croatia, 0818, hr Cyprus, 0325, cy Czech Republic, 0326, cz Denmark, 0411, dk Dominica, 0413, dm Dominican Republic, 0415, do Estonia, 0505, ee Finland, 06 09, fi France, 0618, fr Georgia, 0705, ge Germany, 0405, de Greece, 0718, gr Greenland, 0712, gl Grenada, 0704, gd Guyana, 0725, gy Haiti, 0820, ht Hong Kong, 0811, hk Hungary, 0821, hu Iceland, 0919, is India, 0914, in Indonesia, 0904, id Ireland, 0905 , ie Israel, 0 912, il Italy, 0920, it Jamaica, 1013, jm Japan, 1016, jp Kazakhstan, 1126, kz Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr Kyrgyzstan, 1107, kg Latvia, 1222, lv Liechtenstein, 1209, li L ithuania, 1220, lt Luxembourg , 1221, lu Macedonia, the Former Yugosl av Republic of, 1311, mk Malaysia, 1325, my Malta, 1320, mt Mexico, 132 4, mx Moldova, Republic of, 1304, md Monaco, 1303, mc Montserrat, 131 9, ms Netherlands, 1412, nl New Zealand, 1426, nz Norway, 1415, no Pakistan, 1611, pk Peru, 1605, pe Philippines, 1608, ph Poland, 1612, pl Portugal, 1620, pt Puerto Rico, 1618, pr Romania, 1815, ro Russian Federation, 1821, ru Saint Kitts and Nevis, 1114, kn Saint Lucia, 1203, lc Saint Vincent a nd the Grenadines, 2203, vc San Marino, 1913, sm Singapor e, 1907, sg Slovakia, 1911, sk Slovenia, 1909, si Spain, 0519, es Suriname, 1918, sr Sweden, 1905, se Switzerland, 0308, ch Taiwan, Province of China, 2023, tw Tajikistan, 2010, tj Thailand, 2008, th Trinidad and Tobago, 2020, tt Tunisia, 2014, tn Turkey, 2018, t r Turkmenistan, 2013, tm Turks and Caicos Islands, 2003, tc Ukraine, 2101, ua United Kingdom, 0702, gb United States, 2119, us Uruguay, 2125, uy Uzbekistan, 2126, uz Venezuela, 2205, ve Virgin Islands, British, 2207, vg
07 57 En Specifications Note ⢠The specifications and design of this product are subject to change with out notice. ⢠This produc t includes FontAvenue î fonts licensed by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. Model BDP-51FD Type Blu-ray Disc PLAYER Rated volt age AC 120 V Rated frequency 60 Hz Power consumption 34 W Power consumption (standby) 0.5 W Weight 5.6 kg (12 lb 6 o z) External dimensions (inc luding projec ting parts) 420 m m (W) x 124 mm (H) x 3 61 mm (D) (16 9 / 16 in. (W) x 4 15 / 16 in. (H) x 14 1 / 4 in. (D)) Tolerable op erating temperat ure 5 ðC to 35 ðC ( 41 ðF to 95 ðF) Tolerable op erating humi dity 5 % to 85 % (no conde nsation) Output terminal s Video outputs Video 1 set, RCA jack (1.0 Vp-p (7 5 é )) S-Video 1 set, S-Video j ack: Y (luminance): 1.0 Vp-p (75 é ) C (color): 0.286 V p-p (75 é ) Component video 1 set, pin-plug jacks: Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 é ) P B , PR : 0.7 Vp-p (75 é ) HDMI 1 set, 19-pin (5 V, 150 mA) Audio outputs 2- channel (stereo) Numbe r of channels: 2, RCA jacks 7.1-channel (multi-chan nel: front le ft/ right, surround left /right, center, surround back lef t/right, subwoofer) Number of channels: 8 , RCA jacks Audio outp ut level 200 mVrms (1 kHz, â 20 dB) Frequency r esponse 4 Hz to 88 kHz (192 kHz sampling) S/N ratio 115 dB Dynamic range 103 dB Total harmonic dist ortion 0.0015 % Wow & flutter Below measurab le limits (ñ0.001 % W. PEAK) Digital audio outputs Optical 1 set, Optical digita l jack Coaxial 1 set, RCA ja ck Control Input 1 set, Minijack (3.5 ø)
07 58 En Cautions on use ï° Moving the player If you need to move this unit, first rem ove the disc, if thereâÂÂs one loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press ïµ STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby, checking that the POWER OFF indication on the front panel disp lay goes off. Wait at least 10 seconds. Lastly, disconnect the power cord. Never lift or move the unit during pla yback â discs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged. Place of installation Select a stable place near the TV and AV system to which the unit is connected. D o n o t p l a c e t h e p l a y e r o n t o p o f a T V o r c o l o r m o n i t o r . K e e p i t a w a y from cassett e decks or other compo nents easily affe cted by magne tism. Avoid the following types of places: ⢠Pla ces exposed t o direct sun light ⢠Humid or poorly ven tilated places ⢠Extremely hot o r cold places ⢠Places subject to vibration â¢D u s t y p l a c e s ⢠Places ex posed to so ot, steam or heat (in kitchens, etc.) ï° Do not place objects on top Do not place objects on top of the player. ï° Do not obstruct the ventilation holes Do not use the player on a shaggy ru g, bed, or sofa, and do not c over the player with a cloth, etc. Doin g so will prevent heat dissipation and could lead to damage. ï° Keep away from heat Do not place the player on top of an amplifier or other device generating heat. When insta lling in a rack, to avoid the heat generated by the amplifier and other devices, place it on a shelf below the amplifier whenever possible. Turn the power off when not using the player Depending on the conditio ns of the TV broadcast signals, str iped patterns may appear on the screen whe n the TV is turned on while the playerâÂÂs power is turned on. Th is is not a malfun ction with the player or TV. If this happens, turn the player âÂÂs power off. In the same way, noise may be heard in the sound of a radio. Condensation If the player is moved suddenly from a cold pla ce into a warm room (in winter, for example) or if the te mperature in the room in which the player is installed rises sudde nly due to a heater, etc., water droplets (condensation) may form inside (on operating parts and the lens). When condensatio n is present, the player will not operate properly and pla yback is not possibl e. Let the player stand at room temperature for 1 or 2 ho urs with the power turned on (the time depends on the extent of condensation ). The water droplets will dissipate and playback will become possible. Condensation can also occur in th e summer if the player is expo sed t o t h e d i r e c t w i n d f r o m a n a i r - c o n d itioner. If this happens, move the player to a different place. Cleaning the player Normally, wipe the player with a soft cl oth. For tough dirt, apply some neutral detergent diluted i n 5 to 6 parts water to a soft cloth, wring out thoroughly, wipe off the dirt, then wipe again with a dry cloth. Note that gettin g alcohol, thinner, benzene or insecticide on the player could cause the print and co ating to peel off. Also, avoid leaving rubber or vinyl products in contact with th e player for long periods of time, as this c ould damage t he cabinet. When using chemical-im pregnated wipes, etc., read the wip eâÂÂs cautions careful ly. Unplug the power cord from the power outlet when clea ning the player. ï° Caution for when the unit is installed in a rack with a glass door Do not press the ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE on the remote cont rol to open th e disc tray while the glass door is closed. The door will hamper the movement of the disc tray, and the unit could be damaged. Cleaning the pickup lens The playerâÂÂs lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malf unction du e to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-author ized service center. Although lens cleaner s for players are commercially available, we advise a gainst using them since some may dama ge the lens.
07 59 En Handling discs Do not use damaged (cracked or warped) discs. Do not scratch the discâÂÂs signal surface or let it get d irty. Do not load more than one disc into th e player at a time. Do not glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a pencil, ball- point pen or o ther sharp- tipped writin g instrument. These could all damage the disc. ï° Storing Always store discs in their case s, and place the cases vertically, avoiding places exposed to high temperature or humidity, direct sunlight or extremely low temperatur es. Be sure to read the cautions included with the disc. ï° Cleaning discs It may not be possible to play the di s c if there are fin gerprints or dust on it. In this case, using a cleanin g cloth, etc., to wipe the disc gently from the center towards the outer edge. Do n ot use a dirty cleaning cloth. Do not use benzene, thinn er or other volatile chemicals. Also do not use record spray or antistatic agents. For tough dirt, apply some wate r to a soft cloth, wring out thoroughly, wipe off th e dirt, then wipe off the moisture with a dry cloth. ï° Specially shaped discs Specially shaped discs (heart-shape d, hexagonal, etc.) cannot be used on this player. Never use such discs, as they will damage the player. ï° Condensation on discs If the disc is moved suddenly from a cold place into a warm room (in winter, for example), water droplets (condensation) may fo rm on the disc surface. Discs will not play properly if there is condensa tion on them. Carefully wipe off the water droplets from the disc surfa ce before using the disc. Glossary ï° Aspect ratio The ratio of a TV screenâÂÂs width to its height. Conventional TVs have an aspect ratio of 4:3, while high definition (HD) and widescreen TVs have an aspect ratio of 16:9. ï° Audio language Multiple audio tracks, for ex ample the original sound and the dubbed sound, can be recorded on BD-ROM or DVD-Video discs. Up to 32 languages (32 audio tracks) can be recorded on BD-ROM discs, up to 8 languages (8 audio tracks) on DVD-Video discs, so you can select the desired language when watching the disc. ï° AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition) The AVCHD is a high definition (HD) di gital video camera recorder format recordin g high-defin ition onto certai n media by usin g highly efficient codec technologies. ï° BD-J With BD-ROMs, it is possible to use Java applications to create highly interactive titles, for example including ga mes. Java and all Java-re lated trademar ks and logos are tradema rks or registered trademarks of Sun Mi crosystems, Inc., in the United States and other countrie s. ï° BDAV Of the BD format, the Audio Visua l Format Specifications for HD digital broadcast recording is referre d t o a s B D A V o n t h i s p l a y e r a n d in this operating inst ructions. ï° BDMV Of the BD format, the Audio Visual Format Specifications de signed for pre-package d high defini tion (H D) movie co ntents is referred to as BDMV on this play er and in this operating i nstructions. ï° Component video output This video out put terminal p r ovides clearer pictures when connected to a TV equipped with compo nent inputs. Component video signals consist of three signal s, Y, P B and PR . ï° Composite video output Signals m ixing the lumi nance sign al (Y) and th e color signal (C) so they can be transferred on a single cord are output from this terminal.
07 60 En ï° Deep Color This is one of the ca pabilities of HDMIâ¢. The player s supporting Deep Color can transmit a video si gnal with a color bit depth of greater than 8 bits per color component. Su btle color gradations can be reproduced when connecte d to a TV that s upports Deep Color. ï° Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is an audio format to record the sound in up to 5.1 c h a n n e l s w i t h a f r a c t i o n o f t h e a m o u n t o f d a t a a s c o m p a r e d t o l i n e a r PCM audio sign als. ï° Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Pl us is an audio form at for high-definition media . Built on Dolby Digital, it combines th e e fficiency and flexibil ity to provide high quality mult i-channel aud io. With BD-ROMs , up to 7.1 channels of digital sound can be recorded. ï° Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueH D is an audio form at using loss less coding. Wit h BD- ROMs, up to 8 channels can be recorded at 96 kHz/24 bits, o r up to 6 channels at 192 kHz/24 bits. ï° DRM A technol ogy for prot ecting copy ri ghted digital data. Digitized movies, images and music retain the same quality even when they are copie d or transfe rred repeat edly. DRM is a t echnolog y for restrictin g the dis tribution or p layback of such di gital data without the authorization of the copyright holder. ï° DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is an a udio format to record 48 kHz/24 bits audio signals in 5.1 channels. ï° DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an audi o format using lossy coding. It can record 7.1 channe ls at 96 kHz/24 bits. ï° DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an audio format usi ng lossless coding. With BD-ROMs, 7.1 channels can be recorded at 96 kHz/2 4 bits, or 5.1 channels at 192 kHz/24 bits. ï° Dynamic range This refers to the difference between the maximum and minimum level of the sound. The dynamic range is measured in units o f decibels (dB). When the dynamic range is compressed (Audio DRC), the minimum signal level is increased and the max imum signal level decreased. This way, the volume of l oud sounds such as explosio ns is reduced, while the sounds with a low level, su ch as human voices, are easier to listen to. ï° Frames and fields A frame is the unit for one o f the still pictures which compose motion pictures. One frame con sists of a picture of odd lines and a picture of even lines called fields in video signal with interl aced scan method (480i, 1080i, etc.). ï° HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) A technol ogy for prot ecting copy ri ghts that encrypts digital video signals. ï° HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) A digital interface standard for next-generation TVs expanding the DVI (Digital Video Interface) termin al used for example for computer displays. It allows transfer of non-comp ressed di gital video an d audio signals (Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Dig ital, DTS- HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Digital Surround, MPEG or linea r PCM) with a single connector. ï° Interactive audio The audio signals recorded in the titles of BD-ROMs. Th ey include for example the clickin g sound ma de when the men u screen is operated. ï° Interlaced scan With this method, one picture i s di splayed by scanning it twice. The odd lines are displayed in th e first pass, the even lines are displayed in the second, to form a single pi cture (frame). Interlaced scan is indicated in thi s player and operat ing instruct ions by an âÂÂiâ afte r the resolution value (for example, 480i). ï° Linear PCM This is referred as the audio signals that are not compressed, frequently used for DVD-Video disc s con taining musica ls or music concerts. This can also be indicated âÂÂ48 kHz/16 bitâÂÂ, âÂÂ96 kHzâÂÂ, etc. ï° MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group) The name of a fami ly of standard s used to encode video and audio signals in a digital compressed format. The video encoding standards include MPEG-1 Video, MPEG-2 Video, MPEG-4 Visual and MPEG-4 AVC. The audio enco ding standards include MPEG-1 Audio, MPEG-2 Audio and MPEG-2 AAC. ï° Multi angle Up to 9 camera angles can be recorded simultaneously on BD -ROM or DVD-Video discs, letting you wa tch the same scene from different angles. ï° Parental Lock Playback of the con tents of some BD-ROM o r DVD-Video disc s can be restricted, for example for discs containin g scenes of violence. With BD-ROM discs, an age rest riction ca n be set to restric t playback. Playing DVD-Video title can be restricted by setting the parental lock level. ï° Picture-in-Picture (P-in-P) This is a fun ction for sup erimposin g a sub video on the main video. Some BD-ROMs include secondary video, which can be superimposed on the prima ry video. ï° Progressive scan With this method, one picture is consisted of a singl e picture, without dividing it in two pictur es. Progressive scan provides clear pictures with no flicker, in pa rtic ular for sti ll pictures that contain much text, graphics, or horizont al lines. Progressive scan is indicated in this player and operating instr uctions by a âÂÂp â after the resolution value (for example, 480p). ï° Region number A number assigned to Blu-ray Disc Players, BD-ROM and DVD- Video discs according to the region in which they are sold. A disc can be played if the region numbers indicated on the disc include the number set for the player or if âÂÂALLâ is indicated.
07 61 En ï° S-Video output An output t erminal for tra nsmitting sep arate lum inance (Y) and color (C) signals over a single cord. It offers clearer picture s than the composite video output. ï° Secondary audio Some BD-ROMs include sub audio streams mixed with the main audio. These sub audio streams are called âÂÂse condary audioâÂÂ. On some discs this secondary audio is recorded as the audio for the secondary video. ï° Secondary video Some BD-ROMs include sub videos superimposed on the main videos using the Picture-in-Picture function. These sub videos are called âÂÂsecondary videoâÂÂ. ï° Subtitle language This refers to the language o f the subtitles often used on movies. Up to 255 languages (255 types of subtitles) can be recorded on BD- ROM discs, 32 languages (32 types of subtitles) on DVD-Vid eo discs, so you can select the desired su btitle when watching t he disc. ï° VC-1 A video codec developed by Microsoft and standar dized by the Society of Motion Picture and Tel evision Engineers (SM PTE). Some BDs include videos encode d in this codec.
07 62 En Licenses The licenses for the software used on this player a re shown below. ï° libxml2 The MIT License Copyright é <year> <copyright holders> Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person ob taining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicens e, and/ or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do s o, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permissi on notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of t he Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", W ITHOUT WARR ANTY OF ANY KIND, EX PRESS OR IMPLIED, INC LUDING BUT NOT LI MITED TO THE WARRA NTIES OF MERCHANTABILI TY, FITNESS F OR A PARTICULAR P URPOSE AND NONI NFRINGEM ENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE A UTHORS OR COPYRIGH T HOLDERS BE LI ABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LI ABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TO RT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONN ECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OT HER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. ï° OpenSSL The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual licen se, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actu ally both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issue s related to OpenSSL please contact openssl- core@openssl.org. OpenSSL License Copyright é 1998-2007 The Ope nSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in sourc e and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following cond itions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must re tain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaime r in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising ma terials mentioning featur es or use of this software must displa y the following acknowledgment: "This product includes soft ware developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSS L Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "Op enSSL Pr oject" must not be used to endorse or pr omote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org. 5. Products derive d from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenS SL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the followi ng acknowledgment: "This product includes so ftware developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (htt p://www.openssl.org/)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PR OVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJ ECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRE SSED OR IMPLIED WARRANT IES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, TH E IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCH ANTABILITY AND FI TNESS FOR A PARTICULA R PURPOSE ARE DISCLA IMED. IN NO EVENT SHA LL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR IT S CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDI RECT, INCIDENT AL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR C ONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUD ING, BUT NOT L IMITED T O, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SE RVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINE SS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSE D AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILIT Y, WHETHER IN CONT RACT, STRICT LIAB ILITY, OR TORT (INCLU DING NEGLIGE NCE OR OTHERWISE) A RISING IN ANY WAY OU T OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EV EN IF ADVISED OF THE POSS IBILITY OF SUCH DAM AGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written b y Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Original SSLeay Licens e Copyright é 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation writ ten by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to confor m with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non- commercial use as long as the following co nditions are aheared to. The following c onditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not ju st the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this dist ribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@crypts oft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in t he code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in sourc e and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following cond itions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must re tain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaime r in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising ma terials mentioning featur es or use of this software must displa y the followin g acknowledgement: "This produ ct includes cryptographi c software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-). 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must includ e an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@c ryptsoft.co m)" THIS SOFTWARE I S PROVIDED BY ERIC Y OUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR I MPLIED WARRANTIES, I NCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IM PLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILIT Y AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE A RE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHAL L THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL , SPECIAL, EXEMPLA RY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DA MAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCU REMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION ) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIAB IL ITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRIC T LIABIL ITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGE NCE OR OTHERWIS E) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF TH IS SO FTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF T HE POSSIBILIT Y OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any pu blically availabl e version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [inc luding the GNU Public Licence.] ï° zlib This software is based in part on z lib s ee http://www.zlib.net for information. ï° FreeType2 The FreeType Project LICENSE 2006-Jan-27 Copyright 1996-2 002, 2006 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
07 63 En Introduction The FreeType Project i s distributed in several archive packages; so me of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font eng ine, various tools and c ontributions which rely on, or relate to, the FreeType Project. This license applies to all files found in such packages, and which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license a ffects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs, documentation and makefiles, at the very least. This license was inspired by the BSD, Arti stic, and IJG (Independent JPEG Group) lic enses, which all enco urage inclusion and us e of free software in commercial and freeware products alike. As a conseq uence, its main points are that: ⢠We don't promise that this software works. However, we will be interested in any kind of bu g reports.('as is' distribution) ⢠You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or full form, without having to pay us.('royalty-free' usage) ⢠You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it , or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge somew here in your documentation that you have used the FreeType code.('credits') We specifically permit and encourage the in clusion of this software, with or without modificati ons, in commercial p roducts. We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType Project and assume no liability related to The FreeType Project. Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for a credit/d isclaimer to use in compliance wi th this license . We thus enco urage you to use the following text: Portions of this software are copyright é <year> The Fr eeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved. Please replace <year> with the value fr om the FreeType version you a ctually use. Legal Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license, th e terms 'packa ge', 'FreeType Project', and 'FreeType archive' re fer to the set of files originally d istributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the 'FreeType Project' , be they named as alpha, beta or final release. 'You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where 'using' is a generic term incl uding compiling the project's so urce code as well as linking it to form a 'program' or 'executable' . This program is referred to as 'a program using the FreeType engine'. This license applies to all files distribute d in the original FreeType Project, includ ing all source code, binaries and documen tation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its original, unmodified form as distri buted in the origina l archive. If you are uns ure whether or not a particular fi le is covered by this licen se, you must contact us to verify this. The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 199 6-2000 by David Turner, Ro bert Wilhelm, and Werner Lember g. All rights reserved except as specified below. 1. No Warr anty THE FREETYPE PROJ ECT IS PROVIDED 'AS IS' WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF AN Y KIND, EITHER EX PRESS OR IMPLI ED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL ITY AND FITN ESS FOR A PARTI CULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL AN Y OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HO LDERS BE LIABLE FO R ANY DAMAGES C AUSED BY THE USE O R THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE F REETYPE PROJE CT. 2. Redistri bution This license grants a worldwide, royalty-fr ee, perpetual and irr evocable right and licen se to use, execute, perform, compile, d isplay, cop y, create derivative works of, distrib ute and sublicens e the FreeTyp e Project (in bo th source and object code forms) and der ivative works thereof for any pu rp ose; and to authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted herein, subject to the following conditions: ⢠Redistribution of source code must retain this license file ('FTL.TXT') unaltered; an y additions, deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. The copyright notices of the unalte red, original files must be preserved in all copies of source files. ⢠Redistribution in binary form mu st provide a disclaimer that states that the so ftware is based in part of the work of the Free Type Team, in the distribution documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeTy pe web page in your documentation, though this isn't mandatory. These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified files. If you use our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid to us. 3. Advertising Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional purposes without specific prior written permission. W e suggest, but do not r equire, tha t you use on e or more of th e following phrases to refer to this s oftware in your docum entati on or advertising m aterials: 'FreeType Project', 'FreeType Engine', 'FreeTyp e library', or 'FreeType Distribution'. As you have not signed this licen se, you are not required to accept it. However, as the FreeType Project is copyrighted materia l, only this license, or another one contracted with the authors, grants you the right to us e, distri bute, and modify it. Therefore, by using, dist ributing, or modi fying the FreeType Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms of th is license. 4. Contacts There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: ⢠freetype@nongnu.org Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as future and wanted additions to the library and distribution. If you are looking for support, start in this list if you haven't found anything to help you in t he documentation. ⢠freetype-devel@nongnu. org Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, spec ific licenses, porting, etc. Our home page can be found at http://www.freetype.org ï° libpng COPYRIGHT NOTIC E, DISCLAIMER, and LIC ENSE: If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this sentence. libpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.2.26, April 2, 2008, are Cop yright é 2004, 2006-2008 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, a nd are distribut ed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.2.5 with the followi ng individual added to the lis t of Contributing Authors Cosmin Truta libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 - October 3, 2002, are Copyright é 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-P ehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with th e following individuals added to th e list of Contributing Authors Simon-Pierre Cadi eux Eric S. Raymond Gilles Vollant and with the following additions to the disclaimer: There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and th e entire risk of satisfactory quality, pe rformance, accuracy, and effort is with the user. libpng versions 0.97, January 19 98, thro ugh 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, ar e Copyright é 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are di stributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the li st of Contributing Authors: Tom Lan e Glenn Randers-Pehrson Willem van Schaik
07 64 En libpng versions 0.89, June 199 6, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright é 1996, 199 7 An dreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng- 0.88, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: John Bowler Kevin Bracey Sam Bushell Magnus Holmgren Greg Roelofs Tom Tanner libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Cop yright é 1995 , 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc. For the purposes of this copyright and license, "Contributing Author s" is defined as the following set of individuals: Andreas Dilge r Dave Martindale Guy Eric Schalnat Paul Schmidt Tim Wegn er The PNG Reference Library is supplied "A S IS ". The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed o r implied, including, w ithout limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of fi tness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, I nc. assume no liabili ty for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages, which may result from the use of th e PNG Reference L ibrary, even if advised of the possibi lity of such damage. Permission is hereby granted to use, copy , modify, and distribute this source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, withou t fee, subject to the following restrictions: 1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented. 2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and mu st not be misrepresented as being the original source. 3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altere d from any source or alte red source distribution. The Contributing Author s and Group 42, Inc. spec ifically permit, without fee, and e ncour age the use of this source code as a c o mponent to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this source code in a p rod uct, acknowledgment is not requ ired but would be appreciated. A "png_get_copyright" function is availabl e, for convenient use in "about" boxes an d the like: printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NU LL));Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the files "pngbar.png" an d "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31). Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark of the Open Source Initiative. Glenn Randers-Pehrson glennrp at users. sourceforge.net 2-Apr-08 ï° libjpg The Independent JPEG Group's JPEG software README for release 6b of 27-Mar -1998 This distribution contains the sixth public release of the Independent JPEG Group's free JPEG software. You are welcome to re di stribute this software and to use it for any purpose, subject to the con ditions under LEGAL ISSUES, below. Serious users of this software (particular ly those incorporating it into larger prog rams) should contact IJG at jpeg-info@uunet .uu.net to be added to our electronic mailing list. Mailing list members are notified of updates and have a chance to participate in technical discussions, etc. This software is the work of Tom Lane, Philip Gladstone, Jim Bo ucher, Lee Crocker, Julian Ming uillon, Lu is Ortiz, George Philli ps, Davide Rossi , Guido Vollbeding, Ge' Weijers, and other members of the Independent JPEG Group. IJG is not affiliated with the official ISO JPEG standards co mmittee. DOCUMENTATION ROADMAP This file contains the followin g sections: OVERVIEW General description of J PEG and the IJG software. LEGAL ISSUES Copyright, lack of warranty, terms of distribution. REFERENCES Where to learn more about JPEG. ARCHIVE LOCATIONS Where to find ne wer versions of this software. RELATED SOFTWARE Other stuff you should get. FILE FORMAT WARS Software *not* to get. TO DO Plans for future IJG releases. Other documentation files in the distribution are: User documentation: install.doc How to configure and install the IJG software. usage.doc Usage instructions for cjpeg, djpeg, jpegtran, rdjpgcom, and wrjpgco m. *.1 Unix-style man pages for programs (same info as usage.doc). wizard.doc Advanced usage instru ctions for JPEG wizards only. change.log Version-to-version change highlights. Programmer and internal documentation: libjpeg.doc How to use the JPEG library in your own programs. example.c Sample code for calling the JPEG library. structure.doc Overview of the JPEG library's internal structure. filelist.doc Road map of IJG files. coderules.doc Coding style rules --- pl ease read if you contribute code. Please read at least the files install.doc and usage.doc. Useful information can also be found in the JPEG FAQ (Frequent ly Aske d Questions) article. See ARCHIVE LOCATIONS below to find out where to obtain the FAQ article. If you want to understand how the JPEG code works, we suggest re ading one or more of the REFERE NCES, then looking at th e docume ntation files (in roughly the order listed) before divi ng into the cod e. OVERVI EW This package contains C software to implem ent JPE G image compression and dec ompression . JPEG (pronounced "jay-peg") is a standa rdized compression method for full-color and gray-scale images. JPEG is intended for compressing re al-world scenes; line drawings, cartoons and other non-rea listic images are not its strong suit. JPEG is lossy, meaning that the output image is not exactly identical to the in put image. Hence you must not use JPEG if you have to have identical output bits. However, on typical photographic images, very good c ompression levels can be obtained with no visible chan ge, and remarkably high compressi on levels are possible if you can tolera te a low-quality image. For more details, see the re ferences , or just experiment with various compression settings. This software implements JPEG baseline, ex tended-sequential, and progre ss ive compression processes. Provision is made for suppo rting all variants of these processes, although some uncommon parameter settings aren't implemented yet. For legal reasons, we are not distributing code for the arithmetic-coding variants of JPEG; see LEGAL ISSUES. We have made no provisio n for supp orting the hierarchical or lo ssless processes define d in the standard. We provide a set of li brary routines for re ading and writing JPEG image files, plus t wo sample applications "cjpe g" and "djpeg" , which use the library to perform conversion between JPEG and some other popular imag e file formats. The library is intended to be reused in ot her applications.
07 65 En In order to support file conversion and viewing software, we have included considerable function ality bey ond the bare JPEG codi ng/decoding capability; for example, the color quantization modules are not strictly part of JPEG decoding , but they are essential for output to colormapp ed file format s or colormapped displays. Th ese extra functions can be compiled out of the library if not required for a particular application. We have also included jpegtran, a ut ility for lossless transcoding between different JPEG processes, and "rdjpg com" and "wrjpgcom", two simple applic ations for inserting and extracti ng textual comments in JFIF fi les. The emphasis in designing this software has been on achiev ing portability and flexibility, while al so making it fast enough to be useful. In particular , the software is not intended to be read as a tutorial on JPEG . (See the REFERE NCES section for introductory material.) Rather, it is intended to be reliable, portable, in dustrial-strength code. We do not claim to have achieved that goal in ev ery aspect of the software, but we st rive for it. We welcome the use of this software as a component of commercial products. N o royalty is requir ed, but we do ask for an acknowl edgement in produc t docum entation, as described under LEGAL I SSUES. LEGAL ISSUES In plain English: 1. We don't promise that this software works. (B ut if you find any bugs, please let us know!) 2. You can use this software for whatever you want. You don't have to pay us. 3. You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it in a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your document ation that yo u've used the IJG code. In legalese: The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either expre ss or implied, with respect to this software, its quality, accuracy , merchantability, or fitness for a particul ar purpose. This software is p rovided "AS IS", and you, its us er, assume the entire risk as to its quality and accuracy. This software is copyright é 1991-1998 , Thomas G. Lane. All Rights Reserved except as specified be low. Permission is hereby granted to use, copy , modify, and distribute this software (or portions thereof) for any purpose, without fee, subject to thes e conditions: (1) If any part of the source code for this software is distribute d, t he n th is REA DM E fi le mus t be include d, with this copyright and no-warranty notice unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes to the original files must be clearly in dicat ed in ac companyin g docum entation . (2) If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying documentation must state that "this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group". (3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts full responsibility for any undesirable consequences ; the authors accept NO LIABILITY for damages of any kin d. These conditions apply to any software deri ved from or based on the IJG code, not ju st to the unmodified library. If you use ou r work, you ought to acknowledge us. Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author's name or company name in advertising or publicity relating to this sof tware or products derived from it. Th is software may be referred to only as "t he Independent JPEG Group's software". We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of commercia l products, provided that all warranty o r liability cla ims are assumed by the product vendor. ansi2knr.c is included in this distribution by permission of L. Peter Deutsch, sole proprietor of its copyright holder, Aladdin En terprises of Menlo Park, CA. ansi2knr.c is NOT covered by the above copyright and conditions, but instead by the usual distribution terms of the Free Software Foundation; principally, tha t you must include source code if you redistribute it. (See the file ansi2knr.c for full deta ils.) However, since ansi2knr.c is not needed as part of any program generated from the IJG code, this does not limit you more than the foregoing paragraphs do. The Unix configuration script "configure" wa s produced with GNU A utoconf. It is copy right by the Free Software Foundation but i s freely distributable. The same holds for its supporting scripts (c onfig.guess, conf ig.sub, ltcon fig, ltmain.sh). Another suppor t script, install-sh, is copyright by M.I .T. but is also freely distributable. I t appears that the arithmetic coding option of the JPEG spec is covered by patents owned by IBM, AT&T, and Mitsubishi. Hence a rithmetic coding cannot legally be used without obtaining one or more licenses. For this reason, support for arithmetic coding has been removed from the free JPEG soft ware. (Since ari thmetic coding provide s only a marginal gain over the unpatented Huffman mode, it is un likely that very many implementations will support it.) So far a s we are aware, there are no patent restrictions on the remaining code. The IJG distribution formerly included code to read and write GIF files. To avoid enta nglement with the Unisys LZW patent, GIF r eading support has been removed altogether, and the GIF writer has been simplified to produce uncompressed GIFs. T his technique does not use the LZW algorithm; the resulting GIF files are larger than usual, but are readable by all standard GIF decoders. We are re quired to st ate that "The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of CompuServe Inc orporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of Comp uServe Incorporated. " REFERE NCES We highly recommend reading one or more of these references before trying to under stand the innards of the JPEG software. The best short technical introduction to the JPEG compression algorithm is Wallace, Gregory K. "The JPE G Still Picture Compr ession Standard", Communications of the ACM, April 19 91 (vol. 34 no. 4), pp. 30-44. (Adjacent articles in that issue discuss MPEG motion p icture co mpression, applications of JPEG, and relate d topics.) If you don 't have the CACM issu e ha ndy, a Post Script file containing a revised version of Walla ce's article is available at ftp://ftp.uu.ne t/graphics/jpeg/wallace.ps.gz. The file ( actually a preprint for an article that appeared in IEEE Trans. Consumer Electronics) omits the sample images that appeared in CACM, but it includes corrections and some added mat erial. Note: the Wal lace article is copyrigh t ACM and IE EE, and it ma y no t be used for commercial purposes. A somewhat less technical, more leisurely intr oduction to JPEG can be found in The Data Compression Book by Mark Nelson and Jea n-loup Gailly, published by M&T Books (New York), 2nd ed. 1996, ISBN 1-55851- 434-1. This book provides good explanations and example C code for a multitude of compression methods inc luding JPEG. It is an excellent source if you are comfortable reading C code but don't know much about data compression in general. The book 's JPEG sample code is far from industrial- strength , but w hen you are ready to look at a full implementation, yo u've got one here... The best full description of JPEG is the textbook "JPEG Still Im age Data Compression Standard" by William B. Pennebaker and Joa n L. Mitchell, published by Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1993, ISBN 0-442-01272-1. Price US $59.95, 638 pp . The book includes the complete text of the ISO JPEG standards (DIS 10918-1 and draft DIS 1 0918-2). This is by far the most complete exposition of JPEG in existence, and we highly recommend it. The JPEG standard itself is not available electronically; you must order a pa per copy through ISO or ITU. (Unless you feel a ne ed to own a certified official copy, we recommend buying the Pennebaker an d Mitchell book instead; it's much cheaper and includes a great deal of useful exp lanatory ma terial.) In the USA, copies of the standard may be ordered from ANSI Sales at (212) 642-4900, or from Global Engineering Documents at (800) 854-7179. (AN SI doesn' t take credit card orders, but Global does.) It's not cheap: as of 19 92, ANSI was charging $95 for Pa rt 1 and $47 for Part 2, plus 7% shipping/handlin g. Th e standard is divided into two pa rts, Part 1 being the actual specification, while Part 2 covers compliance testing meth ods. Part 1 is titled "Digital Compression and Coding of Conti nuous-tone Still Images, Part 1: Requirements and guidelines" and has doc ument numbers ISO/IEC IS 10918-1, ITU-T T.81. Part 2 is titled "Digital Compression and Coding of Continuous-tone Still Images, Part 2: Compliance testing" and has docume nt numbers ISO/IEC IS 10 918-2, ITU-T T.83. Some extensions to the original JPEG stan dard are defined in JPEG Part 3, a newer ISO standard numbered ISO/IEC IS 10918-3 and ITU-T T.84. IJG currently does not support any Part 3 extensions. The JPEG standard does not specify all deta ils of an in terchangeable file format. Fo r the omitted details we follow the "JFIF" conventions, rev ision 1.02. A c opy of the JFIF spec is available from: Literature Department C-Cube Microsystems, Inc. 1778 McCarthy Blvd. Milpitas, CA 95035 phone (408) 944-6300, fax (408) 944-6314 A PostScript version of this document is available by FTP at ftp: //ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jfif .ps.gz. There is also a plain t ext version at ftp:// ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/ jfif.txt.gz, but it is missing the figures.
07 66 En The TIFF 6.0 file format specif ication can be obtained by FTP from ftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/ti ff/TIFF6.ps.gz. The JPE G incorp oration scheme found in the TIFF 6.0 spec of 3-June-92 ha s a number of serious proble ms. IJG does n ot recommend use of the TIFF 6. 0 design (TIF F Compression t ag 6). Instea d , we recommend the JPEG design proposed by TIFF Technical Note #2 (Compressi on tag 7). Copies of this Note can be ob tained from ftp.sgi.com or from ftp://ftp. uu.net/graphics/jpeg/. It is expected that the next revision of the TIFF spec will replace the 6.0 JPE G desi gn with the Note's design. Alth ough IJG's own code does not su pport TIFF/JPEG, the fr ee libtiff library uses our library to implement TIFF/JPEG per the Note. libtiff is available from ftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/tiff/. ARCHIVE LOCA TIONS The "official" archive site for this softwa re is ftp.uu. net (Internet ad dress 192.48.96.9). The most recent released version ca n always be found there in di rectory graphics/ jpeg. This particular v ersion will be archived as ftp://ftp.uu.ne t/graphics/jpeg/jpegsr c.v6b. tar.gz. If you don't have direc t I nternet access, UUNET's archives are also available via UUCP; contact help@uunet.uu.net for information on retrieving files that way. Numerous Internet sites maintain c opies of the UUNET files. Ho wever, only ftp.uu.ne t is guaranteed to have the latest official versi on. You can also obtain this software in DOS- compatible "zip" archive format from the Si mTel archives (ftp://ftp.simtel.net/pub/sim telnet/msdos/graphics/), or on CompuServe in the Graphics Support forum (GO CIS:GRAPHS UP), library 12 JPEG Tools. Again, these versions may sometimes lag behind the ftp. uu.net release. The JPEG FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) article is a useful so urce of general information about JPEG. It is updated constantl y and therefore is not included in this distribution. The FAQ is posted every two weeks to Usenet newsgr oups comp.graphics.misc, news.answers, and other groups. It is available on the World Wide Web at http://www.faqs.org/faqs/jpeg-faq/ and other news.answers archive sites, including the official news. answers archive at rtfm.mi t.edu: ftp://rtfm.mit.edu/pub/us enet/ news.answers/jpeg-faq/. If yo u don't have Web or FTP ac cess, send e-mail to mail-server@rtfm.mit.edu with body send usenet/news.an swers/jpeg-faq/part1 send usenet/news.an swers/jpeg-faq/part2 RELATED SO FTWARE Numerous viewing and image m anipulation prog rams now support JPEG. (Quite a few of them use this library to do so.) The JPEG FA Q described above lists some of the more popular free and shareware viewers, and tells where to obtain them on Internet. If you are on a Unix machine, we highly recommend Jef Poskanzer' s free PBMPLUS software, which pr ovides many useful operations on PPM-format image files. In particular, it can convert PPM images to an d from a wide range of other formats, thus making cjpeg/djpeg considerably more usef ul. The latest version is distributed by the NetPBM group, and is available from numerous sites, notab ly ftp://wuarchive.wustl.edu/graphic s/graphics/packages/NetPBM/. U nfortunately PBMPLUS/NETPBM is not nearly as portable as the IJG softwa re is; you are likely to have difficulty making it work on any non-Unix machine. A different free JPEG implementation, writte n by the PVRG group at Stanford, is avai lable from ftp://havefun.stanford.edu/pub/j peg/. T his program i s designe d for researc h and experimentation rather than pr oduction use; it is slower, harder to use, an d less portable than the IJG code, but it is eas ier to read and modify . Also, th e PVRG code supports lossless JPEG, which we do not. (On the other hand, it doesn't do progressive JPEG.) FILE FORMAT WARS Some JPEG programs produce files that are not compatible with our library. The root of the problem is that the ISO JPEG committ ee failed to specify a concrete file format. Some vendors "filled in the blanks" on thei r own, creating proprietary formats that no one else could read. (For example, none of th e early co mmercial JP EG implementations for the Macintosh were able to exchange compressed files.) The file format we have adopted is called JFIF (see REFERENCES). Th is format has been agreed to by a number of major commercial JPEG vendors, and it has become the de facto standard. JFIF is a minimal or "low end" representa tion. We recommend the use of TIFF/JPEG (TIFF revision 6.0 as m odified by TIFF Tec hnical Note # 2) for "high end" applications that need to record a lot of additional data about an image. TIFF/JPEG is fairly new and not yet widely supported, unfortunately. The upcoming JPEG Part 3 standard defines a file format called SPIFF . SPIFF is intero perable with JF IF, in the sense that most JFIF decoders should be able to read the most common variant of SPIFF. SPIFF has som e technical advantages over JFIF, but its ma jor claim to fame is simply that it is a n official standard rather than an informal one. At this point it is unclear whether SPIFF will supersede JFIF or whether JFIF wi ll remain the de-facto standard. IJG inten ds to support SPIFF once the standard is frozen, but we have not d ecided whether it should become our defa ult output format or not. (In any case, our decoder will remain capable of reading JFIF indefinitely.) Various proprietary file formats incorporatin g JPEG compression also exist. We have li ttle or no sympathy for the existence of these f ormats. Inde ed, one of th e original reasons for developing this free software was to help force convergence on common, op en format standards for JPEG files. Don't use a proprietary file format! TO DO The major thrust for v7 will proba bly be improvement of visual qu ality. The curr ent method for sc aling the quantization tables is known not to be very good at low Q values. We also intend to investigate block boundary smoothing, "poor ma n's variable quantization", and other means of improving quality-vs-file-size performance without sacrificing compatibility. In future versions, we are consid ering supporting some of the upcoming JP EG Part 3 extensions --- principally, variable quantization and the SPIFF file format. As always, speeding things up is of great interest. Please send bug reports, offers of help , etc. to jpeg-info@uunet.uu.net. ï° GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright é 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Str eet, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Pu bl ic License is intended to gua rantee your freedom to share and change free software - to make sure the so ftware is free for all its users. This General Public Lice nse ap plies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to usin g it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are refe rring to freedom, not price. Our General Pub lic Licenses are designed to make sure t hat you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish ), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, t hat you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you c an do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make re strictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictio ns translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copi es of the software, or if you modify it. For examp le, if you dis tribute co pies of such a program, w hether grati s or for a fe e, you must give the reci pients all t he righ ts that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source c ode. And you mu st show them t hese terms so they know thei r rights. We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the softwa re, and (2) offer you this licens e which gives you legal permiss ion to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make ce rtain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for th is free software. If the software is modified by someone el se and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems int roduced by others will not refl ect on the original authors' reputations. Finally, any free program is threatened consta ntly by software patents. We wish to avoi d the danger that redistributors of a fr ee program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the pr ogram proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precis e terms a nd cond itions for c opying, distribut ion and m odificatio n follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyri ght holder saying it may be dis t ributed under the terms of this Gener al Public License. The "Program", below, refe rs to any such program or work, and a "wor k based on the Program " means either the Pr ogram or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or t ranslated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in th e term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
07 67 En Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this L i cense; they are outs ide its scope. The a ct of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having b een made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim cop i es of the Program's source c ode as you re ce ive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copy right notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any war ranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a co py of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in excha nge for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any port ion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy an d distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet a ll of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or a ny part thereof, to be lic ensed as a whole at no charge to all third part ies under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads co mmands interactively when run, you must ca us e it, when started running for such inte ractive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or e lse, saying that you pro vide a warranty) and that users ma y redistribute the program under these conditions, and tellin g the user how to view a copy of this L icense. (Exc eption: if th e Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announc ement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) These requirements apply to the modifie d wo rk as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the P rogra m, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themse lves, then this License, and its terms, do no t apply to those sections when you distrib ute them as separate works. But w hen you distribute the same sections as part of a whole w hich is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work wri tten entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Pr ogram with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) o n a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the ot her work under the scope of this Licens e. 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above p rovided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corr espond ing machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Secti ons 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b) A ccompany it with a wr itten offer, valid fo r at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your co st of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable co py of the corresponding source code, to be dis tributed under the terms of Sec tions 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accom pany it with the information you rece ived as to the offer to distribute corres ponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord wit h Subsecti on b ab ove.) The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work fo r making modifications to it. For an executable work, complet e source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface d efinition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exceptio n, the source code distributed nee d not in clude anything that is norma lly distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major compone nts (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operat ing system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies th e exe cutable. If distribution of executable or object co de is made by offering access to copy from a designated plac e, then offering equivale nt access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of th e source code, even though third parties ar e n ot compelled to copy the source along with the object co de. 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program excep t as expressly provided und er this License. Any atte mpt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically ter minate your rights under this License. Howev er, parties who have r eceived copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such p arties remain in full complianc e. 5. You are not required to accept this Lic ens e, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to mod ify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions ar e prohibited by law if you do no t accept this License. Therefore, by m odifying or distributin g the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this Lice nse to do so, and all its ter ms an d conditions for copying, distributing o r modifying the Program or works based on it. 6. Each time you re distribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatica lly receives a license fro m the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. Yo u may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compli ance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or fo r any other reason (not lim ited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherw ise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from th e conditions of t his License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligat ions under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a pate nt license would not permit royalty-free redi stribution of the Program by all those w ho receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain en tirely from distribution of the Program. If any por tion of th is sectio n is held in valid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section i s intended to ap ply and the section as a whole is intended to app ly in other circumstances. It is not the purp ose of this section to induce you to infrin ge any patents or other property ri ght cla ims or to contest v alidi ty of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software di stributio n syste m, which is impl eme nted by public license pract ices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distribut ed through th at system in reliance on c onsistent application of that syste m; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot i mpose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequen ce of the rest of this License. 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by pa tents or by c opyrighted interfac es, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an ex plicit geographical distribution limitatio n excluding those countries, so that dist ribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. I n such case, this License incorporat es the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 9. The Free Software Founda tion may publish re vised and/ or new versions of the General Pu blic License from time to time. Such ne w versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in deta il to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies t o it and "any later version", you have the option of following the t erms and conditions either of that version or of any later versio n published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever publis hed by the Free Software Foundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose di stribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software w hich is co pyrighted by the Free Software Fo undation, write to t he Free Soft ware Found ation; we sometime s make exce pti ons for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 11. BECAUSE THE PROG RAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRA NTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTE D BY APPLICABLE LA W. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE ST ATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AN D/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EX PRESSED OR IMPLI ED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIM ITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCH ANTABILITY AND FI TNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOS E. THE ENTIRE RIS K AS TO THE QUALI TY AND PERFORMANC E OF THE PROGRAM IS WI TH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NE CE SSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION .
07 68 En 12. IN NO EVEN T UNLESS REQUIR ED BY APPLICABLE L AW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRI GHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTH ER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUT E THE PROGRAM AS PERMI TTED ABOVE, BE LIA BLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GEN ERAL, SPECIAL, INCI DENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIA L DAMAGES ARISIN G OUT OF THE USE OR INABI LITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITE D TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED IN ACCURATE OR LOS SES SUSTAIN ED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS) , EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVI SED OF THE POSSIBILIT Y OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develo p a new pro gram, and y ou want it t o be of the gr eatest pos sible use to t he public, t he best way to achieve th is is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and chan ge under t hese terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most eff ectively convey the excl usion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" lin e and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it d oes.> Copyright é <year> <name of author> This program is free software; you can redi stribute it and/or modify it under the te rms of the GNU General Public License as pu blished by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the L icens e, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hop e that it will be useful , but WITH OUT ANY WARRANTY; withou t even the implie d warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNE SS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Publi c License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software F oundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA. Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: Gnomovision version 69, Copyright é year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANT Y; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistr ibute it under cert ain conditions; type `show c' for details. The hypothetical commands `show w' and `sh ow c' should show the appropriate parts of th e General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items - whatever suit s your program. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your sc hool, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for th e program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovisio n' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietar y programs. If your program is a subrouti ne library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications wi th the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. ï° GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright é 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the L esser GPL. It also coun ts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, versi on 2, hence the version number 2.1.] Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Publ ic Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software - to make sure the software is free for all it s users. This license, the Lesser General Public Lic ense, applies to some specially designated software packages - typically lib raries - of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. Yo u can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary Ge neral Public Lice nse is the better strategy to use in any particul ar case, based on the explanations below. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of us e, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrend er these rights. These re strictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copie s of the library or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whethe r grat is or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source c ode. If you link other code with the library, you mu st provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink t hem with the library after making changes to the library and re compiling it . And you must show them these terms so they know their right s. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal pe rmission to copy, distribute a nd/or modify the library. To protect each distributor, we want to ma ke it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someon e else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation wil l not be af fected by problems that might be introduced b y others. Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the e xistence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cann ot effectiv ely restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a re strictive license fr om a patent holder. Therefor e, we insist that any patent license obtained for a ve rsion of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. Most GNU software, includin g some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Pu blic License. This license, the GNU Lesse r General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the or dinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to perm it linking those libraries into non-free programs. When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or us ing a shared library, the comb ination of the two is legally sp eaking a combined work, a de rivative of the original library. The ordinary General Pub lic License therefore permits such linking only if the entire com bination fits its cr iteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits m ore lax criteria for linking other code with the library. We call this l icense the "Lesser " General Public Li cense because i t does Less to protec t the user's fre edom than the ordi nary G eneral Public License . It also provides other free software developers Less of an advant age over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the o rdinary General Publ ic License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license pr ovid es advantages in certain special circumstances. For exampl e, on rare occasi ons, there ma y be a special ne ed to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as wi dely used non-free libr aries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public Lic ense. I n o t h e r c a s e s , p e r m i s s i o n t o u s e a p a r t i c u l a r l i b r a r y i n n o n - f r e e p r o g r a m s e n a b l e s a g r e a t e r n u m b e r o f p e o p l e t o u s e a l a r g e b ody of fr ee software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non- free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its va riant, the GN U Linu x operati ng syste m. Although the Lesser General Public License is L ess protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that prog ram using a modified vers ion of th e Library. The precise terms and con ditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference betwe en a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.
07 69 En TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License Agreeme nt applies to any software library or othe r program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holde r or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (al so called "thi s License"). Each licen see is address ed as "you". A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application prog rams (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. Th e " L ib ra r y" , b e lo w, r ef e rs to a ny su c h s of t wa r e l ib ra r y o r work which has been distributed und er these terms. A "work based o n the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a wor k containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another la nguage. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source co de means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition fi les, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installat ion of the libr ary. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covere d by this Li cense; they are outside its scope. The a ct of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered on ly if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (indep endent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the L i brary does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1. You may copy and distribute ve rbatim copi es of the Library's complete source c ode as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuousl y and appropriately publish on eac h copy an ap propriate copyrig ht notice and disclaim er of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in excha nge for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any port ion of it , thus fo rming a wo rk base d on the L ibrary, and copy an d distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet a ll of these conditions: a) The modif ied work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modified to ca rry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that u ses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invo ked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does no t supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and pe rforms whatever part of its purpos e rem ains meaningful. (For exampl e, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Th erefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied f unction or table used by this function must be optional: if the applic ation does not supply it, th e square root func tion must still compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modi fied wor k as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not d erived from the Librar y, and ca n be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themse lves, then this License, and its terms, do no t apply to those sections when you distrib ute them as separate works. But w hen you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work wri tten entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or co llec tive works based on the Library. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) o n a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other wor k under the scope of this License. 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Pub lic License instead of this License to a given copy of the Li br ary. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the or dinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to thi s License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify tha t version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is i rreversib le for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This opti on is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is n ot a library. 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (o r a portion or derivative of it, under Se ct ion 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 a nd 2 above provided that you accom pany it with the co mplete cor responding machine- readable source code, which must be distributed under th e terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a me dium custom arily used f or software in terchange . I f d i s t r i b u t i o n o f o b j e c t c o d e i s m a d e b y o f f e r i n g a c c e s s t o c o p y f r o m a d e s i g n a t e d p l a c e , t h e n o f f e r i n g e q u i v a l e n t a c c e s s t o c opy the source code from the sa me place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even th ough third parties are not compelled to copy the source along w ith the object code. 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Li brary, but is designed to work with the Library by being compil ed or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolatio n, is not a derivative work of the Librar y, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (bec ause it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library" . The executable is therefore covered by th is License. Section 6 states terms for dis tribution of such executables. When a "work that uses the Library" uses materia l from a header file that is part of the Librar y, the object code for the work may be a der ivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especi ally significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a librar y. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only numeric al parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and sm all inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricte d, regardless of whether it is le gally a derivative work. (Executables c ontaining this object code plus portions of the Libr ary will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Librar y, you may distri bute the object code for the work under the terms of Secti on 6. Any executables containing that work also fall unde r Section 6, whe ther or not t hey are linked directly with the Library itself. 6. As an except ion to the Sec tions above, you may a lso combine or link a "work that us es the Library" with the Library to produc e a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under t erms of your choice, provided th at the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and rev erse engineerin g for debugging such modifications. You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and th at the Library and its use are c overed by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this Lice nse. Also, you must do one of thes e things: a) Accompany the work with the com plete corresponding mach ine-read able source code for the Library including whatever changes we re used in the wor k (which must be distributed under Sectio ns 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an execut able linked with the Libra ry, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses t h e L i b r a r y " , a s o b j e c t c o de a n d / o r s o u r c e c o d e , s o t h a t t h e u s e r c a n m o d i f y t h e L i b r a r y a n d t h e n r e l i n k t o p r o d u c e a m o d i f i e d executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be a ble to recompile the application to use the modified defi nitions.) b) Use a suitable shared libr ary me chanism for linki ng with the Libr ary. A suitable mechanism is on e that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copy ing library func tions into the executable, and (2 ) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as t he modi fied version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with. c) Accom pany the work with a written offer, valid for at least thre e ye ars, to give the same user the materials spec ified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribu tion. d) If distribution of the work is made by o ffering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the a bove specified materials from the same place. e) Verify that th e user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have al ready sent this user a copy. For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" m ust includ e any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in eit her source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that c omponent itself acc ompanies the executable.
07 70 En It may happen that this requirement contra dicts the license restrictions of other pr oprietary libraries tha t do not normally ac company the operating system. Such a contradiction means you c annot use both them and the Li brary together in an executable that you distribute. 7. You may plac e library facilities that are a work based on the Li brary side-by-side in a single libr ary together with other library facilitie s not covered by this License, and distribute s uch a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other l ibrary facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the combined librar y with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library faciliti es. Th is must be di stribute d under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give p rominent notice with the combined lib rary of the fact that part of it is a work b ased on the Library, and explaining wh ere to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or d istribute th e Library except as expressly pr ovided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. Howe ver, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 9. You are not required to accept this Lic ens e, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to mod ify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohi bited by law if you do no t accept this License. Therefor e, by modifying or distributin g the Li brary (or any w ork based o n the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so , and all its terms and conditions for copying, dist ributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any wor k based on the Libr ary), the recipient automatically rec eives a license fr om the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and condit ions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recip ients' exercise of th e right s gra nted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing co mpliance by third parties with this License. 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (n ot limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherw ise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from th e conditions of t his License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligat ions under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free re distribution of the Library by all those w ho receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain e ntirely from distribution of the Library . If a ny portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any partic ular circum stance, the balance of the section is intend ed to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstance s. It is not the purp ose of this section to induce you to infrin ge any patents or other property ri ght cla ims or to contest v alidi ty of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system whic h is implemented by public lic ense practi ces. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through th at system in reliance on consistent application of that syste m; it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot i mpose that choice. This section is intended to make thorou ghly clear what is believed to be a co nsequence of the rest of this License. 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by pa tents or by c opyrighted interfa ces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this Lic ense may add an explic it geographical distribution limitation excludin g those countries, so that dist ribution is permitted only in or among c ountries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporat es the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new ve rsions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing ve rsion number. If the Library specifies a ve rsion number of this License which appl ies to it and "any later version" , you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. I f the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any versio n ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other fr ee programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Softwa re Foundation, write to the Free Soft ware Foundation; we someti mes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of p reserving the free status of all derivat ives of our fr ee software and of promoting the shari ng and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 15. BECAUSE T HE LIBRARY IS LICENS ED FREE OF CHARGE, TH ERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR T HE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTEN T PERMITTED BY APPLI CABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHER WISE STATED I N WRITING THE C OPYRIGHT HOL DERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LI BRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR I MPLIED, INCLUDIN G, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , THE IMPLIE D WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL ITY AND FITN ESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE E NTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUAL ITY AND PERFORMANCE OF TH E LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOU LD THE LIBRARY PR OVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICIN G, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. IN NO EVEN T UNLESS REQUIR ED BY APPLICABLE L AW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRI GHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTH ER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAM AGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL , INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIA L DAMAGES ARI SING OUT OF TH E USE OR INABIL ITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT N OT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURA TE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY Y OU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY T O OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFT WARE) , EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVI SED OF THE POSSIBILIT Y OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library, and you want it t o be of the greate st possib le use to the public, we recommend making it free sof tware that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permi tting redistribution under these terms (or, alte rnatively, under the terms of the ordinary Genera l Public License). To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the librar y. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright é <year> <name of author> This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or mo dify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public Licens e as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This library is distri buted in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABIL ITY or FITNESS FO R A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Fre e Sof tware Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 0 2110-1301 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if a ny, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for th e library, if necessary. H ere is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James R andom Hacker. <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice That's all there is to it!
07 71 En [Notice on GNU General Public License] This product include the software licensed for use und er the terms of a GNU General Public License. A copy of the corresponding source code can be obtained by being charged the fee for distribution. To obtain a copy, contact your loca l Pioneer Customer Support Center. See the GNU website (http://www.gnu.org) for de tails of the GNU General Public License.
Should this product require ser vice in the U.S.A. and you wish to locate the nearest P ioneer Authorized Independent Ser vice Company , or if you wish to purchase replacement parts, operating instructions, ser vice manuals, or accessories, please call the number shown below . 1 â 8 0 0 â 4 2 1 â 1 4 0 4 Please do not ship your product to P ioneer without first calling the Customer Support at the above listed number for assistance. P ioneer Electronics Ser vice, Inc. P .O . BOX 1760, Long Beach, CA 90801-1760, U.S.A. F or warranty information please see the Limited W arranty sheet included with your product. Should this product require ser vice in Canada, please contact a P ioneer Canadian Authorized Dealer to locate the nearest P ioneer Authorized Ser vice Company in Canada. Alternatively , please contact the Customer Satisfaction Department at the following address: P ioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc. Customer Satisfaction Department 300 Allstate P arkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2 1-877-283-5901 905-479-4411 F or warranty information please see the Limited W arranty sheet included with your product. Si ce produit doit être réparé au Canada, veuillez vous adresser àun distributeur autorisé P ioneer du Canada pour obtenir le nom du Centre de Ser vice Autorisé Pioneer le plus près de chez-vous. V ous pouvez aussi contacter le Service àla clientèle de Pioneer: P ioneer ÃÂlectroniques du Canada, Inc. Ser vice Clientèle 300, Allstate P arkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2 1-877-283-5901 905-479-4411 P our obtenir des renseignements sur la garantie, veuillez vous reporter au feuillet sur la garantie restreinte qui accompagne le produit. S 018 _C_EF Printed in Japan <08F000001> <VRB1505-A> Register Your Product on http://www.pioneerelectronics.com (US) http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca (Canada) Published b y Pioneer Cor poration. Copyright é 2008 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reser ved. PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel A vila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Me xico,D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B_En
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT D3-4-2-1-1_En-A IMPORT ANT NOTICE î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî D1-4-2-6-1_En NOTE: îÂÂî îÂÂ!îÂÂî îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂî !îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ"î !"îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂ#îÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ'îÂÂ%îÂÂ"î îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"!îÂÂî î îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî !!îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂ"î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî $îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ# !#î îÂÂ"îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂî "î î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ" îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î #î îÂÂ! îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ! îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"!î î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ!î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ$î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ" îÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ!"î îÂÂî î îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ" î îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î î î !îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!"î îÂÂîÂÂî "îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ!îÂÂî îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î "î !î îÂÂ#!î !î îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî "î î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂ#î îÂÂî 'îÂÂî îÂÂî î 'îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"î îÂÂîÂÂ!" îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ#! îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ%îÂÂ" îÂÂîÂÂ" îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!" # îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ! îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ'î îÂÂîÂÂ#! îÂÂî îÂÂî î îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ" î îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ#îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ! î îÂÂî î îÂÂ%î $î î îÂÂ"îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî #î î îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂî "îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"î îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ%îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî # îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî "îÂÂî #îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!"î îÂÂîÂÂî "îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"î îÂÂ!îÂÂî îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂî !î îÂÂî #!î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî #îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"î îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"î îÂÂî $îÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ%î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî "î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî 'îÂÂ"# îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂ#!î îÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂ# îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂ" 'îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂ" îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ" î îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ'îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ" îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ%îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ!# îÂÂ! î îÂÂ( î îÂÂî î î îÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ" îÂÂîÂÂ" îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ" îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂ( î î îÂÂî îÂÂî !î îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂ!î îÂÂî î "îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî "%îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ$î î îÂÂ( î î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî "îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ#"îÂÂî "îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î î #îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂî "îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂ%î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ$î îÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî " îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ( î î îÂÂîÂÂ!#îÂÂ"îÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî &îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î D8-10-1-2_En îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ# îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî CAUTION: îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î D8-10-3a_En Infor mat ion to User Alterations or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user âÂÂs right to operate the equipment. D8-10-2_A_En Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. CAUTION : USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MA Y RESUL T IN HAZARDOUS RADIA TION EXPOSURE. CAUTION : THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD. D6-8-2-1_En 2 En
CAUTION This product is a class 1 lase r product, but this pr oduct contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. T o ensu re continued safety, do not remove any cove rs o r attem pt to gain access to the inside of the product. Ref e r all ser vicing to qualified p er sonnel. D3-4-2-1-8_B_En The following caution label a ppea rs on you r unit. Location: inside of the unit î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î "îÂÂ#% îÂÂ)îÂÂ!'îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ%îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ%îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂ!"'îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!*îÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ&"(%îÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂ&(îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ'îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"!îÂÂ'îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ$(îÂÂ# îÂÂ!'îÂÂî î î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ! îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ$!) îÂÂ%) ./îÂÂ''%)# îÂÂ/$% .îÂÂ0)% /îÂÂîÂÂ(îÂÂ&! îÂÂ.0-! îÂÂ/* îÂÂ'!î 1! îÂÂ. îÂÂîÂÂ! î î -* 0) îÂÂ/$! îÂÂ0)% /îÂÂ"* -îÂÂ1!) /%'î /%*) îÂÂ/* îÂÂ%( - * 1! îÂÂ$!î /î - î %îÂÂ/ %*)îÂÂî îÂÂ/î '!îÂÂ./î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ(î îÂÂ/îÂÂ/ * îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ(î îÂÂ/îÂÂ- !î -î î îÂÂ) î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ( îÂÂî /îÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂ$ îÂÂ.% ! îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ'* /.îÂÂîÂÂ) îÂÂ* !)%)# .îÂÂ%) îÂÂ/$! îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ%)! /îÂÂî -! î - * 1% ! îÂÂ"* -î 1 !)/ %'îÂÂ/ %*)îÂÂ/ *î !).0- ! îÂÂ- !'%îÂÂîÂÂ'! îÂÂ* ! -î /%*) îÂÂ*" îÂÂ/$! î -* 0î /îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ) îÂÂ/* î - * /!î /îÂÂ% /îÂÂ" -*( îÂÂ* 1! -$!î /%)# îÂÂî îÂÂ* î -! 1!) /îÂÂ"% - ! îÂÂ$î 4î - îÂÂîÂÂ/$! îÂÂ* !)%)# .îÂÂ.$* 0' îÂÂ)! 1! -îÂÂîÂÂ! î îÂÂ'*îÂÂ&! îÂÂ* -îÂÂîÂÂ* 1! -! îÂÂ2% /$ îÂÂ% /!( .îÂÂîÂÂ.0îÂÂ$ îÂÂî .îÂÂ)! 2. î ! -.îÂÂî / îÂÂîÂÂ'!î îÂÂ'*/ $.îÂÂî îÂÂ0-/ îÂÂ%).îÂÂî *-î îÂÂ3î * !- îÂÂ/ %)#îÂÂ/ $!î ! ,0% (!) /îÂÂ*) îÂÂ/$%îÂÂ& îÂÂîÂÂî - ! /îÂÂ* -îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ! î î îÂÂî î î î î î î î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ) Operating Environment îÂÂ#îÂÂ$îÂÂ&îÂÂ!î îÂÂîÂÂ!(îÂÂ$"! îÂÂ!& îÂÂ&î #îÂÂ$îÂÂ&'$î îÂÂîÂÂ!î îÂÂîÂÂ' îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ& * î î î î î îÂÂ&" îÂÂî îÂÂî î î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î î îÂÂ&" îÂÂî îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ%% îÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂ! îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂ""îÂÂîÂÂ!î îÂÂ(îÂÂ!&% îÂÂ!"& îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ" îÂÂ!"& îÂÂîÂÂ!%&îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂ% îÂÂ'!îÂÂ& îÂÂîÂÂ! îÂÂî îÂÂ#""$î *îÂÂ(îÂÂ!&îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ$îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"$ îÂÂîÂÂ! î îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂ"!% îÂÂî )#"%îÂÂî îÂÂ&" îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ' îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ& *îÂÂ"$ îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$îÂÂîÂÂ& îÂÂ%'!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ& îÂÂîÂÂ"$ î %&$"!î îÂÂîÂÂ$&îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ&î D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En W ARNING This equipment is not waterproof. T o prevent a fir e or shock hazard, do not place any container filled with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_B_En î î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î $!)îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ$î îÂÂ)îÂÂî îÂÂî î !îÂÂîÂÂ!î îÂÂ%$,îÂÂ' îÂÂ(*%%!- îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ'( î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$'î #î îÂÂ)$ îÂÂîÂÂ$*#)'- îÂÂ$' îÂÂ' îÂÂî $# îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ(*'î îÂÂ)îÂÂîÂÂ) îÂÂ)îÂÂî î %$,îÂÂ' îÂÂ(*%%!- î $!)îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ$î îÂÂ)îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ'îÂÂî îÂÂ,îÂÂîÂÂ' î îÂÂ)î ( îÂÂ*# ) î , !! îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ*(îÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂ)( îÂÂ)îÂÂî îÂÂ'îÂÂ&* ' îÂÂî î $!)îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î $' îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ,' ))îÂÂ# îÂÂ$# îÂÂ)îÂÂî îÂÂ'îÂÂîÂÂ' îÂÂ%îÂÂ#îÂÂ! îÂÂî îÂÂî î î î î î î î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ# î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î 3 En
îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ! îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ! îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ! î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ! îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ!îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ!îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî î !îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. CAUTION The îÂÂîÂÂST ANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not com pletely shut off all powe r f rom the AC outlet. Since the powe r co rd se r ves as the main disconnect device fo r the unit, you will need to un plug it f rom the AC outlet to shut down all powe r . The refo re, make su re the unit has been installed so that the p ower cor d can be easily unp lugged fr om the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fi re haza rd, the powe r co rd should also be un plugged f rom the AC outlet when left unused fo r a long pe riod of time (fo r exam ple, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ$î îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$ îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$ îÂÂîÂÂ$ îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî !îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$ îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ$ îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂî îÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî î W ARNING: î î î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î î D36-P4_A_En W ash hands after handling î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î 4 En
S001_En Selecting fine audio equi pment such as the unit youâÂÂve just pu rchased is only the sta rt of you r musical enjoyment. Now itâÂÂs time to conside r how you can maximize the fun and excitement you r equi pment offe rs. This manufactu re r and the Elect ronic Indust ries AssociationâÂÂs Consume r Elect ronics G rou p want you to get the most out of you r equi pment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come th rough loud and clea r without annoying bla ring o r disto rtion-and, most im po rtantly , without affecting you r sensitive hea ring. Sound can be deceiving. Ove r time you r hea ring âÂÂcomfo rt levelâ ada pts to highe r volumes of sound. So what sounds âÂÂno rmalâ can actually be loud and ha rmful to you r hea ring. Gua rd against this by setting you r equi pment at a safe level BEFORE you r hea ring ada pts. T o establish a safe level: ⢠Sta rt you r volume cont rol at a low setting. ⢠Slowly inc rease the sound until you can hea r it comfo rtably and clea rly , and without disto rtion. Once you have established a comfortable sound level: ⢠Set the dial and leave it the re. T aking a minute to do this now will hel p to prevent hea ring damage o r loss in the futu re. Afte r all, we want you listening fo r a lifetime. We W ant Y ou Listening For A Lifetime Since hea ring damage f rom loud noise is often undetectable until it is too late, this manufactu re r and the Elect ronic Indust ries AssociationâÂÂs Consume r Elect ronics G rou p recommend you avoid pr olonged exp osur e to excessive noise. This list of sound levels is included fo r you r protection. Decibel Level Example 30 Quiet lib ra r y , soft whis pe rs 40 Living room, ref rige rato r , bed room away f rom t raffic 50 Light t raffic, no rmal conve rsation, quiet office 60 Ai r conditione r at 20 feet, sewing machine 70 V acuum cleane r , hai r d r ye r , noisy restau rant 80 Ave rage city t raffic, ga rbage dis posals, ala rm clock at two feet. THE FOLL OWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS UNDER CONST ANT EXPOSURE 90 Subway , moto rcycle, t ruck t raffic, lawn mowe r 100 Ga rbage t ruck, chain saw , pneumatic d rill 120 Rock band conce rt in f ront of s peake rs, thunde rcla p 140 Gunshot blast, jet plane 180 Rocket launching pad Info rmation cou rtesy of the Deafness Resea rch F oundation. 5 En
6 En Contents 01 Before you start WhatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Putting the batteries in the remo te control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Types of discs/files that can be pla yed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Playable discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Playable files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 02 Connecting up Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Connecting using a com mercially available HDMI cable . . . . . . 14 Connecting using a com mercially availabl e component video cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Connecting using the included audio cable and video cable . . . 16 Connecting an AV rece iver or amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Connecting using a com mercially available HDMI cable . . . . . . 17 Connecting using audio cable s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Connecting using a com mercially available digital audio cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Connecting the po wer cord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 03 Getting Started Making settings using the Setup Navigator menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Operating the TV with the playerâÂÂs remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 TV Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Using the TOOLS menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Erasing the additional data from BD- ROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Switching the video o utput terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Switching the output video resolu tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 04 Playback Playing discs or file s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Forward and reverse scann ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Playing specific titles, ch apters or tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Skipping con tent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Step forward and step reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Switching the camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Switching the subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Switching the audio streams/channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Switching the secondary video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Displaying the disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Using the Play Mode functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Playing from a specific time (Tim e Search) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Playing a specific title, cha pter or track (Sear ch) . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Playing a specif ic section wi thin a title or tr ack repeatedly (A-B Repeat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Playing repeatedly (Repeat P lay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Playing in random order (Rando m Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 About Play Mode types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Playing from the Home M edia Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Playing music files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Playing in the desired order (HMG Playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 05 Adjusting audio and video Adjusting the video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 7 Adjusting the Audio DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 06 Advanced settings Changing the settin gs (Initial Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 9 Operating the Initial Setup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Changing to other language a t language setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Changing the speaker se tup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Adjusting the output level of the various speakers (Channel Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Registering or Changing the password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 4 Changing the Age Restriction for watching BD-ROMs . . . . . . . . 45 Changing the Parental Lock level fo r watc hing DVDs . . . . . . . . . 46 Changing the Countr y/Area code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Changing the terminals fo r outputting video and audio signals (Output Terminal Priority) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Restoring all the settings to the factory de fault settings . . . . . . . 49 About the audio outp ut settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 0 07 Additional information Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 1 When connected using an HDMI cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 5 Language Code Table an d Country/Area Code Ta ble . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Language Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Country/Area Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 6 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Cautions on use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 8 Turn the power off wh en not using the player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Cleaning the player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 8 Cleaning the picku p lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
01 7 En Chapter 1 Before you start WhatâÂÂs in the box Putting the batteries in the remote control 1 Open the rear cover. 2 Insert the batteries (AA/R6 x 2). Insert as indi cated by the ï« /ïª marks into the battery compartment. 3 Close the rear cover. Close securely (a click should be heard). Caution ⢠Do not mix new and ol d batteries together. ⢠Batteries may have differen t voltages, even if th ey look similar. Do not use different kinds of batteries together. ⢠To prevent leakage of batte ry fluid, remove the batteries if yo u do not plan to use the remote control for a lo ng period of time (1 month or more). If the flu id should leak, wipe it carefully off the inside of the case, then insert new batteries. ⢠When d isposing o f used batterie s, please c omply with governmental regulations or envi ronment al public ins tructionâÂÂs rules that apply in your country/area. ⢠WARNING Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause batteries to lea k, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries. D3-4-2-3-3_En STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER CLEAR ENTER VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN BD PLAYER PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE VIDEO ADJUST INPUT SELECT TV CONTROL CH VOL AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION ENTER Remote control x 1 Audio cable (white/red plugs) x 1 Video cable (yellow plugs) x 1 Power cable x 1 AA/R6 dry cell batteries x 2 Warranty card Operating instructions (this manual) Press lightly on this part and slide into the direction of the arrow. Insert the negative ( ïª ) side first.
01 8 En Types of discs/files that can be played Playable discs Discs with the logo marks below indicated on the disc label, package or jacket can be played. ï° Discs that cannot be played ⢠HD DVDs â¢D V D A u d i o d i s c s â¢D V D - R A M d i s c s ⢠Non-finalized DVD-R/DVD-RW /DVD R/DVD RW discs in the DVD-Video format and AVCHD format ⢠Non-finalized Dua l Layer DVD-R discs in the DVD VR format â¢S A C D s â¢V i d e o C D s This player conf orms to NTSC s tandards. Discs for whi ch âÂÂNTSCâ is indicated on the disc label, pac kage or jacket can be played. âÂÂBlu-ray Discâ and are trademarks. is a trademark of DVD Form at/Logo Licensing Corpo ration. Disc type Logo Application format BDMV 1 1. Including the AV CHD format. BDAV DVD-Video DVD VR CD-DA DTS-CD DATA-DISC 2 2. Discs on which music files are recorded BD BD-ROM ï± ï± ï³ï³ï³ï³ BD-R ï± ï± ï³ï³ï³ï³ BD-RE ï± ï± ï³ï³ï³ï³ DVD DVD-ROM ï±ï³ï±ï³ ï³ï± DVD-R ï±ï³ï± ï±ï³ï± DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) ï±ï³ï± ï±ï³ï± DVD-RW ï±ï³ï± ï±ï³ï± DVD R ï±ï³ï±ï³ ï³ï± DVD RW ï±ï³ï±ï³ ï³ï± CD CD-DA (Music CD) ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï±ï³ CD-R ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï± CD-RW ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï± CD-ROM ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï±
01 9 En Note ⢠Some discs can not be played, even if one of the abo ve logo marks is indica ted. ⢠To play 8 cm discs, set the disc in the 8 cm disc depression in the center of th e disc tray. No adapter is necessa ry. 8 cm BD- ROM discs cannot be played. ï° About audio formats The following audio formats are supported on this player: â¢D o l b y T r u e H D â¢D o l b y D i g i t a l P l u s â¢D o l b y D i g i t a l ⢠DTS-HD Ma ster Audio â¢D T S - H D H i g h R e s o l u t i o n A u d i o ⢠DTS Digital Surround â¢M P E G ⢠MPEG-2 AAC â¢L i n e a r P C M To enjoy the surround so und of Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio and DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, it is recommended to connect the player to an AV r eceiver or amplifier compatible with these audio formats using an HD MI cable. After loading a BD containing sound in one o f these audio formats, select the audio format on the me nu screen. See About the audio output setti ngs on page 50 for the o utput conditions of the diffe rent formats. Manufactured under licens e from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademar ks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under lic ense under U.S. Patent #: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5, 974,380; 5,978, 762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwi de patents issued & pending. DTS is a regi stered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Advanced Digital Out are trademarks of DTS, Inc. é 1996-2007 D TS, Inc. All Right s Reserved. ï° Playing BDs ⢠BDs (BDMV) compa tible with th e formats belo w can be played. â Blu-ray Disc Read-Only (ROM) Format Version 2 â Blu-ray Disc Recorda ble (R) Format Version 2 â Blu-ray Disc Re writable (RE) For mat Version 3 This player supports BD-ROM Profile 1 Version 1. 1. BONUSVIEW Functi ons such as playb ack of second ary video (Picture-in-Pict ure) and seco ndary audio can be used. For details on secondary video an d secondary audio playback, ref er to the discâÂÂs instructions. âÂÂBONUSVIEWâ is trademark of Blu-ray Disc Associ ation. When a BD-ROM is played, addition al data may be stored in the playerâÂÂs memory area (local stor age). If the m essage indicating low memory (local storage) appears, erase the BDM V data (page 24). ⢠BDs (BDAV) compatible with the formats below can be played. â Blu-ray Disc Recorda ble (R) Format Version 1 â Blu-ray Disc Re writable (RE) For mat Version 2 ⢠Dual Layer BD s can be played. ⢠Music files rec orded on BDs cannot be played. ⢠8 cm BD-ROM discs cannot be played. ï° Playing DVDs ⢠DVD-Video ca n be played. ⢠DVD-R/-RW/ R/ RW discs record ed in th e DVD-Video format can be played (finalize them before playing them on this player). ⢠DVD-R/-RW discs rec orded in th e VR format (Video Recording format) can be played. ⢠This label indicates playback compatibility with DVD-RW di scs recorded in VR mode (Video Recording format). However, for discs recorded with a record-o nly-once encrypted program, playback can only be achieved using a CPRM compatibl e device. ⢠DVDs recorded in the AVCHD format ca n be played (finalize them before playing them on this player). âÂÂAVCHDâ and the âÂÂAVCHDâ logo are tradem arks of Matsushita Electric Industrial C o., Ltd. and Sony Corporati on. ⢠Music files rec orded on DV D-R/-RW/ R/ RW discs can be played. See Playable file s on page 10. ⢠Dual Layer DV Ds can be played. However, Non-fina lized Dual Layer DVD-R discs recorded in th e VR format cannot be played. (Finalize them before playing them on this player. ) ⢠HD DVD, DVD Audio and DVD-RAM discs cannot be played.
01 10 En ï° About region numbers Blu-ray Disc Player and BD-ROM or DVD-Video discs are assigned region numbers according to the region in which they are sold. This playerâÂÂs region numbers are: â¢B D - R O M : A â¢D V D - V i d e o : 1 Discs not in cluding these n umb ers cannot be played. Discs playable on this player are as shown below. ⢠BDs: A (including A) and ALL ⢠DVDs: 1 (inc luding 1) and ALL ï° Playing CDs ⢠CD-DA/DTS-C Ds (music CDs) can be played. ⢠Music files recorded on CDs ca n be played. See Playable files on page 10. ⢠SACD, Video CD and Super VCD discs cannot be played. ⢠Rega rding copy pro tected CDs: Thi s product is designed to conform to the specifications of the Audio CD format. This player does not su pport the playback or function of discs th at do not conform to these specifications. ï° DualDisc playback A DualDisc is a new two-sided disc , one side of which contains DVD content â video, audio, etc. â while the other side contains non- DVD content such as di gital audio material. The DVD side of a DualDisc will be played on this player (excluding any DVD-Audio conten t). The non-DVD , audio side of th e disc is not compatible wi th this player. It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc, the o pposite side to that being played will be scratched. Scratched discs may not be playable. For more detailed inf ormation on the DualDisc specif ication, please refer to the di sc manufacturer o r disc retailer. ï° Playing discs created on computers ⢠It may n ot be possible to play DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW discs recorded using a persona l record er or comp uter. (This can be due to vario us reasons, including disc properties, scratches, dirt on the disc, dirt on the playerâÂÂs lens, condensation and so on.) ⢠It may not be possible to play disc s recorded using a computer due to the application settings or environment. Record discs in the proper format. Fo r details, contact the dealer. Playable files Music files recorded on DV Ds and CDs can be played. Caution ⢠In DVD, on ly the one recorded by the ISO9660 file system can be played. ⢠Some files may not be playable. ⢠For some files, it ma y not be possible to use certain functions during playback. ⢠It may not be possible to play so me files, even if they hav e the extension of a fi le playable on this p layer. ⢠Files protected by DRM (Digital Rights Management) cannot be played. ï° Supported music file formats ⢠Windows Media⢠Audio 9 (WMA9) Bit rate: Up to 192 kbps Sampling frequencies: 22.05 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz ⢠MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3) Bit rate: Up to 320 kbps Sampling frequencies: 8 kHz, 1 1.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz ï° Playable file extensions ⢠Music files .wma and .mp3 ⢠Windows Media is either a reg istered trademark or t rademark of Microsoft Corporation in the Unit ed States and/or other countries. ⢠This product includes t echnology owned by Micr osoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Lice nsing, Inc.
01 11 En Part Names and Functions Remote Control 1 ïµ STANDBY/ON Press to turn the power on and off. 2 TV CONTROL Your TV can be controlle d using the playerâÂÂs remote control (page 22). ïµ â Press to turn the TVâÂÂs p ower on and off. INPUT SELECT â Press to switch the TVâÂÂs input. CH /â â Press to select the TV channel. VOL /â â Press to adjust the volume. 3 AUDIO Press to switch the audio streams/channels (page 28). 4 SUBTI TLE Press to switch the subtitles (page 28). 5 Number buttons â Use these to select and play the title/ chapter/tra ck you want to watc h or listen to and to select items from menus. CLEAR â Press to clear the numeric number, etc. ENTER â Press to execute the selected item or enter a setting that has been changed, e tc. 6 SECO NDARY AUDIO â When playing a BD-ROM on which secondary audio is recor ded, pr ess to switch to the secondary audio (page 28). SECONDARY VIDEO â When pl aying a BD-ROM on which secondary video (Pic ture-in-Pictur e) is recorded, press to switch to the secondary video (page 29). 7 VIDEO SELECT Press to switch the terminal fr om which the video signals are output. Use to switch between di gital output (HDMI output) and analog output (Component Video o utput, S-Video output or V ideo output) (the signals are only output from the selected vide o output terminal) (page 24). 8 HOME MEDIA GALLERY Press to display/hide the Home Media Gallery screen (page 34). 9T O P M E N U Press to display the top menu o f the BD-ROM or DVD-Video. 10 ï© /ïª /ï« /ï¬ â Use to select items, change settings and move the cursor. ENTER â Press to execute the selected item or enter a setting that has been changed, e tc. 11 HOME MENU Press to display/hide the Home Menu. 12 ï¤ PLAY â Press to star t playba ck. ïÂÂ¥ PAUSE â Press to pause playba ck. Press aga in to resta rt playback. ï§ STOP â Press to stop playback. ï¯ PREV/ï° NEXT â Press to skip to the beginning of the previous/next title/chapter/track/file (page 27). ï /ï± / â Press during playback to start reverse scanning. While playback is paused, press for step reverse playback. Press and hold while playback is paused for reverse slo w motion playback (pages 26 and 27). / ï²/ ï® â Press during playback to start fo rward scanning. While playback i s paused, press for step f orward playback. Press and hold while playback is paused for forward slo w motion playback (pages 26 and 27). 13 RED/GREEN/BLUE /YELLOW Us e these to navigate BD-ROM m enus. 14 VIDEO ADJUST Press to display/hide the Video Adjust menu (page 37). 15 ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE Press to open and close the disc tray. 16 FL DIMMER Press to switch the brightness of the front panel dis play. The FL OFF indicator li ghts when Off is selected . 17 ANGLE Press to switch the BD-ROM or DV D-Video camera angle (page 28). 18 OUTPUT RES OLUTION Use these to switch the output vid eo resolution from the HDMI OUT or COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals (page 25). STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER CLEAR ENTER VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN BD PLAYER PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE VIDEO ADJUST INPUT SELECT TV CONTROL CH VOL AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION ENTER 10 7 8 4 12 13 1 2 3 5 6 9 11 14 18 20 17 19 21 15 16 22 23
01 12 En 19 P LAY MODE Press to display/hide the Play Mode screen (page 29). 20 POP UP MENU/MENU Press to display the BD-ROM or DVD-Video menus. 21 DISPLAY Press to display disc informatio n (page 29). 22 TOOLS Press to display/hide the TOOLS menu (page 23). 23 RETURN Press to return to the previous screen. Front Panel 1 ïµ STANDBY/ON Press to turn the power on and off. 2 Remote control sensor Point the remote control to this, then operate it within approximately 23 feet. The player may have trouble ca pturing remote control signals if there is a fluorescent light nearby. If this happen s, move the player away from the fluorescent light. 3 Front pa nel displa y 4 ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE Press to open and close the disc tray. 5 RESOLUTION Press to switch the output video re solution fr om the HDMI output or component video output term inals (page 25). 6 ï¯/ ï Press to skip to the beginnin g of the previous title/chapter/track/file. Press and hold to start reverse scanning (pages 26 and 27). 7 ï®/ ï° Press to skip to the beginning of the next title/chapter/track/file. Press and hold to start forward scannin g (pages 26 and 27). 8 ïÂÂ¥ Press during playback to pause. Press again to restart playback. 9 ï§ Press to stop playback. 10 ï¤ Press to start playback. 11 HDMI indic ator This lights when video signals fr om the HDMI terminal is output (page 14). 12 Disc tra y 13 F L OFF indicator This lights when Off is selected wit h FL DIMMER . 14 HD indicator This lights w hen an HDMI cable is connected and the video output resolution is set to 1080/60i, 1080/60p, 1080/24p or 720/60p. It also lights when a com ponent video ca ble is connected and the ou tput video resolution is set to 1080/60i or 720/60p. ï± 1 1 0 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 4 11 1 2 1 3 1 4
01 13 En Front Panel Display 1 ï¤ Lights during playback. 2 ïÂÂ¥ Lights when playback is paused. 3P Q L S Lights when the PQLS function is activate d (page 15). 4 Character display Displays the title/chapter /track numbe r, elapsed ti me, etc. 5 24HZ/50 HZ/60HZ The frequency of the video fram e or field bei ng output li ghts. 6C O N T R O L Lights when the HDMI Control fun ction is activated (page 15). Rear Panel 1 DIGITAL OUT (COAX IAL/OPTICAL) Connect wi th the digital audio inpu t terminal on an AV receiver or amplifier, etc. 2 AUDIO OUT (2 ch) t erminals Connect wi th the audio i nput termina ls on a TV, A V receiver or amplifier, etc. 3 AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) ter minals Connect with the multi-channel (7.1- o r 5.1-channel) audio input terminals on an AV receiver or ampl ifier, etc. 4 VIDEO OUT terminals VIDEO â Connect with the video input term inal on a TV, AV receiver or amplifier, etc. S-VIDEO â Connect with the S-Video input terminal on a TV, AV receiver or amplifier, etc. COMPONENT VIDEO â Connect with the component video input terminal s on a TV, AV receive r or amplifier, etc. 5A C I N Connect the power cord here. 6 HDMI OUT terminal Connect wi th an HDMI-co mpatible TV , AV receiver or amplifier, etc. 7 CONTROL IN terminal Use to control th is player from the remote sensor of anothe r Pioneer component with a CONTROL OUT terminal and bearing the ï± mark. Connect the CONTROL OUT of th e other component to the CONTROL IN of this player using a mini-plug cord. Caution ⢠Be sur e to connect ca bles for outp utting the au dio and video signals (pages 14 and 17). ⢠When connected via System Control, point the remote con trol toward the connected component (such as an AV receive r or amplifier). The remote will not work correctly when p ointed at this player. ⢠You can not use System Control with compon ents that do not have a System Control te rminal or with compo nents manufactured by com panies other than Pioneer. PQLS 24HZ 50HZ 60HZ CONTROL 4 1 2 5 6 3 R R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN L L Y P B P R FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AC IN SURROUND CENTER VIDEO S-VIDEO SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
02 14 En Chapter 2 Connecting up Connecting a TV Be sure to turn off the power and un plug the power cord from the power outlet whenever making or changing connections. Note ⢠Ma ke the settings in the Setup N avigator menu according to the type of cable connected (page 20). Connecting using a commercially available HDMI cable The audio and video signals can be transferre d to HD MI-compatibl e devices as digital signals with no lo ss of sound or video quality. After connecting, make the settings at the Setup Navigator menu according to the connected HDMI-compatible device (page 20). Also ref er to the oper ating inst ructions of the device being connected. Note ⢠The HDMI in dicator on the playerâÂÂs front panel lights when video signals are being output from the HDMI OUT terminal. (Depending on the connected device, in some cases it may only light when the player is selected as the deviceâÂÂs input.) ⢠1080p video signals ma y not be output, depending on the HDMI cable bein g used. Caution ⢠Hold the plug when connecting and disconnec ting the cable. ⢠Placi ng a load on the plu g could resu lt in fault y contact and no video signals being output. ï° About HDMI This player inc orporates Hig h-Definition M ultimedia I nterface (HDMIâ¢) technology. The conventional players can transmit a video signal with 8 bit color depth in the YCbCr 4:4:4 or RGB formats, the players supporting Deep Color can transmit a vide o si gnal with a color bit depth of greater than 8 bits per color component. Subtle color gradations can be reproduced when connec ted to a TV that supports Deep Color. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definitio n Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registere d trademarks of HDMI Licensi ng LLC. R R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN L L Y P B P R FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AC IN SURROUND CENTER VIDEO S-VIDEO SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK P B P R VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMI OUT R R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN L L Y P B P R FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AC IN SURROUND CENTER VIDEO S-VIDEO SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK P B P R VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMI OUT PlayerâÂÂs rear panel TV Match the direction of the plug to the terminal and insert straight. To HDMI input te rminal HDMI cable (commercially available) It is also possible to connect to an AV receiver or amplifier using an HDMI cable (page 17). Direction of signal flow
02 15 En ï° Audio signals that can be transferred with the playerâÂÂs HDMI output terminal â¢D o l b y T r u e H D â¢D o l b y D i g i t a l P l u s â¢D o l b y D i g i t a l ⢠DTS-HD Ma ster Audio â¢D T S - H D H i g h R e s o l u t i o n A u d i o ⢠DTS Digital Surround ⢠MPEG-2 AAC â¢L i n e a r P C M Linear PCM audio si gnals meeting the following c onditions can be output: â Sampling frequency: 32 kHz to 192 kHz â Number of channels: Up to 8 (up to 6 for a 192 kHz sampling frequency) For details, see About the audio output settings on pa ge 50. ï° About the HDMI high speed transmission This player outputs 1080/60p and D eep Color video signa ls. If your TV supports 1080/60p or Deep Color signals, use a High Speed HDMI⢠cable in order to take advantage of the maximum performance the player and TV ca n offer. Also set HDMI High- Speed Transmission to On (page 41). High Speed HDMI⢠cables are test ed to carry signals up to 1080p. 1080/60i, 1080/60p, 1080/24p and 720/60p vide o signals that are capable of Deep Color can also be ca rried. Note â¢S e t HDMI High-Speed Transmission to Off when using an HDMI cable other than a High Speed HDMI⢠cable (a Standar d HDMI⢠cable). ⢠The following rest rictions appl y when HDMI High-Speed Transmission is set to Off : â Deep Color signals are not outpu t. â If output video resol ution is set to Auto , the signals are output with a resolution of 108 0/60i, even if the TVâÂÂs preferred resolution is 1080/60p. â When the output video resolution i s set to 480i or 480p , Dolby TrueHD and DTS -HD Master Audio signal s are not output as such. They are either o utput as Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround signals or converted into linear PCM. Also, 96 kHz and 192 kHz multi-channel lin ear PCM audio signals can not be output. They are output as 2 -channel signals (page 50). ⢠When an HDMI cabl e with a built- in equalizer is co nnected, it may not operate properly. ï° About HDCP HDCP (High-bandwidth Digit al Content Protection) is a copyright protection system by which digi tal video signal s are encrypted. ï° When connected to a DVI device ⢠It is not possible to connect DVI devices (computer displays, for example) that are not compatible with HDCP . ⢠No au dio signals are output. Conn ect using an audio cable (included), etc. ⢠This player is designed for co nnection with HDMI-compati ble devices. When conne cted to a DVI device, it may not o perate properly depending on the DVI device. ï° About HDMI Control function ⢠When the player is con nected to a Pioneer Flat Panel TV or AV system (AV receiver or amplifier, etc.), supporting the HDM I Control function, it can be opera ted from the Flat Panel TV o r AV system (AV receiver or amplifier, etc.). ⢠The Flat Panel TVâÂÂs in put is switched automatica lly when playback is started on the player or the Home Menu or the Home Media Gallery is displayed. When the input is switched, the playback picture, the Home Menu or the Home M edia Gallery appears on the Flat Panel TV (Aut o-sel ect function). If the Flat Panel TVâÂÂs powe r is being t urned off at t his time, it ma y turn on automatical ly (Simultaneo us power functi on). When th e language information from a c onnected Flat Panel TV is received, you can have the playerâÂÂs on-screen display language change auto matically to that of th e Flat Panel T V (Unified language func tion). This function is ava ilable only wh en playback is stopped and the me nu screen is not displayed. ⢠Also refer to the op erating instructions of the Flat Panel TV or AV system (AV receiver or amplifier, etc.). ï° To use the HDMI Control function ⢠The HDMI Control fu nction only works when outp utting video signals from the HDMI terminal. ⢠The HDMI Control functio n operates when HDMI Control is set to On for all devices co nnected with HDMI cables. Once connections and the settings of all the devices a re finished, be sure to check that the playerâÂÂs pi cture is output to the Flat Panel TV. (Also check after changing the conn ected devices and reconnecting HDMI cables.) The HDMI Control function may no t operate properly if the playerâÂÂs pi cture is not p roperly ou tput to the Flat Panel TV. ⢠Use High Speed HDMI⢠cables when using the HDMI Control function. The HDM I Control function may not operate properly if other HDMI cables are used. ⢠The function name of KURO LINK used on the web and in catalogues is referred to as HDMI Control i n the operating instructio ns and on the p roduct. ï° About PQLS function The PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a transfer control technology using the H DMI Contro l function . The playerâÂÂs output signals are controlled from the AV receiver or amplifier to achieve high qualit y sound playba ck using t he quartz osc illator of AV receiver or ampl ifier. This elim inates the inf luence of the jit ter generated upon transfer which can adversely affect the sound quality. ⢠The PQLS function is only activated when the player is connected to a Pioneer AV receiver or amplifier compatible with the PQLS function vi a HDMI connecti on. ⢠The PQLS function is activat ed wh en th e player is set as follows (page 41): HDMI Control : On PQLS : Auto ⢠Also refer to the opera ting instructions of AV receiver or amplifier.
02 16 En Connecting using a commercially available component video cable Caution ⢠When co nnected to the TV using a component video cable (commercially available), video signals are not output with resolutions of 1080/60p or 1080/24p. ⢠Depending on the output video resolution setting, the picture may not be output (page 25). ⢠When connected to the TV using compo nent video cables, also connect using either an optical digital audio cable (commercially a vailable), a c oaxial digital audio cable (commercially a vailable), or a u dio cables (use the included cable for 2-channel connectio ns, a combination of the in cluded cable and commercially availa ble cables for 7.1-channel connections). It is not possible to listen to the sound fro m devices connected with HDMI ca bles (commercially available). Connecting using the included audio cable and video cable R R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN L L Y P B P R FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AC IN SURROUND CENTER VIDEO S-VIDEO SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK R AUDIO OUT (7. 1 c h) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DI GITAL OUT L L FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL S URROUND CENTER VIDEO S -VIDEO S UB WOOFER S URROUND BACK R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) VIDEO OUT L Y P B P R COMPONENT VIDEO TV PlayerâÂÂs rear panel To audio input terminals To component video input terminals Component cable or three video cables (commercially available) Audio cable (included) Red White It is also possible to connect to an AV receiver or am plifier. Connect the audio signals using audio cables (7.1 channels), an optical di gital audio cable or a coaxial digital audio cable (page 18). Direction of signal flow R R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN L L Y P B P R FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AC IN SURROUND CENTER VIDEO S-VIDEO SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK R AUDIO OUT (7. 1 c h) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DI GITAL OUT L Y P B P R FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO S URROUND CENTER S UB WOOFER S URROUND BACK R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) VIDEO OUT L VIDEO S -VIDEO TV PlayerâÂÂs rear panel To audio input terminals To S-Video inpu t termin al Video cable (included) Audio cable (included) An S-Video cable (commercially available) can also be used for connection. To video input terminal Red White Yellow It is also possible to connect to an AV receiver or amplifier. Connect the audio signals using audio cables (7.1 channels ), an optical digital audio cable or a coaxial digital audio cable (page 18). Direction of signal flow
02 17 En Caution ⢠Video signal s are only output wi th a resolution of 480/60i wh en connected using a video cable (i ncluded) or an S-Video cable (commercially a vailable). ⢠When connected to a TV using a video ca ble or an S-Video cab le, also connect usin g either audio cables (use the included ca ble for 2-channel connections, a combination of the included cable and commercially avai lable cables for 7.1-channel con nections), an optical digital audio cable (commercially available), or a coaxial dig ital audio cabl e (commercially ava ilable). It is not possible to listen to the sound from devices connec ted with HDMI cables (com mercially avai lable). ⢠Connect the playerâÂÂs video output directly to you r TV. This player supports an alog copy protectio n technology. Therefore the picture may no t be displayed properly if connected to a TV via a DVD recorder/video deck or when playing the playerâÂÂs output material that is r ecorded by a DVD recorder/ video deck. Furthermore, the picture ma y not be displayed properly due to the copy protection when the player is connected to a TV with a built-in video deck. For details, contact the manufacturer of your TV. Connecting an AV receiver or amplifier Connect to an AV receiver or amplifier in order to enjoy the surround sound of Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digi ta l Plus, Dolby Di gital, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Re solution Audio or DTS Digital Surround. For instru ctions on connec ting the TV and speakers to the AV receiver or amplifier, r efer to the operating instructions of AV receiver or amplifier. Note ⢠Ma ke the settings in the Setup N avigator menu according to the type of cable connected (page 20). ⢠To input video si gnals, connect using one of the following (not includin g when connected using an HDMI cable): a component video cable (commercially available), an S-Video cable (commercially a vailable) or a video cable (included). Connecting using a commercially available HDMI cable Caution ⢠When c onnected to an AV receiver or amp lifier using an H DMI cable (commercially available), use another HDM I cable (commercially avai lable) to connect t he AV receiver or amp lifier with the TV. If a compon ent video cable (commercially available ), an S-Video cab le (co mmercially availa ble) or a video cable (included) is connected to watch th e picture, it is not possible to listen to the sound of devices connected with HDMI cables. ⢠When DTS-HD Master Audio and DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals are output as linea r PCM signals, the DTS Digital Surround signals are converted to linear PCM for output (page 50). R R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN L L Y P B P R FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AC IN SURROUND CENTER VIDEO S-VIDEO SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK P B P R VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMI OUT PlayerâÂÂs rear panel To HDMI input terminal From HDMI output terminal AV receiver or amplifier HDMI cab le (commercially available) To HDMI input terminal TV HDMI cabl e (commercially available) Match the direction of the plug to the terminal and insert straight. Direction of signal flow
02 18 En Connecting using audio cables Caution ⢠For DTS -HD Master Audio and DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals, the DTS Digital Surround signals are converted to linear PCM for output (page 50). When conn ecting to a 7.1-c hannel comp atible AV rece iver or amplifie r â Connect using the included audio ca ble and 3 commercially available audio cables (diagram below). When conn ecting to a 5.1-c hannel comp atible AV rece iver or amplifie r â Connect using the included audio ca ble and 2 commercially ava ilable audio cables (do not connect to the surround back left and right terminals). ⢠After connectin g, set Audio Output Mode to Multi- channel (page 40). Connecting using a commercially available digital audio cable Connect either a n optical di gital audio cable or a c oaxial digit al audio cable. Caution ⢠Dolby Tr ueHD and Dolby Di gital Plus sign als are output as the Dolby Digital signals or signal s converted from Dolby Digital to linear PCM (p age 50). ⢠DTS-HD Master Audio and DTS- HD High Resolution Audio signals are output as the DTS Digital Surround signal s or signals convert ed from DTS Digit al Surround to linear PCM (page 50). R R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN L L Y P B P R FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AC IN SURROUND CENTER VIDEO S-VIDEO SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK R AUDIO OUT (2 c h) HDMI OUT DI GITAL OUT L L COAXIAL OPTICAL R AUDIO OUT (7. 1 ch) L FRONT S URROUND CENTER S UB WOOFER S URROUND BACK VIDEO OUT VIDEO S -VIDEO VIDEO OUT Y P B P R COMPONENT VIDEO PlayerâÂÂs rear panel To multi-channel audio input terminals AV receiver or amplifier Audio cable (included) Audio cable (commercially available) Audio cable (commercially available) Audio cable (commercially available) Red White Compon ent cable or three video cable s (commercially available) To component video input terminals Direction of signal flow R R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN L L Y P B P R FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AC IN SURROUND CENTER VIDEO S-VIDEO SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK R R AUDIO OUT (2 c h) AUDIO OUT (7.1 c h) HDMI OUT L L L FRONT S URROUND CENTER S UB WOOFER S URROUND BACK DI GITAL OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL VIDEO OUT VIDEO S -VIDEO VIDEO OUT Y P B P R COMPONENT VIDEO AV receiver or amplifier Coaxial digital cable (commercially available) Optical digita l cable (commercially available) To coaxial digital audio input terminal To optical digital audio input terminal PlayerâÂÂs rear panel To component video input terminals Component cable or three video cables (commercia lly available) Direction of signal flow
02 19 En Connecting the power cord Connect the power cord after a ll the connections between devices have been completed. R R AUDIO OUT (2 ch) AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN L L Y P B P R FRONT COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AC IN SURROUND CENTER VIDEO S-VIDEO SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK AC IN UT VIDEO S - VIDEO PlayerâÂÂs rear panel Power cable (included) To wall o utlet
03 20 En Chapter 3 Getting Started Making settings using the Setup Navigator menu Be sure to perform th ese settings when using the player for the first time. Caution ⢠Before turning on the power, check that the connections between the player and o ther devices are correct. 1 Turn on the power. Press ïµ STANDBY/ON . 2 Turn on the TVâÂÂs power and switch the input. See the TVâÂÂs operating instructions for instructio ns on operating the TV. Check that the Setup Navigator menu is displayed. If TV Contr ol is s et, the TV can be ope rated with t he pla yerâÂÂs remo te control (page 22). ï° If the Setup Navigator menu is not displayed ï¦ Press HOME MENU to display the Home Menu, select Initial Setup ï¤ Setup Navigato r ï¤ Start, then press ENTER. 3 Select the OSD language. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . When you have the player co nnected to a Pioneer Flat Panel TV tha t is compatible with HDMI Control, language sett ings are imported from the Pioneer Flat Panel TVâ s language settings before Setup Navigator begins. 4 Select and set the vi deo and audio output terminals. Select the actually connected vi deo and audio output terminals. Use ï© /ïª /ï« /ï¬ to select, then ENTER . When HDMI is select ed for Video or Audio , proceed to step 5. When Component Video is selected for Video , proceed to step 6. When S-Video/Video is selected for Video , proceed to step 7. Caution â¢W h e n HDMI is selected for Video , no video signals are output from the COMPONENT VIDEO , S-VIDEO or VIDEO output terminals. â¢W h e n Component Video or S-Video/Video is selected for Video , no video signals are o utput from the HDMI OUT terminal. ⢠The video and a udio signals output from the set output termina ls are ou tput sync hronously ( lip sync hronizati on). â¢W h e n S-V ideo/Video or Component Vide o is selected at Video , no sound is output if HDMI is selected at Audio (the warning message shown below is displayed). Follow the procedure below to redo the connections, then select the proper connection at the setup screen. â When connecting using componen t video cables, an S-Video cable or a video cable to watch the picture, connec t to an AV receiver or amplifier, or a TV using either analog audio cables (7.1 channels or 2 c hannels), an optic al digital aud io cable or a coaxial digital audi o cable (page 18). STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE TV CONTROL INPUT SELECT CH VOL TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER S etup Navigator BD PLAYER Please select the on-screen display language. Audio, subtitle and BDMV/DVD- Video menu language will also be set. Setting it em Output termina l name Video HDMI HDMI Output Component Vide o Vid eo Output Component Vide o S-Video/Vi deo S-Video Video Audio HDMI HDMI Output Digital Audio Digital Audio Output Coaxial Optical Analog Audio Audio Output (2ch) Audio Output (7.1ch) TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER S etup Navigator BD PLAYER Select the output terminals to be used for the video and audio signals of this player . Use [ ][ ] to select video or audio, then press [ ][ ] to select the output terminal. HDMI HDMI Video Audio
03 21 En â When connecting the p layer to an AV receive r or amplifier using an HDMI cable in orde r to listen to the Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digi tal Plus, DT S-HD Ma ster Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals conver ted into li near PCM, connect the TV to the AV receiver or amplifier u sing an HDMI cable (pages 14 and 17). ⢠Linear PC M audio signals (2 channels) ar e output from all terminals other than the ones selected at Audio , regardless of the audio format or the playerâÂÂs settings. 5 Select and set the HDMI High -Speed Transmission setting. Use ï« /ï¬ to select, th en press ENTER . When HDMI High-Speed Transmission is set to On , use a High Speed HDMI⢠cable. The p icture and sound may not be o utput properly if any other HDMI cable (s tandard HD MI⢠cable) is used. Proceed to step 8. 6 Select the output video re solution from the COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . For details on the resolution setti ngs, see Switching the output video resolution on page 25. 7 Select the aspect rati o of your TV. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 8 Check the settings. Select Proceed , then press ENTER . 9 Output test tones. Use ï« /ï¬ to select Yes , then press ENTER . Caution ⢠The screen in step 10 and test tones are outp ut simultaneo usly according to the settings in steps 4 to 7. Lower the volume o f the devices connected with the player. Go Back Audio is not out put f rom HDMI te rminal when S- Video/Video o r Com p onent Video is selected. Please go back and make the pr op er selection again. TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Setup Navigator BD PLAYER Select the HDMI Hi-s peed t ransmission setting. No rmally select [On] (Recommended). Select [Off] if the video o r audio of HDMI-connected was not out put in the test out put. On Off Setup Navigator BD PLAYER Select the out put video resolution at the Com ponent video te rminal. If you select [Sou rce Di rect], the out put r esolution is deter mined accor ding to the video fo rmat of the playing sou rce. Setup Navigator BD PLAYER Select the sc reen as pect ratio to match you r TV . Setup Navigator BD PLAYER Select [P r oceed] if you want to star t testing you r audio and video settings. Procee d Setup Navigator BD PLAYER The test tone will be out put. Reduce the volume to an a ppro priate level. The video and/o r audio may not be out put unde r ce rtain setu p. The setu p menu comes back in 30 seconds. Ye s No
03 22 En 10 F inish the Setup Navigator menu. Use ï« /ï¬ to select Finish , then press ENTER . To redo the settings from the start, select Go Back . Depending on the ou tput terminal setting of step 4 or the HDMI cable being used, it may happen that no picture and/or so und is output. If this happens, the setup returns to step 4 if there is no operation for over 3 0 seconds. Once the setup returns to step 4, redo the settings according to the connected device s and the HDMI cable being used. ï° About the screen saver The screen saver is automatically activated if there is no o peration for over 1 minute after pla yback is stopped or paused. The screen saver turns off when an operation is perfor med on the player or remote cont rol. The screen saver is automatically activated if there is no o peration for over 1 minute after the Home Menu or Home Media Gallery is displayed while playing a BD or DVD. With CDs and music files, the screen saver is automatically activated if no button is ope rated for over 1 minute, even while the CD or music file is playing. Operating the TV with the playerâÂÂs remote control When the man ufacturer code for your brand of TV is set on the playerâÂÂs remote control, the TV can be operated using the player âÂÂs remote cont rol. 1 Input the 2-digit manu facturer code. Press the number buttons (0 to 9) to input the code while pressing TV CONTROL ïµ . Note ⢠The factory setting is PIONEER 00 . ⢠If you make a mistake when inpu tting the code, start over from the beginning. ⢠When ther e are multiple code s fo r a manuf acturer, try in putting them in the indicated order until the TV can be operated. 2 Check that the TV can be operated. Caution ⢠For some m odels it may not be possible to operate the TV with the playerâÂÂs remote control, even for TVs of brands listed on the manufacturer code list. ⢠The setting may be restored to the default after the batteri es are replaced. If this happ ens, reset it. TV Preset code list Manufacturer Code(s) Setup Navigator BD PLAYER Setu p is com plete! The setu p menu comes back in 30 seconds. Finish Go Back TV CONTROL STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER ENTER INPUT SELECT CH VOL AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR PIONEER 00 , 31, 32, 07, 36, 42 , 51 ACURA 44 ADMIRAL 31 AIWA 60 AKAI 32, 35, 42 AKURA 41 ALBA 07, 39, 41, 44 AMSTRAD 42, 44, 47 ANITECH 44 ASA 45 ASUKA 41 AUDIOGONIC 07, 36 BASIC LINE 41, 44 BAUR 31, 07, 42 BEKO 38 BEON 07 BLAUP UNKT 31 BLUE SKY 41 BLUE STAR 18 BPL 18 BRANDT 36 BTC 41 BUSH 07, 41, 42, 44, 47, 56 CASCADE 44 CATHAY 07 CENTURION 07 CGB 42 CIMLINE 44 CLARIVOX 07 CLATRONIC 38 CONDOR 38 CONTEC 44 CROSLEY 32 CROWN 38, 44 CRYSTAL 42 CYBERTRON 41 DAEWOO 07, 44, 56 DAINICHI 41 DANSAI 07 DAYTON 44 DECCA 07, 48 DIXI 07, 44 DUMONT 53 ELIN 07 ELITE 41 ELTA 44 EMERSON 42 ERRES 07 FERGUSON 07, 36, 51 FINLANDIA 35 , 43, 54 FINLUX 32, 07, 45, 48, 53, 54 FIRSTLINE 40, 44 FISHER 32 , 35, 38, 45 FORMENTI 32, 07, 42 FRONTECH 31, 42, 46 FRONTECH / PROTECH 32 FUJITSU 48 FUNAI 40, 46, 58 GBC 32, 42 GE 00, 01, 08, 07, 10, 11, 17, 02, 28, 18 GEC 07, 34, 48 GELOSO 32, 44 GENERAL 29 GENEXXA 31, 41 GOLDSTAR 10, 23, 21, 02, 07, 50 GOODMANS 07, 39, 47 , 48, 56 GORENJE 38 GPM 41 GRAETZ 31, 42 GRANADA 07, 35, 42, 43, 48 GRADIENTE 30, 57 GRANDIN 18 GRUNDIG 31, 53 HANSEATIC 07, 42 HCM 18, 44 HINARI 07, 41, 44 HISAWA 18 HITACHI 31, 33, 34, 36, 42, 43, 54, 0 6, 10, 24, 25, 18 HUANYU 56 HYPSON 07, 18, 46 ICE 46, 47 IMPERIAL 38, 42 INDIANA 07 INGELEN 31 INTERFUN K 31, 32, 07 , 42 TV CO NTRO L STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE INPUT SELECT CH VOL
03 23 En Using the TOOLS menu Various function s can be called out according to the playerâÂÂs operating status. 1 Display the TOOLS menu . Press TOOLS . 2 Select and set the ite m. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . Note ⢠Items that cannot be cha nged are displayed in gray. The items that can be selected depend on the playerâÂÂs status. ï° To close the TOOLS menu Press TOOLS or RETURN . ï° TOOLS menu item list INTERVISION 46, 49 ISUKAI 41 ITC 42 ITT 31, 32, 42 JEC 05 JVC 13, 23 KAISUI 18, 41, 44 KAPSCH 31 KENDO 42 KENNEDY 32, 42 KORPEL 07 KOYODA 44 LEYCO 07, 40 , 46, 48 LIESENK & TTER 07 LOEWE 07 LUXOR 32, 42, 43 M - ELECTRONIC 31, 44, 45, 54, 56, 07 , 36, 51 MAGNADYNE 32, 49 MAGNAFON 49 MAGNAVOX 07, 10, 03, 12, 29 MANESTH 39, 46 MARANTZ 07 MARK 07 MATSUI 07, 39, 40, 42, 44, 4 7, 48 MCMICHAEL 34 MEDIATOR 07 MEMOREX 44 METZ 31 MINERVA 31, 53 MITSUBISHI 09, 10, 02, 21, 31 MULTITECH 44, 49 NEC 59 NECKERMANN 31, 07 NEI 07, 42 NIKKAI 05, 07, 41, 46, 48 NOBLIKO 49 NOKIA 32, 42, 52 NORDMENDE 32, 36, 51 , 52 OCEANIC 31, 32, 42 ORION 32, 07, 39, 40 OSAKI 41, 46 , 48 OSO 41 OSUME 48 OTTO VERSAND 31, 32, 07, 42 PALLADIUM 38 PANAMA 46 PANASONIC 31, 07, 08, 42, 22 PATHO CI NEMA 42 PAUSA 44 PHILCO 32, 42 PHILIPS 31, 07, 34, 56, 68 PHOENIX 32 PHONOLA 07 PROFEX 42, 44 PROTECH 07, 42, 44, 46, 49 QUELLE 31, 32, 07 , 42, 45, 53 R - LINE 07 RADIOLA 07 RADIOSHACK 10, 23, 21, 02 RBM 53 RCA 01, 10, 15, 16, 17, 18, 61, 62, 09 REDIFFUSION 32, 42 REX 31, 46 ROADSTAR 41, 44, 46 SABA 31, 36, 42, 51 SAISHO 39, 44, 46 SALORA 31, 32, 42, 43 SAMBERS 49 SAMSUNG 07, 38, 44, 46, 69 , 70 SANYO 35, 45, 48, 21, 14, 91 SBR 07, 34 SCHAUB LORENZ 42 SCHNEIDER 07, 41, 47 SEG 42, 46 SEI 32, 40, 49 SELECO 31, 42 SHARP 02, 19, 27, 67, 90 SIAREM 32, 49 SIEMENS 31 SINUDYNE 32, 39, 40, 49 SKANTIC 43 SOLAVOX 31 SONOKO 07, 44 SONOLOR 31, 35 SONTEC 07 SONY 04 SOUNDWAVE 07 STANDARD 41, 44 STERN 31 SUSUMU 41 SYSLINE 07 TANDY 31, 41, 48 TASHIKO 34 TATUNG 07, 48 TEC 42 TELEAVIA 36 TE LEFUNKEN 36, 37, 52 TELETECH 44 TENSAI 40, 41 THOMSON 36, 51, 52, 63 THORN 31, 07, 42, 45 , 48 TOMASHI 18 TOSHIBA 05, 02, 26, 21 , 53 TOWADA 42 ULTRAVOX 32, 42, 49 UNIDEN 92 UNIVERSUM 31, 07, 38, 42, 45, 46, 54 VESTEL 07 VICTOR 13 VOXSON 31 WALTHAM 43 WATSON 07 WATT RADIO 32, 42, 49 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 07 YOKO 07 , 42, 46 ZENITH 03, 20 Item Descripti on Output Vide o Resolution Switch the output video resolution f rom the various out put te rminals (page 25). Play from Begi nning Play the selected title, track or file from the start. Play Mode Display th e Play Mode scre en (page 29) . Angle Switch the BD-ROM/D VD-Video discâÂÂs cam era angles (page 28) . Subtitle Switch the subtitles (page 28). Audio Switch t he audio streams/c hannels (page 28). Secondary Audio Switch the BD-ROMâÂÂs secondary audio streams/channels (page 28). Secondary Video Switch the BD-ROMâÂÂs secondary video (Picture-in-Picture) (page 29). Original/Play Li st S witch the DVD-R/-R WâÂÂs (VR format) list screen between th e original list and the playlis t. HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS ENTER Vi deo A djust Au dio DRC A dd to HMG Playlist Au dio Subtitle BD PLAYER TOOLS TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER
03 24 En Erasing the additional data from BD-ROMs When a BD-ROM is played, addition a l data may be stored in the playerâÂÂs memory (local storage). If the message indicating low memory (local storage) appe ars, erase the BDMV data. Caution ⢠When th e BDMV data is erased, all the data of secondary video (Picture-in-Pic ture), secondary audio and/o r bookmark, etc. that has been stored is erased. 1 Display the Tools menu. With no disc loaded, press the TOOLS button. 2 Select and set the item. Use ï© /ïª to select BDMV Data Erase , then press ENTER . 3 Erase the data. Use ï« /ï¬ to select Yes , then press ENTER . Caution ⢠It takes time to erase th e BDMV data for a while. Do no t unplug the power cord for about 10 seconds after performing the above procedure. Switching the video output terminal Use the procedure below to switch th e video output terminal. Switch between the d igital outp ut (HDMI outpu t) and the an alog output (Component Video output, S -Video output or Video output). ï¦ Switch the termin al from wh ich the vi deo signa ls are output. The video output terminal switches each time the button is pressed. Caution ⢠The picture may not be displa yed for a while whe n the video output te rminal is swit ched. â¢W h e n t h e HDMI OUT terminal is selected, no vi deo signals are output fr om the other video o utput termin als. ⢠When a video o utput terminal other than the HDMI OUT terminal is s elected, no audio an d video signals are output fr om the HDMI OUT termina l. Add to HMG Pl aylist Add the select ed track or file to the HMG Playlist (page 35). Delete from HMG Playlist Dele te the selected tra ck or file from the H MG Playlist (page 36). Now Playing Display the playback scre en of the curr ently playing track or file. Video Adjust Display the picture quality adjustment screen (page 37). Audio DRC Adjust the Aud io DRC (page 38). BDMV Data Erase Erase the additional data from BD-ROMs. Item Description HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS ENTER Output Video Resolution BDMV Data Erase BD PLA YER T OOLS TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Ye s No Erases all of the data added from BDMV . Please wait a while. OK to erase data? VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY O UTPUT RESOLUTION
03 25 En Switching the output video resolution Use the procedure below to switch the output video resolution from the various video ou tp ut terminals. ï¦ Press OUTPUT RESOLUTION . The current output video resolu tion are displayed on the TV screen and on the playerâÂÂs fro nt panel display. When pressed again, the output video resolution switches. The output video resolution can also be switched using ï© /ïª . The output video resolution can also be switched by pressing RESOLUTION on the playerâÂÂs front panel. The output video resolution can also be switched by selecting Output Video Re solution from the TOOLS menu. The output video resolution dep ends on the video output term inal. See the table below. Caution ⢠On some TVs, the picture may not be displaye d properly when the resolution is switched. If this happens, use OUTPUT RESOLUTION to set to a resolution at which the picture is properly displayed. ⢠When video signals ar e being output with a resolution of 1080/ 60i, 1080/60p, 1080/24p or 720/60p from the HDMI output terminal or component video outp ut terminals, the picture may be output with an aspect ratio of 16:9, even if the TV Aspect Ratio is set to 4:3 (Standard) . ⢠The picture may not be displayed for a while when the resolution is switched. ï° About Film material The film materia l is a video signa l with a frame rate of 24 frames/ second. For example, these ma terials include 1080/24p, 720/24p, etc. ï° To output film material To output 1080/24p film materia l from the HDMI output terminal, set the output vid eo resolution to either Auto or Source Direct . Caution ⢠1080/24p signals can only be output from the HD MI OUT terminal. They canno t be output from other vi deo terminals. â¢W h e n Auto is selected, the pictur e is output at 60 frames/ second if you r TV is not co m patible with 1080/24p signals. â¢W h e n Source Direct is selected, the signals are output as such, even if your TV is not compatib le with 1080/24p signals. If the picture is not dis played properly, use OUTPUT RESOLUTION to set to the output video resolution at which the picture is prop erly displayed. ⢠720/24p video signals are output at 60 frames/second, even if the resolution is set to Aut o or Source Dire ct . Output video resolution setting HDMI OUT terminal COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals 1 1. Depending on the BD, the p ictures may not be output. S-VIDEO/VIDEO output terminal 1 Auto 2 2. Cannot be selected when the video sign als are being output from the COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals, S-VIDEO output ter minal or the VID EO output terminal. Resolution preferred by TV 3,4 3. For details on the output of film mate rial (1 080/24p or 720/2 4p video signals), see To output film material . 4. Sources with a re solution of 720/60p and 720/24p are output at 1080/60i, even if the TVâÂÂs recommended resolution is 1080/60p. âÂÂâ 480i 480/60i 480/60i 480/60i 480p 480/60p 480/60p 1080i 1080/60i 1080/60i 5 5. Depending on the BD or DVD, the signals may be output at 480/60p. 1080p 2 1080/60p 6 6. Depending on the connected HDMI cable, the video signals may not be output. Also, sources with a resolution of 720/60p and 720/24p are output at 1080/60i. âÂÂâ Source Direct Resolution recorded on disc 3,7,8 7. Depending on the connected TV, the video signals may not be output. 8. 720/24p film material is output at 720/60p. Resolution recorded on disc 7,8,9 9. 1080/24p film material is output at 1080/60i. 480/60i CLEAR ENTER VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION Auto î î Output Video R esolution Source : 1 08 0/6 0i Current Output : 1 08 0/6 0i Video resolution of currently playing discs Output video resolution from the player Example: Auto î î Output Video R esolution Source : 1 08 0/24p Current Output : 1 08 0/24p Video resolution of currently playing discs Output video resolution from the player Example:
04 26 En Chapter 4 Playback Playing discs or files This section describes the playerâÂÂs main operations. For the types of discs that can be played, see Playable discs on page 8. For the types of files that can be played, see Playable files on page 10. Music files recorded on di scs are played with Home Media Gallery (page 34). 1 Press ïµ STANDBY/ON to tu rn on the power. Turn the TVâÂÂs power on and switch its input beforehand. 2 Press ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray and load the disc. Note ⢠Load the disc with the printed side facing up. ⢠Several dozen seconds are required to read the disc. Once reading is completed, the type of disc is displayed on the playerâÂÂs front panel display. 3 Press ï¤ PLAY to play the disc. To pause, press ïÂÂ¥ PAUSE during playba ck. To stop, press ï§ STOP during play back. Note ⢠So me discs star t playing a utomatically when the dis c tray is closed. ⢠DVD-Video discs have parental lock feature s. Input the password registered in the playerâÂÂs settings to unlo ck the parental lock. For details, see page 46. ⢠For some BD- R/RE, playback protection is set for the disc or titles. Input the code number set for the disc to unlock the protection. ï° If the disc menu is displayed For some discs, the disc menu is displayed automatically wh en playback starts. The con tents of the disc menu and the way to operate differ from disc to disc. ï° Resuming playback from where it was stopped (resume playback function) â¢W h e n ï§ STOP is pressed during playback, the point at which the disc stopped is stored in th e memory. When ï¤ PLAY is pressed, playback resumes from that point. ⢠For CD and music files, playback starts from the beginning of the track/file that was playing. ⢠To cancel the resume playback fun ction, press ï§ STOP while playback is stop ped. Note ⢠The resume playback f unction is canceled automatically in the following cases: â When the disc tray is open ed. â When the file list window i s switched. â When the power is turned off. (Fo r BDs and DVDs this does not cancel the resume playback function.) ⢠The resume playback f unction cannot be used for some disc s. Forward and reverse scanning 1 During playback, press ï or ï® . ⢠The scanning speed switches each time the button is pressed. The speed steps depend on the disc or file (the speed is displayed on the TV screen). ⢠Forward or reverse scann ing is also possible by holding the button down. Normal playback resumes when the button is released. Note ⢠No sound is output when scanning BDs and DVDs. ⢠Sound is output when scanning CDs and music files. ⢠For some discs, normal playba ck resumes automatically when the chapter switches. ï° To resume normal playback ï¦ Press ï¤ PLAY. STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE TV CONTROL INPUT SELECT CH VOL TV CONTROL STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE INPUT SELECT CH VOL PLAY PREV PAUS E STOP NEXT RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD PLAY PREV PAUS E STOP NEXT
04 27 En Playing specific ti tles, chapters or tracks ï¦ Input the number of the title, chap ter or track you want to play. ⢠Use the number buttons (0 to 9) to input th e number, then press ENTER . Note ⢠For some disc s, it is not poss ible to specify and play titles, chapters or tracks. ⢠Press CLEAR to clear the values you have inpu t. Skipping content ï¦ Press ï¯ PREV or ï° NEXT. â¢W h e n ï° NEXT is pressed, the disc skips ahead to the beginning of the next ti tle/chapter/track/file. â¢W h e n ï¯ PREV is pressed, the disc skips back to the beginning of the currently pl aying title/ch apter/track/f ile. Press twice to sk ip back to t he beginnin g of the previou s title/chap ter/ track/file. Note ⢠There are some discs and file s for which skipping is not possible. Playing in slow motion ï¦ While playback is pau sed, press and hold ï± / o r / ï² . ⢠The speed switches each time th e button is pressed (the speed is displayed on the TV screen). The speed steps depen d on the disc. Note ⢠It is not possible to switch the speed during reverse slow motion playback. ⢠No sound is outpu t during slow motion playback. ⢠For some discs, normal playba ck resumes automatically when the chapter switches. ⢠There are some discs for which slow motion pla yback is not possible. ï° To resume normal playback ï¦ Press ï¤ PLAY. Step forward an d step reverse ï¦ While playback is paused, press ï± / o r / ï² . ⢠The disc moves a ste p forward or reverse each time the button is pressed. Note ⢠For some discs, normal playba ck resumes automatically when the chapter switches. ⢠There are some discs and files for which step fo rward/reverse playback is not possible. ï° To resume normal playback ï¦ Press ï¤ PLAY. BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD CLEAR ENTER AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD PLAY PREV PAUS E STOP NEXT RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD PLAY PREV PAUS E STOP NEXT BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD PLAY PREV PAUS E STOP NEXT
04 28 En Switching the camera angles For BD-ROM and DVD-Video disc s on which mu ltiple angles ar e recorded, the angles can be switched during playback. ï¦ During playback, press ANGLE. ⢠The cu rrent angle and total n umber of recorded angles are displayed on the TV screen and o n the playerâÂÂs front panel display. When pressed ag ain, the angle switches. ⢠The angles can also be switched using ï© /ïª . ⢠The angles can also be switched by selecting Angle from the TOOLS menu. ⢠Angle mark is displayed for scenes at which multiple angles are recorded. Note ⢠For some discs, the angle can also be switched on the menu screen. ⢠Angle ma rk is not displayed if Angle/Seconda ry Indicator is set to Off (page 42). Switching the subtitles For discs on which multiple subtit les are recorded, the subtitles can be switched during playback. ï¦ During playback, press SUBTITLE. ⢠The current subtitles and total nu mber of recorded subtitles are displayed on the TV screen and o n the playerâÂÂs front panel display. When pressed again, the subtitle switches. ⢠The subtitles can also be switched us ing ï© /ïª . ⢠The subtitles can also be switched by selecting Subtitl e from the TOOLS menu. Note ⢠The types of recorded subtitles depend on the disc. ⢠If the subtitles are not switched when SUBTIT LE is pressed, switch them from the menu screen . ï° Turning the subtitles off ï¦ Press SUBTITLE, then pre ss CLEAR. Switching the audio streams/ channels For discs on whic h multiple aud io streams/chan nels are recorded, audio streams/channels can be swi tched during playback. Also use this procedure to switch the secondary audio for BD-ROMs o n which secondary audio is recorded. ï¦ During playback, press AUDIO. ⢠To switch the secondary audio, press SECONDARY AUDIO . ⢠The current audio stre ams/channel s and total num ber of recorded audio streams/cha nne ls are displayed on th e TV screen and on the playerâÂÂs fron t panel display. When pressed again, the audio stream/c hannel switches. ⢠The audi o streams/channels can also be switched using ï© /ïª . ⢠The audio stream s/channels can also be switched by selecting Audio or Secondary Aud io from the TOOLS menu. ⢠Secondary audio mark is displayed for scenes at which secondary audio is recor ded. BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER INPUT SELECT CH VOL 1 /4 î î Angle Example: Current angle/Total number of recorded angles BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER INPUT SELECT CH VOL 1 /2 Englis h Subtitle î î Example: Current subtitle/Total number of recorded subtitles BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER CLEAR ENTER VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION 2/2 Engli sh Dol by True HD 9 6kHz 7. 1ch L C R L s R s L b R b LFE Audio î î Current audio stream/Total number of recorded audio streams Example: Audio ty pe Number of channels Channels recorded on disc
04 29 En Note ⢠The typ es of recorded audio streams/cha nnels depend on the disc. ⢠If the audio stream/channel is not switched when AUDIO is pressed, switch it from the menu screen. ⢠Some BD-ROMs do not in clude secondary audio. ⢠Seconda ry audio mark is not displayed if Angle/ Seconda ry Indicator is set to Off (page 42). Switching the secondary video Use the procedure below to switch the secondary video (Picture-in- Picture) recorded on the BD-ROM. ï¦ During playback, pr ess SECONDARY VIDEO. ⢠The cu rrent secondary video strea m and to tal number of recorded secondary video stre ams are displayed on the TV screen and on the playerâÂÂs front pa nel display. When pressed again, the secondary video stream switches. ⢠The secondary video streams can also be switched using ï© /ïª . ⢠The secondary video streams can also be switched by sele cting Seconda ry Video from the TOOLS menu. ⢠Secondary video mark is displayed for scenes at which secondary video is recorded. Note ⢠Some BD-ROMs do not in clude secondary video. ⢠Seconda ry video mark is not disp layed if An gle/Secondary Indicator is set to Off (page 42). Displaying the di sc information ï¦ Press DISPLAY. The disc information appears on the TV screen. The info rmation switches each time the button is pressed. The information dis play differs duri ng playback and whe n playback is stopped. Using the Play Mode functions Playing from a specific time (Time Search) 1 During playba ck, press PLAY MODE to dis play the Play Mode screen. The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by selecting Play Mo de from the TOOLS menu. 2 Select Ti me Search. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD CLEAR ENTER VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION HOME MEDIA GALLERY DISPLAY POPUP MENU 1 /4 Secondar y Video î î Example: Current secondary video stream/Total number of recorded secondary video streams BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Play Mo de Time Search Title Sea rch Cha pte r Sea rch A-B Re peat Re p eat/Random
04 30 En 3 Input the time. Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ï© /ïª to input the time. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu rsor. Note ⢠To play from 4 5 minutes, input 0 , 0 , 4 , 5 , 0 and 0 , th en press ENTER . ⢠To play from 1 hour 20 minutes, input 0 , 1 , 2 , 0 , 0 and 0, then press ENTER . ⢠Press CLEAR to clear the values you have inpu t. 4 Startin g playback from the specified time. Use ï« /ï¬ to select Search , then press ENTER . ï° To cancel Time Search Press PLAY M ODE or RETURN . Note ⢠There ar e some discs for which Time S earch is not available. Playing a specific title, chapter or track (Search) 1 Press PLAY MODE to display the Pl ay Mode screen. The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by select ing Play Mode from the TOOLS menu. 2 Select the type of search . Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . See the table on pa ge 33 for the search types. 3 Input the nu mber. Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ï© /ïª to input the number. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cursor. 4 Starting playback from the spec ified title, chapter or track. Use ï« /ï¬ to select Search , then press ENTER . ï° To cancel the search ï¦ Press PLAY MODE or RETURN. Note ⢠To search for title 32, input 0 , 3 and 2 , then press ENTER . ⢠There are some discs for whic h searching is n ot available. ⢠Press CLEAR to clear the values you have input. VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR ENTER ENTER Time Sea rch ï© ïª 1 2:45:00 Sea rch VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Play Mo de Time Sea rch Title Search Cha pte r Sea rch A-B Re peat Re p eat/Random VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR ENTER ENTER Title Sea rch ï© ïª 0 32 Title Sea rch
04 31 En Playing a specific section within a title or track repeatedly (A-B Repeat) Use this procedure to play a specif ic sectio n within a ti tle or track repeate dly. 1 During playb ack, press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode screen. The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by select ing Play Mode from the TOOLS menu. 2 Select A-B Repeat. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 3 Select the starting point for A- B Repeat. Use ï« /ï¬ to select A (Start) , then press ENTER . 4 Select the end poin t for A-B Repeat. Use ï« /ï¬ to select B (End) , then press ENTER . A-B Repeat playback starts. ï° To cancel A-B Repeat play ⢠Select Off from the Repeat/Random screen, then press ENTER . ⢠During playback, press ï§ STOP or CLEAR . Note ⢠A-B Repeat p lay is canceled in the following cases: â When the angle is switched (for BD-ROM and DVD-Video discs only). â When you search ou tside the repeat range. â When you start other repeat or r andom play. Playing repeat edly (Repeat Play) Use this procedure to play the currently playi ng disc, title, chapter, track or file repe atedly. 1 During playba ck, press PLAY MODE to dis play the Play Mode screen. The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by selecting Play Mo de from the TOOLS menu. 2 Selec t Repeat/Random. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 3 Select the type of Repeat Play. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . See the table on pa ge 33 for the types of repea t playback. ï° To cancel Repeat Play â¢S e l e c t Off from the Repeat/Random screen, then press ENTER . ⢠During playback, press ï§ STOP or CLEAR . Note ⢠There are some discs and files for which R epeat Play is not available. ⢠The type of repeat modes depends on the disc and file bei ng played. See the table on page 33. ⢠Repeat Pla y is canceled in the following cases: â When the angle is switched (for BD-R OM and DVD-Video discs only). â When yo u search out side the repe at range. â When yo u start othe r repeat o r random pla y. VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS Play Mo de Time Sea rch Title Sea rch Cha pte r Sea rch A-B Repeat Re p eat/Random A-B Re peat A (Start) B (End) Off VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Play Mo de Time Sea rch Title Sea rch Cha pte r Sea rch A-B Re peat Repeat/Ran dom Re p eat/Random Off Re p eat All Re p eat T r ack Random T r ack
04 32 En Playing in random order (Random Play) Use this procedure to play the tr acks or files in random order. 1 During playb ack, press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode screen. The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by select ing Play Mode from the TOOLS menu. 2 Select Repeat/Random. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 3 Select the R andom Play. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . ï° To cancel Random Play ⢠Select Off from the Repeat/Random screen, then press ENTER . ⢠During playback, press ï§ STOP or CLEAR . Note ⢠There are some discs and files for which Random Play is not available. ⢠Random Play is canceled in the following cases: â When you use th e search function. â When you start repeat play. VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Play Mo de Time Sea rch Title Sea rch Cha pte r Sea rch A-B Re peat Repeat/Ran dom Re p eat/Random Off Re p eat All Re p eat T r ack Random T r ack
04 33 En About Play Mode t ypes The functions that can be used di ffer according to the typ e of disc and fil e. In some cases, some of the functions cannot be us ed. Ch eck the usable functions on the table below. Play Mode type Mark 1 1. During playback in a Play Mode, the type of Play Mode is in dicated by the mark. Disc/file ty pe BD-ROM 2 2. For BD-ROM and DVD-Video discs, some of the functions cannot be used with some titles. BD-R BD-RE DVD- Video 2 DVD-R DVD-RW (VR format) AVCHD Music file CD Repeat play Playing a specific section within a title or track repeatedly (A-B Repeat) ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï± Playing a title re peat edly (Title Repeat) ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ Playing a chapter re peatedly (Chapter Repeat) ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ Playing a track or file r epeatedly (Track Repeat) ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï± Playing all the titles, tra cks or files on the disc repeatedly (All Repeat) ï³ï±ï³ ï± 3 3. The original titles are played repeatedly. Howeve r, the playlist titles cannot be pla yed repeatedly. ï³ ï± 4 4. The files in the folder or HM G Playlist are played repeatedly. ï± Random play Playing the tracks or files in rando m order (Random Track) ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï± Search Playing from a specific tim e (Time Search) â ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï± Playing a specific title (Tit le Search) â ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ Playing a specific chapter (Chapter Search) â ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ Playing a specific track (Track Search) â ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï±
04 34 En Playing from the Home Media Gallery The Home Media Gallery lets you displa y a list of the titles, tracks or files recorded on the disc. The di scs that can be pla yed from the Home Media Gallery are a s shown below (see also page 8 ). â¢B D - R / - R E d i s c s ⢠DVDs recorded in VR format ⢠Music CDs (CD-DAs and DTS-CDs) ⢠DVDs/CDs on which only data files of music files, etc. are recorded Playing discs 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery . The Home Media Gallery can also be displayed by select ing Home Media Gallery from Home Menu then pressi ng ENTER . 2 Select the disc. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 3 Select the title or track to be played. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . Playback st arts. ï° Closing the Home Media Gallery Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY (or HOME MENU ). Note ⢠When playing a mu sic CD (CD-DA or DTS-CD), the Now Playing screen is displayed. ⢠Some BD-R/-RE discs have playba ck protectio n. To cancel the protection, input the pa ssword set for the disc. ⢠To play DVD-R/-RW (VR format) playlists, switch to the playlist using the Original/Play List command on the TOOLS m enu (page 23). Playing music files 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery. The Home Media Gallery can a lso be displayed by selecting Home Media Gallery from Home Menu then pressing ENTER . 2 Select th e disc. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY O UTPUT RESOLUTION TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Home Me dia Gallery BD PLAYER Sea rch fo r the pa rt you want to play f rom a list of the disc's content. BD-R BDAV HMG Playlist BD-R BDAV My F avorite TV P rogram Original 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 items 0 h 54 m 30 s 7/0 1/200 8 Title T otal : Recording Date : Morning serial drama News at noon Evening movie Midnight variety show Playback protection W orld heritage Drama: Blank time Music and us VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY O UTPUT RESOLUTION TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Home Me dia Gallery BD PLAYER Sea rch fo r the pa rt you want to play f rom a list of the disc's content. CD-ROM HMG Playlist
04 35 En 3S e l e c t M u s i c . Press ENTER . 4 Select Fol ders or All Songs. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . ⢠Fold ers â The files in the selected fo lder are displayed. ⢠All Songs â All the recorded files are displayed. If you have selected All Songs , proceed to step 6. 5 Select the fo lder containing the file you wa nt to play. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . A list of t he files in the selected folder (o r in the fold ers below it) is displayed. 6 Select and set the file you want to play. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . Playback st arts. The Now Playi ng sc reen (shown below) is displayed. Playing in the desired order (HMG Playlist) The discs that can add tracks an d files to the HMG (Home Media Gallery) Pla ylist are as sho wn below. ⢠Music CDs (CD-DAs and DTS-CDs) ⢠DVDs/C Ds on mu sic files are r ecorded ï° Adding tracks/files Use this proce dure to add tracks and files, an d create the HMG Playlist. 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery. The Home Media Gallery can a lso be displayed by selecting Home Media Gallery from Home Menu pressing ENTER . 2 Select th e disc. Load the disc beforehand. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . CD-ROM View available music. Music Music CD-ROM Fol d ers All Songs Folder s CD-ROM/Mu si c 15 items Mu si c Folder00 1 Mu si c Folder002 Mu si c Folder003 Mu si c Folder004 Mu si c005.mp3 Mu si c00 6.mp3 Mu si c007.mp3 Mu si c00 8.mp3 Mu si c Folder00 1 CD-ROM/Mu si c/Folder s 15 items Mu si c00 1.mp3 Mu si c002.mp3 Mu si c003.mp3 Mu si c004.mp3 Mu si c005.mp3 Mu si c00 6.mp3 Mu si c007.mp3 Mu si c00 8.mp3 Mu s ic 001 .mp3 DATA DI SC 0.05.34 0.02.33 Play Currently playing file Total file playing time Elapsed time VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY O UTPUT RESOLUTION TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Home Me dia Gallery BD PLAYER Sea rch fo r the pa rt you want to play f rom a list of the disc's content. CD-ROM HMG Playlist
04 36 En 3 Select the track/fi le to be adde d. Use ï© /ïª to select. 4 Press TOOLS to display the TOOLS menu. 5 Select Add to HMG Playlist. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . The track or file selected in st ep 3 is added to the HMG Playlist. To add more tracks or files, re peat steps 3 to 5. ï° To add the currently playing track/file to the HMG Playlist ï¦ While the track/file is playing, press TOOLS to display the TOOLS menu. ï¦ Use ï© /ïª to select Add to HMG Playlist, then press ENTER. Note ⢠A maximum of 24 tracks/files can be added to the HMG Playlist. ⢠The HMG Playlist is cleared in the following cases: â When the power is turn ed off. â When the disc tray is opened. ï° Playing the HMG Playlist 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery. The Home Media Gallery can a lso be displayed by selecting Home Media Gallery from Home Menu pressing ENTER . 2 Select HMG Playlist. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 3 Select the track/file to be played. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . Playback st arts. The Now Playi ng sc reen (shown below) is displayed. Press ï§ STOP to stop playback. When a music CD is stopped, the Now Playing screen tu rns off. When a music file is stopped, the HMG Playlist screen reappears. ï° Deleting tracks/files from the HMG Playlist ï¦ Select the track/file to be de leted, then press TOOLS to display the TOOLS menu. ï¦ Use ï© /ïª to select Delet e from HMG Playlist, then press ENTER. Folder s CD-ROM/Mu si c 15 items Mu si c00 1.mp3 Mu si c002.mp3 Mu si c003.mp3 Mu si c004.mp3 Mu si c005.mp3 Mu si c00 6.mp3 Mu si c007.mp3 Mu si c00 8.mp3 HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS ENTER Folder s CD-ROM/Mu si c 15Items Mu si c00 1.mp3 Mu si c002.mp3 Mu si c003.mp3 Mu si c004.mp3 Mu si c005.mp3 Mu si c00 6.mp3 Mu si c007.mp3 Mu si c00 8.mp3 Play from Beginning Add to HM G Playli st Now Playing BD PLAYER TOOL S VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY O UTPUT RESOLUTION Home Me dia Gallery BD PLAYER Dis play the HMG Playlist. CD-ROM HMG Playlist HM G Playli st CD-ROM 21 items Tra ck 15.mp3 Tra ck07.mp3 Tra ck03.mp3 Tra ck 16.mp3 Tra ck0 8.mp3 Tra ck05.mp3 Tra ck 10.mp3 Tra ck03.mp3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Mu s ic 001 .mp3 DATA DI SC 0.05.34 0.02.33 Play HM G Currently playing track/file Total track/file playing time Elapsed time
05 37 En Chapter 5 Adjusting audio and video Adjusting the video The quality of the playback picture can be adju sted according to the TV you are using. 1 During playback, press VIDEO ADJUST to display th e Video Adjust screen. The Video Adjust screen can al so be displayed by selecting Video Adjust fr om the TOOLS menu. 2 Select a prese t. Select using ï« /ï¬ according to the TV being used . ⢠LC D â Select this when connected to a liquid crysta l display TV. ⢠PD P â Select this when c onnected to a plasma TV of an other brand. ⢠Pioneer PDP â Select this when connected to a Pioneer plasma TV. ⢠Pr ojector â Select this when con n ected to a front projector. ⢠Professional â With this setting, video signal processing is restrained. Select this when connected to a professional monitor. ⢠Memory1 to 3 â Picture quality settings with ad justed parameters can be stored in the memory. For a description of the parameters , see When Memory1, 2 or 3 i s selected below. ï° When Memory1, 2 or 3 is selected 1 Select Adjustments. Use ïª to select Adjustments , th en press ENTER . A detailed settings screen appears. 2 Select the item to be adjusted. Use ï© /ïª to select. 3 Adjust the picture qual ity. When ï« /ï¬ are pressed, the adjustments can be made wa tching the picture. The detailed se ttings screen reappears when ENTER is pressed. ⢠Prog.M otion â Adjust according to the type of image (movie or still image). This i s effective wh en outputting vide o materials as progressive images. ⢠Pure Cinema â This se tting optim izes the operation of the progressive scanning circuit for playing film materials. Normally set it to Auto1 . If the picture seems unnatural, switch this to Auto 2 , On or Off (page 38). ⢠YNR â Reduces noise in the luminance (Y) sig nal. ⢠CNR â Reduces noise in the chroma (C) signal. ⢠BNR â Reduces the block noise (block-shaped distorti on generated upon MPEG compression). ⢠MNR â Reduces the mosquito noise (distortion along the contours of the pict ure generated upon MPEG compre ssion). ⢠Detail â Emphasizes the pict ureâÂÂs co ntours. ⢠Black Setup â Select the black level as the setup level. Normally select 7.5 IRE . If the black le vel is too bright due to th e combination with the connected monitor, sel ect 0 IRE . ⢠Gamma Correction â Adjusts how the dark portions of the picture look. ⢠White Level â Adjusts the level of the white portions. ⢠Black Level â Adjusts the level of the black portions. ⢠Hue â Adjusts the balance betwee n green and red. ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts the densi ty of the col ors. Note ⢠Prog.M otion an d Pure Cinema have the effect only for pictures recorded in the interlaced sca n format (480i or 1080i signals). ⢠Prog.M otion is disabled when P ure Cinema is se t to On. ⢠Bl ack Setup have the effect only fo r pictures output from th e VIDEO and S-VIDEO ou tput termin als. ⢠YNR , CNR, BNR and MNR have no effect for 1080/24p signals output from the HDMI OUT terminal. RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE VIDEO ADJUST TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Adjustments Vi deo A djust PDP Prog. Motion Pure Cinema YNR CNR BNR MNR Video Adju st [ Memory 1 ] Use [ ][ ] to adjust the picture to progressive scan . Motion Still Auto1 Off Max Off Max Off Max Off Max 1/2 P age Motion Still Prog. Motion
05 38 En ï° Closing the Video Adjust screen Press HOME MENU . ï° About Pure Cinema There are two types of video signals: ⢠Vide o material â Video signals recorded at 30 fram es/second ⢠Film material â Video signals recorded at 24 frames/second âÂÂPure Cinemaâ u ses signal processi ng suited for âÂÂfilm mat erialâ when converting 480i or 1080i in terlaced video signals into progressive video signals, resultin g in clear picture reproduction without losing the quality of the material. is displayed on the disc information scre en when playing the âÂÂfilm materi alâ pictures of DVD-Video discs (page 29). Adjusting the Audio DRC Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) has the effect o f playing loud sounds softly and soft sounds loudly . Adjust the setting for example when watching movies late at ni ght and the dialogues are difficult to hear. 1 During playb ack, display the TOOLS menu. Press TOOLS . 2 Select and set Audio DRC. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 3 Adjust the setting. Use ï« /ï¬ to switch between Off , Lo w, Me dium, High and Auto . ï° Closing the Au dio DRC screen Press ENTER or HOME MENU . Note ⢠This only affects the Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby Digital audio signals of BDs and DVDs. â¢W h e n Auto is selected, the setting has the same effect as High or Off for Dolby TrueHD signals, depending on the content. For Dolby Digital Plus an d Dolby Digita l, the setting has the sam e effect as Off . ⢠Audio DR C affects the aud io signals output from the foll owing audio output terminals: â Analog audio signals output from the AUDIO OUT (2 ch) or AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) terminals. â Linear PCM audio signals output from the DIG ITAL OU T terminals o r HDMI OUT terminal. ⢠The effect may be weak for some discs. HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS ENTER TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Au dio Subtitle Au dio DRC Vi deo A djust Output Vi deo Resolution BD PLAYER TOOLS TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Au dio DRC Off Adjust the audio dynamic range. This setting is ineffective de pending on the p laying audio.
06 39 En Chapter 6 Advanced settings Changing the settings (Initial Setup) Operating the Initial Setup screen 1 When playback is stopped, display the Home Menu scre en. Press HOME MENU . 2 Select and set Initia l Setup. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 3 Select the i tem and change th e setting. Use ï© /ïª /ï« /ï¬ to select, then press ENTER . ï° Closing the Initial Setup screen Press HOME MENU . HOME MENU RETURN PLAY ENTER TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER HOME MENU BD PLAYER Set u p the playe r fo r use. Home Me dia Gallery Initial Setup TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER
06 40 En Note ⢠Items that cannot be changed are indicated in gray. The it ems that can be selected depen d on the playerâÂÂs status. ⢠The factory default settings are indicated in bold. Setting Options Explanation Video Out TV Aspect Ratio 16:9 (Widescr een) Select th is when connected to a wide (16:9) T V. 4:3 (Stand ard) Select this wh en connecte d to a convent ional TV. 4:3 Video Out Full 4:3 pictures are di splayed over the entire screen. Normal 4:3 pictures are display ed with black b ands along the sides. Sele ct this when you cannot switch the aspect ratio to 4:3 on th e TV. DVD 16:9 Video Out Letter Box 16:9 pictu res are displayed with black ba nds at the top and bottom. Sele ct this when watching on a 4 :3 screen. Pan & Scan The picture is displaye d over the entire scre en, with the left and right sides of the 1 6:9 picture cut off. Sele ct this to watch 4:3 pictures over the entire screen. Still Picture Field This eliminates instabilit y of the picture when playback is pa used. Frame This makes pictures clear when playback is paused, but instabi lity may be observed. Auto Field and Frame is se lected automaticall y according to the disc being played. Audio O ut Dolby Digital Out * Only valid for digital audio outputs. Dolby Digital 1 Dolby Digital audio s ignals are output. With BD -ROM discs, the secondar y audio and interactive audio are mixed for ou tput. Dolby Digital 2 Dolby Digital audio signals a re output. With BD-RO Ms, the signals are output without mixing the secondar y audio and in teractive audi o signals. Dolby Digital ï¤ PCM Select this when the c onnected AV receiver or amplifier, etc., is not compatible with Dolby Digital audio si gnals. The Dol by Digital audio sig nals are converted into li near PCM audi o signals for output. DTS Out * Only valid for digital audio outputs. DTS 1 DTS Digital Surro und audio signals ar e output . With BD-ROM discs, the secondary audio and interactive audio are mixed for output. DTS 2 DTS Digit al Surround audio sig nals are output . With BD-ROMs, the signals are output without mixing the secondary audio an d interactive audi o signals. DTS ï¤ PCM Select this when the connected AV receiver or amplifier, etc., is no t compatible with DTS Digital Su rround audio signal s. The DTS Digital Surr ound audio signals ar e converted into linear PC M audio sign als for outpu t. AAC Out * Only valid for digital audio outputs. AAC Select this when the connecte d AV receiver or amplifier, etc., is compatible with AAC audio signals. The AAC audio sign als are output. AAC ï¤ PCM Select this when the connecte d AV receiver or amplifier, et c., is not compatible with AAC audio signals. The AA C audio signals are converted into linear PCM audio sign als for output. DTS Downmix Stereo DTS-HD Master Audio signals, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio sign als or DTS Digital Surround a udio signals conv erted to line ar PCM audio sign als are converted into 2-channel (stereo) signals fo r output. Lt/Rt DTS-HD Master Audio signals, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals or DTS Dig ital Surround a udio signals conv erted to line ar PCM audio sign als are converted into 2-channel signals compatible with Dolby Surround for output (when the connected AV receiver or amplifier, etc., is compat ible with Dolby Pro Logic, the AV receiver or am plifier output s the linear PCM audio signals as su rround audio signals). Speakers Audio Output Mode 2 Channel Select this when the TVâÂÂs ana log 2-channel (s tereo) audio input termin als are connected t o the playerâÂÂs AUDIO OUT (2 ch) terminals. Multi-channel Select this when the mu lti-channel audio input terminals of an AV receiver or amplifier, etc., are connected to the playerâÂÂs AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) terminals. Speaker S etup When an AV receiver or amplif ier, et c., is connect ed to the playerâÂÂs AUDIO OUT (7.1 c h) terminals, this sets whether or not to use the speakers which are con nected to the AV receiv er or amplifier, as well as the size of the speakers. For details, see Changing the speaker setup on page 43. Channel Level Fix The output for the various sp eakers is set to the m aximum. Variable The output level of the various speaker s is set within the range of âÂÂ6.0 dB to 6.0 dB ( in 0.5 dB steps) (page 4 4).
06 41 En HDMI HDMI High-Speed Transmission On Se lect this when connected with a High Speed HDMI⢠ca ble (page 15). Off Select this when connected with a Standard HDMI⢠cable (page 15). The playerâÂÂs setting screen is close d if the output video resolution is switc hed by changing the HDMI High-Speed Transmis sion setting. HDMI Color Space Auto The video signal tha t is output (YCb Cr or RGB) is swit ched auto matically. YCbCr 4:4:4 Select this to output the vi deo signals as YCbCr 4:4:4 sig nals. YCbCr 4:2:2 Select this to output the vi deo signals as YCbCr 4:2:2 sig nals. RGB (16 to 235) Select this to output the vide o signals as RGB signals. Choose this if t he colors seem too dense and all the dark colors are display ed in a unifo rm black when RGB (0 â 255) is selected. RGB (0 to 25 5) Select thi s to output the vi deo signals as RGB signals. Choose this if the colors seem too faint and the black too bright when RGB (16 â 235) is select ed. Normally it is recomm ended to set th is to Auto . When set to Auto , the optimum video si gnals for yo ur TV are output . HDMI Audio Out Auto The signals are output with as many audio ch annels as possible. In cases when the number of channels does not decrease wh en the sign als are output as such without conver ting them to li near PCM, they are out put as such (page 50) . PCM Select this when you wa nt the secondary au dio an d interactive audio signals t o be mixed for output o r when you want to output priori tizing sampling frequency over the number of channels ( page 50). PQLS Auto Enables PQLS function (pag e 15). Off Disables PQLS function (page 15). HDMI Control On Select thi s to control the player with th e remote contro l of the AV de vice connected u sing an HDMI cable . Also refer to About HDMI Control function on page 15. Off Select this when you do not wa nt to contro l the player with the remo te control of the AV device connecte d using an HDMI cable. Language OSD Language English Select thi s to set the lang uage of the on-screen displays to En glish. available languages Choose a langu age for the on-scree n displays from the list ed languages. Audio Language * For some discs, it may not be possible to change to the selected language. English Select thi s to set both th e BD-ROM and DVD -Video default audio languag e to English. available languages Choose a langua ge from the listed lan guages to set the defaul t audio languag e for BD-ROM and DVD-Video pla yback. Other Continue to the next scre en to set th e default a udio langua ge for BD -ROM and DVD-Vi deo disc playback. You can select the language name or enter the code num ber (see on page 56 for the code tab le). If a language n ot recorded on the BD /DVD is set, one of th e recorded languages is automatically selected and played. Subtitle Language * For some discs, it may not be possible to change to the selected language. English Select this to set the de fault subtitle la nguage for BD-RO M and DVD-Video playba ck to English. available languages Choose a lan guage from the listed languag es to set the de fault subtitle language for BD - ROM and DVD- Video playba ck. Other Continue to the next screen to set the defau lt subtitle langu age for BD-ROM and DVD-V ideo disc playback. You can select the language name or enter the code num ber (see on page 56 for the code tab le). If a language n ot recorded on the BD /DVD is set, one of th e recorded languages is automatically selected and played. BDMV/DVD-Video Menu Lang. * For some discs, it may not be possible to change to the selected language. w/Subtitle Language Sets the lang uage of BD -ROM and DVD-VId eo menus to the same as that set for the su btitle language. available languages Choose a lang uage from the l isted languages to set the defa ult language for BD-ROM and DVD-Video menus. Other Co ntinue to the next scree n to set the default men u language for BD-ROM and DVD-Video disc menus. Y ou can select the lang uage name or ent er the code numbe r (see on page 56 for the code tab le). If a language n ot recorded on the BD /DVD is set, one of th e recorded languages is automatically selected and played. Subtitle Display On Select this to display the subtitles. Off Select this if you do not want to display the subti tles. Note that on some discs the subtitles are displayed by fo rce. Parental Lock Set Password (Cha nge Password) Regist er (change) the password for parental lock settings or for unlocki ng to play DVD-Vi deo with parental lock feature. For details, see Registering or Changing the password on page 44. DVD-Video Parental Lo ck Chan ge the player âÂÂs parental lock leve l. For details, see Changing the Parental Lock level for watching DVDs on page 46 . BDMV Parental Lock Change the res tricted age. For details, s ee Changing th e Age Restricti on for watchin g BD-ROMs on page 45. Country Cod e Change the C ountry/Area code . Refer to the Changing the Country/Are a code on page 47. Setting Options Explanation
06 42 En Options Output Terminal Priority Select the terminals for output ting video and audio signals with priority. For d etails, see Changing the terminals for outputting video and audio signals (Output Terminal Priority) on page 48. On Screen Display On Select this to display the operation indi cators (Play, Stop, etc.) on the TV screen. Off Select this if you do not want to displ ay the operatio n indicators (Pl ay, Stop, etc.) on the TV screen. Angle/Secondary In dicator On Select this to display the angle mark, sec ond ary video m ark and secon dary audio ma rk on the TV scre en (pages 28 and 29). Off Select this if you do no t want to disp lay the angle mark, secondary video mark and secondary audio mark on the TV scree n. Hybrid Disc Playback BD The BD layer of hybrid discs with two or more layers (BD and DVD or CD) is played. DVD The DVD layer of hybrid d iscs with two or mo re layers (BD and DVD) is played. If there is no DVD layer, the BD layer is played. CD The CD layer of hybrid discs with two or more layers ( BD and CD) is played. If there is no CD layer, the BD layer is played. BDMV/BDAV Playback Priority BDMV Select this to play the BDMV format on BD-R/RE discs cont aining both BDMV and BDAV formats. BDAV Select this to play the BDAV form at on BD-R /RE discs conta ining both BDMV and BDAV formats. Auto Power Off On Select this to turn t he power off a utomatica lly (the power turns of f automatically if no operation i s performed fo r over 30 min utes). Off Select this if you do not want the power to turn off automatic ally. Setup Navigator Start making the setting s using the Setup Na vigator menu. For det ails, see Making settings using the Se tup Navigator menu on page 20. Setting Options Explanation
06 43 En Changing to other language at language setting Note â¢R e f e r t o Language Code Table on page 56. ⢠If a la nguage not recorded on the BD/DVD is set, one of the recorded languages is automa tica lly selected and played. 1 Select and set Other. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 2 Change the la nguage. Use ï« /ï¬ to change, then press EN TER . ï° To change the language using numbers 1U s e ï© /ïª to select Number. 2 Use the number bu ttons (0 to 9) to input the number, then press ENTER. Changing the speaker setup Note ⢠Select Init ial Setu p from the HOME MENU, then p ress ENTER . 1 Select a nd set Speakers. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 2 Select and set Speaker Setu p ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . Caution ⢠This cannot be selected when Audio Output Mode is set to 2 Channel . Change the setting to Multi-channel (page 40). 3 Select the speaker and change the setting. Use ï© /ïª to select, then use ï« /ï¬ to change the setting. ⢠L/R (front left and ri ght speakers) : Small / Large (this setting also applies to the C, SL/SR and SBL/SBR speakers). ⢠C (center speaker): Yes/ No ⢠SL/SR (left and right su rround speakers): Yes/ No ⢠SBL/SBR (left and right surround back speakers): Yes/ No ï° Closing the speaker settings screen Press ENTER . TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Audio Out p ut Mode S peake r Setu p Channel Level î Multi-channel î Fix Video Out Audio Out S peake rs HDMI Language Pa r ental Lock O ptions Setu p Navigato r Initial Setup BD PLAYER TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER L/R C S L/S R S BL/S BR Large Ye s Ye s Ye s S peaker S etup BD PLAYER Use [ ][ ] to select a speaker , then press [ ][ ] to select speaker option.
06 44 En Adjusting the output level of the various speakers (Channel Level) Adjust each output level of the different speakers by using test tones. 1 Select a nd set Speakers. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 2 Select and set Channel Level, the n Fix or Variable. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . ⢠Fi x â The output level of all the speakers is set to the maximum. ⢠Variable â The output level of all the spea kers is set 6.0 dB lower than when Fix is selected. From this point, the output levels of the L , C , R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR and SW speakers can be adjusted within the range of âÂÂ6.0 dB to 6.0 dB. ⢠If you ha ve selected Variable , proceed to step 3. Caution ⢠This cannot be select ed when Audio Output Mode is set to 2 Channel . C hange the s etting to Multi-channel (page 40). 3 Select and se t the method for switchi ng the speaker to be adjusted. Use ï« /ï¬ to select, th en press ENTER . ⢠Auto â Switch the speaker to be adjusted automatically. ⢠Manual â Switch the speaker to be adjusted manually. Caution ⢠Test tones are output. Lower th e volume of the device connected to the player. 4 Adjust the output level. Use ï© /ïª to select, ï« /ï¬ to adjust . Note â¢W h e n Auto is selected, the spea ker cannot be selected with ï© /ïª . ï° Closing the Channel Level screen Press ENTER . Registering or Changing the password Use this procedure to register or change the code number required for the P arental Lo ck settings . 1 Select and set Parental Lock . Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 2 Select and set Set Password ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Audio Out p ut Mode S peake r Setu p Channel Level î Multi-channel î Fix Video Out Audio Out S peake rs HDMI Language Pa r ental Lock O ptions Setu p Navigato r Initial Setup BD PLAYER TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER T est T one Switching Select whethe r test tone out put is switched automatically o r manually . Video Out Audio Out S peake rs HDMI Language Pa r ental Lock O ptions Setu p Navigato r Speaker Setup BD PLAYER Auto Manual L C R S R S BR S BL S L S W 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB Channel Level BD PLAYER Use [ ][ ] to select a speaker , then press [ ][ ] to adjust the channel level and then press ENTER . BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Set P assword DVD-V ideo P arental Lock BDMV P arental Lock Countr y Code î Off î 255 î us Video Out Audio Out Speakers HDMI Language P arental Lock Options Setup Navigator Initial Setup BD PLAYER
06 45 En 3 Input the password . Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ï© /ïª to input the number, then press ENTER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu rsor. 4 Re-input th e password. Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ï© /ïª to input the number, then press ENTER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu rsor. ï° To change the code number Input the previously registered password, then input the new password. Note ⢠We recommend making a note of the password. ⢠If you forget the password, reset th e player to the factory default setting, then register the password again (page 49). Changing the Age Restriction for watching BD-ROMs For BD-RO Ms containin g scenes of violence, for example, watching can be restricted by setting an age re striction for the BD-ROMs. 1 Select and set Parental Lock . Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 2 Select and set BDMV Parental Lock ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR ENTER ENTER Ente r new passwo rd Set P asswo rd Video Out Audio Out S peake rs HDMI Language Pa r ental Lock O ptions Setu p Navigato r Initial Setup BD PLAYER Ente r new passwo rd Set P asswo rd Video Out Audio Out S peake rs HDMI Language Pa r ental Lock O ptions Setu p Navigato r Initial Setup BD PLAYER Re-ente r BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Set P assword DVD-V ideo P arental Lock BDMV P arental Lock Countr y Code î Off î 255 î us Video Out Audio Out Speakers HDMI Language P arental Lock Options Setup Navigator Initial Setup BD PLAYER
06 46 En 3 Input the password . Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ï© /ïª to input the number, then press ENTER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu rsor. 4 Change the ag e. Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ï© /ïª to input the number, then press ENTER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu rsor. Note â¢W h e n Age Restriction is set to 255 , watchi ng is not restricted . Changing the Parental Lock level for watching DVDs Some DVD-Video discs containing sc enes of violence, for example, have Parental Lock levels (check th e in dications on the discâÂÂs jacket or elsewhere). To restrict watching these discs, set the playerâÂÂs level to the level l ower than the dis câÂÂs. 1 Select and set Parental Lock . Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 2 Select and set DVD-V ideo Parental Lock ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR ENTER ENTER Ente r the passwo rd Video Out Audio Out S peake rs HDMI Language Pa r ental Lock O ptions Setu p Navigato r Initial Setup BD PLAYER BDMV P a r ental Lock Age Rest r iction BDMV P a r ental Lock Video Out Audio Out S peake rs HDMI Language Pa r ental Lock O ptions Setu p Navigato r Initial Setup BD PLAYER BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Set P assword DVD-V ideo P arental Lock BDMV P arental Lock Countr y Code î Off î 255 î us Video Out Audio Out Speakers HDMI Language P arental Lock Options Setup Navigator Initial Setup BD PLAYER
06 47 En 3 Input the password . Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ï© /ïª to input the number, then press ENTER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu rsor. 4 Change the le vel. Use ï« /ï¬ to change, then press EN TER to s et. Note ⢠The level ca n be set to Off or between Level1 and Lev el8 . When set to Off , watching is not restricted. Changing the Country/Area code Note ⢠Refer to Country/Area Code Table on page 56. 1 Select and set Parental Lock . Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 2 Select and set Country/Area C ode. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR ENTER ENTER Video Out Audio Out Speakers HDMI Language P arental Lock Options Setup Navigator Initial Setup BD PLAYER DVD-V ideo P arental Lock Enter the password Level Video Out Audio Out Speakers HDMI Language P arental Lock Options Setup Navigator Initial Setup BD PLAYER DVD-V ideo P arental Lock Off BD DVD Music files AVCHD CD TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Set P assword DVD-V ideo P arental Lock BDMV P arental Lock Countr y Code î Off î 255 î us Video Out Audio Out Speakers HDMI Language P arental Lock Options Setup Navigator Initial Setup BD PLAYER
06 48 En 3 Input the password . Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ï© /ïª to input the number, then press ENTER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu rsor. 4 Change the country/area code. Use ï« /ï¬ to change, then press EN TER to s et. ï° To change the country/area co de using numbers 1U s e ï© /ïª to select Number. 2 Use the number bu ttons (0 to 9) to input the number, then press ENTER. Changing the terminals for outputting video and audio signals (Output Terminal Priority) Set the video and audio terminals to be used. Note ⢠2-channel linear PC M audio signals are output from the audio output term inals other than the set ter minal, regardles s of the audio format and setting. 1 Select an d set Options. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . 2 Select an d set Output Terminal Priority ï¤ Next Sc reen. Use ï© /ïª to select, then press ENTER . VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR ENTER ENTER Count r y Code Video Out Audio Out S peake rs HDMI Language Pa r ental Lock O ptions Setu p Navigato r Initial Setup BD PLAYER Ente r the passwo rd Numbe r Count r y Code Video Out Audio Out S peake rs HDMI Language Pa r ental Lock O ptions Setu p Navigato r Initial Setup BD PLAYER Code TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Video Out Audio Out Speakers HDMI Language P arental Lock Options Setup Navigator Initial Setup BD PLAYER Output T erminal Priority On Screen Display Angle/Secondar y Indicator Hybrid Disc Playback BDMV/BDAV Playback P riority Auto P ower Off î On î On î On î BD î BDAV
06 49 En 3 Select the terminal for outputting video signa ls. Use ï« /ï¬ to select, th en press ïª . When a digital output is selected for the video outp ut terminal, Video is fixed at HDMI and cannot be changed. When an analog ou tput is select ed fo r the video output te rminal, Component Vid eo or S-Video/Vi deo can be selected for Video . ⢠HDMI â HDMI OUT terminal ⢠Component Video â COMPONENT VIDEO out put terminals ⢠S-Video/Video â S-VIDEO output terminal or VIDEO output terminal The video and audio signals output from the set output terminals are output sync hronously (l ip synchroniza tion). 4 Select the terminal for outputting audio sign als. Use ï« /ï¬ to select, th en press ENTER . ⢠HDMI â HDMI OUT terminal ⢠Digital Audio â DIGITAL OU T terminal ( COAXIAL / OPTICAL ) ⢠Analog Audio â AUDIO OUT (2 ch) terminals or AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) terminals The optimum audio signals fo r the audio format and the playerâÂÂs settings are output from the output terminal(s) set here. Caution ⢠If the output terminal you want to select at Video is not displayed, use the VIDEO SELECT button to switch between digital and analog ou tput (page 24). â¢W h e n S-Video/Video or Component Vi deo is selected at Video , no sound will be output if HDMI i s s e l e c t e d a t Audio (the warning message shown below is displayed). When li stening to the audio by the HDMI-compa tible device, connect to the TV with the HDMI cable to watch th e video (pages 14 and 17). ⢠Linear PCM (2-channel) audio signals are output from the audio ter minals othe r than the one s et at Audio , regardless of the audio format and the player âÂÂs settings. Restoring all the settings to the factory default settings 1 Check that the p layerâÂÂs power is tu rned on. 2 When a disc is pl aying, press ï§ to stop playback. Eject the disc from the player. 3 While pressing ï§ , press ïµ STANDBY /ON. Operate using the buttons on th e playerâÂÂs front panel. Note ⢠After restoring all the settings to the factory default settings, use Setup Navigator to reset the pla yer (page 20). TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Audio Out put T e r minal P rio rity Video Out Audio Out S peake rs HDMI Language Pa r ental Lock O ptions Setu p Navigato r Initial Setup BD PLAYER Video Analog Audio S-Vi deo/Vi deo Ye s No Audio is not out put f rom HDMI te rminal when [S- Video/Video] o r [Com p onent Video] is selected. OK to select this setting?
06 50 En About th e audio output settin gs The audio signals that are outp ut differ according to the audio format recorded on the disc and the playerâÂÂs settings. Ch eck on the table below. Caution ⢠Linear PC M audio signals (2 channels) ar e output fr om all terminals other than the ones selected at Audio under Output Terminal Priority , regardless of the audio format or the playerâÂÂs settings (pages 20 and 48). ⢠The audio signals output from the DIGITAL OUT terminals have a sampling frequency of 48 kHz (44.1 kHz for CDs). ⢠MPEG au dio is output in linear PCM. Audio form at AUDIO OUT terminal DIGITAL OUT terminal HDMI OUT termina l 1 1. When outputting linear PCM audio signals, if the number of compatible channels of the connected HDMI device is lowe r, the sig nals are output with the number of channels for which the device is compatible. 2ch 2 2. When Audio Output Mode is set to 2 Channel or Multi- channel (page 40). Multi-channel 2 Converted to linear PCM audio 3 3. When Do lby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital ï¤ PCM , DTS Out is set to DTS ï¤ PCM , or AAC Out is set to AAC ï¤ PCM (page 40). Not conv erted to linear PCM audio 4,5 4. When Do lby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital 1 / Dolby Digital 2 , DTS Out is set to DTS 1/ DTS 2 or AAC Out is set t o AAC (page 40). 5. The secondary audio and interactive a udio are not output when Dolby Digit al Out is set to Dolby Digital 2 , DTS Out is set to DTS 2 and you are outputting Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround bitstream signals. PCM 6 6. When HDMI Audio Out is set to PCM or Auto (page 41). Auto 6,7,8 7. When Dolby TrueHD, D olby Digital Plus, Dolb y Digital, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio or DTS Digital Surrou nd signals are being output in bitstream, the secondary audio and interactive audio signals are not mixed. 8. If the connected HDMI device is not compatible with Dolby True HD or Dolby Digital Plus bitstrea m, the signals are output in D olby Digita l bitstream. If the connec ted HDMI device is not compatib le with DTS-H D Mast er Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, the sig nals are output in DTS Digital Surround bitstream. If the connected HDMI device is not compatible with Dolby Digita l or DTS Digital Surround bitstr eam, the signals are output in linear PCM. BD-ROM Dolby Digital Converted to 2- channel audio 5.1-channel audio Converte d to 2- channel audio Dolby Digital 5.1-channel audi o Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus 7.1-channe l audio 9 9. Only co mpatible wi th 7.1-channel surround back. 6.1-c hannel surround back output in 7.1 channels. In other cases, output as a udio signals of 5.1-ch annels or less. 7.1-channel audio 9,10 10. When the output video resolution is set to 480i or 480 p, the signals may be output in 2 channel, depending on HDMI High-Speed Transmis sion setting and/or the connected HDMI device (page 15). Dolby Digital Plus Dolby True HD Dolby TrueHD 11 11. When the output video resolution is set to 480i or 480p, the signals may be output in Dolby Digital bitstream, depending on HDMI High-Speed Transmission setting and/or the connected HDMI device (p age 15). DTS Digital Surround 5.1-channel audio DTS Digital Surround 5.1-channel audio DTS Digital Surround DTS-HD High Resolution Audio 5.1-channel audio 12 12. DTS Digital Surround signals converted to linear PCM audio signals are output. 5.1-channel audio 12 DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio 13 13. When the output video resolution is set to 480i or 480p, the signals may be output in DTS Digital Surround bitstream, depend ing on HDMI High-Speed Transmission setting and/or the conn ected HDMI device (page 15). Linear P CM 7.1-channe l audio 9 Converted to 2- channel audio 7.1-channel audio 9,10 7.1-channel audio BD-R/RE Dol by Digital Converted to 2- channel audio 5.1-channel audio Converte d to 2- channel audio Dolby Digital 5.1-channel audio Dolby Digital MPEG-2 AAC MPEG-2 AAC MPEG-2 A AC MPEG 2-channel aud io Linear P CM DVD- Video Dolby Digital Converted to 2- channel audio 5.1-channel audio Converte d to 2- channel audio Dolby Digital 5.1-channel audio Dolby Digital DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround MPEG 2-channel aud io Linear P CM DVD (VR format) Dolby Digi tal Converted to 2- channel audio 5.1cha nnel audio Converte d to 2- channel audio Dolby Digital 5.1-channe l audio Dolby Digital MPEG 2-channel aud io Linear P CM
07 51 En Chapter 7 Additional information Troubleshooting Incorrect operation i s often mistaken for trouble or malfunction . If you think that there is someth ing wrong with this componen t, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Inspec t the other components an d electrical ap pliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified after checki ng the items below, please contact customer services. In the US, call Toll Free (80 0) 421 -1404. (Telephone lines are open Monday through F riday 6:00 AM to 4:30 PM (Pacific Time).) In Canada, call Local (905) 479-4411 , or Lo ng dis tanc e 1(877) 283-5901. (Telephone lines are open Monday thr ough Friday 9:00 AM to 5:30 P M (EST).) Playback Problem Check Remedy Disc does not play. Disc tray opens automatic ally. Is the disc scratched? It may not be possible to play scratche d discs. Is the dis c dirty? Clean the disc (page 5 9). Is the disc prop erly set in the dis c tray? ⢠Set the d isc with the printed s ide facing up. ⢠Set the disc pr operly in th e depression in the disc tray. Is the region numbe r co rrect? The region numbe rs of discs that can b e played on this set a re as shown bel ow (page 10). ⢠BDs: âÂÂAâ (or including âÂÂAâÂÂ) and âÂÂALLâ â¢ DVDs: âÂÂ1â (or incl uding âÂÂ1âÂÂ) and âÂÂALLâ Is the player set in a h umid place? There could be condensati on inside. Wait for th e condensatio n to dissipate. Do not set the playe r near an air-conditi oner, etc. (page 58). Picture f reezes an d the front panel and remote control buttons stop workin g. ⢠Press ï§ ST OP to stop playback, th en restart pla yback. ⢠If the playback cannot be stopped, press ïµ ST ANDBY/ON on the playerâÂÂs fr ont panel to turn of f the power, then turn the power back on. ⢠If the po wer cannot be tu rned off, press an d hold ïµ STANDBY/ON on the playerâÂÂs fron t panel f or over 5 seconds. The power will turn off. No picture is disp layed or the picture is no t displayed properly. Is the video cable properly c onnected? Insert the cable firm ly and all the way in. Is the video cable da maged? If the cable is damaged, rep lace it with a new one . Is the input setting on the connected TV or AV receiver or amplifier right? Read the oper ating instructi ons of the connected components and switch to the proper inpu t. Are the termina ls for outputtin g video signals pr operly set? Pr ess VIDEO SELECT to switch the termi nal from which the video signals are outp ut. Is the output video resolution prope rly set? Depending on the playerâÂÂs ou tput video resolution, the picture may not be displ aye d at all or d isplayed properly. Use OUT PUT RESOLUTION to switch to a resolution at which the picture is displayed properly (page 25). Is the player conne cted with an HDMI ca ble other than a High Speed HDMI⢠cable (with a Standard HDMI⢠cable)? Press ï§ while pressing ï¤ on the playerâÂÂs fron t panel to restore the video outputs to the factory de fault settings. Af ter use Setup Navigator to reset the player. There are so me BDs for whic h the picture will on ly be output when connecte d by HDMI cable. Picture is stretc hed. Aspect ratio cannot be switched. Is the TVâÂÂs aspect ratio properly set? Read the TVâÂÂs operating instructions an d set the TVâÂÂs aspect ratio properly. Is 4:3 Video Out properly set? ⢠Set 4:3 Video Out p roperly (pag e 40). ⢠When video signals with a resolution of 1080/60i, 1 080/60p, 1080/24p or 720 /60p are being output from the HDMI OUT terminal or the COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals, they may be output in the 16:9 (Wid escreen) mode even if TV Aspect Ratio is set to 4:3 (Standard) (p age 25). Sound and picture are not synchronized. Is Out put Terminal Priority properly set? Set Output Terminal Priority properly (pages 20 and 48 ).
07 52 En Picture is disturbed durin g playback. Picture is dark. ⢠This player su pports Macrov ision analog copy protection technology. With some TVs (such as with built-in vide o deck), the picture wil l not be disp layed properly when the copy protected DVD title is pl ayed . This is not a malfunction. ⢠If the pla yer and TV are con nected via a DVD reco rder/video deck, etc., the picture will not be displayed pro perly due to analog copy protection. Connec t the player and TV direct ly. No picture is displayed or picture is not ou tput in high definition when playing BDs. With some content protected di scs, it may not be poss ible to output the vi deo signals from the VIDEO output terminals, the S-VIDEO output terminal or the COMPONEN T VIDEO output terminals. In this case, co nnect using an HDMI ca ble (page 14). No sound is output. Sound is disturbed. Is the disc played back in slow motion? Is the disc played back in fa st forward or fa st reverse? No sound is out put during slow moti on play and forwar d and reverse scanning. Is the disc scratched? The sound may not be ou tput if the disc is scratched. Is the dis c dirty? Clean the disc (page 5 9). Is the player properly conne cted to the other component s (AV receiver or amplifier, etc.)? ⢠Check that you con nect the player to th e audio output terminals of a di fferent component , etc. ⢠Check that you con nect the player to th e PHONO input terminals of the AV receiver or amplifier, etc. Are the connec ted components (AV receiver or amplifier, et c.) properly set? Read the oper ating instructi ons of the connected components and check the volume, inpu t, speaker settings, etc. Are the audi o cables properly connecte d? Insert the cable s firmly and all the wa y in. Is the audio cable damaged? If the cable is damage d, replace it with a ne w one. Is the player connected to the TV using an HDMI cable to watch the picture? When connecting usin g component video cables, an S-Video cable or a video cable to watch the pic ture, it is not possible to listen to the sound of devices connected with HDMI cables. Take one of the measures below (pages 14 and 17). â To watch the picture on a device that is not HDMI compatible, connect us ing either an opt ical digital audi o cable, coaxi al digital audi o cable or anal og audio cables (7.1 or 2 channels) to listen to the sound. â To listen to the sound on an HDMI-co mpatible devi ce, connect to the TV using an HDMI c able to watch the picture. After one of the above measure s, use Setup Na vigator to reset the player (page 20) . Is Audio Output Mode properly set? If Audio Output Mode is set to Multi-channel , the aud io signals ma y not be output p roperly from the AUDIO OUT (2 ch) terminals ( page 40). Se t Audio Out put Mode to 2 Channel . Are the speakers properly se t? Set Speaker Setup properly (page 40). For some BDs, audio signals are only outp ut from the opt ical digital audio o utput termin al, the coaxi al digital audi o output terminal or the HDMI ou tput terminal. Multi-channel sou nd is not output. Is the AV receiver or ampl ifier, etc. connected to the HDMI OUT terminal, the AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) terminals or DIGITAL OUT ( COAXIAL / OPTICAL ) terminal? Read the oper ating instru ctions of the connec ted AV receiv er or amplif ier and check the audio output settings of A V receiver or amplifier. Is Output Terminal Priority properly se t? Linear PCM (2 -channel) audio si gnals are output fr om output terminals other than the one set at Audio under Output Terminal Priori ty . Set Output Terminal Priority properly (page 48). Is the audio output of the conn ect ed AV receiver or amplifier, etc., properly set? Read the oper ating instru ctions of the connecte d AV receiver or amplif ier and check the audio output settings of A V receiver or amplifier. Problem Check Remedy
07 53 En When connected usin g an HDMI cable Multi-channel sou nd is not output (conti nuous). Is multi-channel sound selected? Use the menu scre en or AUDIO to switch the dis câÂÂs sound to multi-channel. Is Audio O ut set to audio format s supported by the conne cted AV receiver or amplifier? ⢠Read the o perating instructions o f the connected AV re ceiver or amplifier and check the supported audio formats. ⢠Set Audio Out properly (page 40). Are Audio Output Mode and Speaker Setup properly set? ⢠When the AV receiver or amplifie r, etc., is connected to the AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) terminals, set Audi o Output Mode to Multi-channel (page 40). ⢠Set Sp eaker Setup properly (page 40). Digital audio signals are n ot output from the DIGITAL OUT output ( COAXIAL / DIGITAL ) terminals (analog audio signals are ou tput). Is Audio O ut set to audio format s supported by the conne cted AV receiver or amplifier? ⢠Read the o perating instructions o f the connected AV re ceiver or amplifier and check the supported audio formats. ⢠Set Audio Out properly (page 40). Noise can be h eard when outputting DTS Digital Surround signals. Is the connected AV receiver or amplifier compatibl e with DTS Digital Su rround? If an AV receiver or amplifier th at is not compatible wit h DTS Digital S urround is connec ted to the DIGITAL OUT terminal , set DTS Out to DTS ï¤ PCM . Noise will be heard if DTS Out is set to DTS (page 40) . 192 kHz or 96 kHz digital audio signals can not be output from the DIGITAL OUT ( COAXIAL / OPTICAL ) terminals. It is not p ossible to outp ut 192 kHz or 96 kHz digital aud io signals from this playerâÂÂs DIGITAL OUT ( COAXIAL / OPTIC AL ) terminals. The signals are au toma tically c onverted to und er 96 kHz for output . Secondary audio or interactive audio is not output. Is HDMI Audio Out properly set? Set HDMI Audio Out to PCM (pag e 41). Ar e Dolby Digital Out and DTS Out properly set? Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital 1 , DTS Out to DTS 1 (page 40). Sound is fast or slow. When an HDMI cable is connec ted, are audio signals be ing output from devices connected with cables other than HD MI cables? When this player is connected by HDMI cable to a Pioneer AV receiver or amplifier compatible with the PQLS function via HDMI connec tion, the PQLS function is activated when playing CDs. Because of th is, the sound output from components other than the ones connected by HDMI cable may be fast or slow. If this happens, set PQLS to Off (page 41). Files recorded on discs cannot be played. Is the disc one th at is playable on this player? Check wh ether the disc is one that can be played on this player (page 8). Is the file one that is pla yable on this player? ⢠Check whether the file is one that can be played on this player (page 10). ⢠Check whether or no t the file is damaged Is the file protected by DRM? Files protected by DRM cannot be played. A message indicating low memory (local sto rage) appears whi le playing a BD - ROM disc. Erase the BD MV data (page 24). Problem Check Remedy HDMI indicator does not light. Is the vi deo output te rminal othe r than the HDMI OUT terminal selected? The HDMI indica tor lights when video signal s are being output from the HDMI OUT terminal. Press VIDE O SELECT to switch to the HDMI OUT terminal (page 24) . Is the input of the connected H DMI device properly set? Read the HDMI deviceâÂÂs operat ing instructions and set the input properly. Is a DVI dev ice conn ected? Read the DVI deviceâÂÂs operating instructions and check whether it is compatible with HDCP. Problem Check Remedy
07 54 En No picture is displayed. Is the HDMI indica tor lit? ⢠If the H DMI indica tor is not lit, read the HDMI deviceâÂÂs operating instructions and sw itch to the proper input. ⢠If the HDMI indicator is lit, use OU TPUT RESOLUTION to switch the output vide o resolution ( page 25). Are the termina ls for outputtin g video signals pr operly set? Pr ess VIDEO SELECT to switch the HDMI OUT terminal. Is the resoluti on properly set? Depending on the ou tput video resolu tion setting, th e picture may not be output . Use OUTPUT RESOLUTION to switch the output video res olution (page 25). Is the HDMI cabl e pro perly connected? ⢠Inse rt the cable firmly and all the way in. ⢠With some cables, 1080p vide o signals cannot be properly output. Is a DVI device connected? The picture may not be displayed properly if a DVI device is connected. Is the HDMI cabl e damaged? If the cable is damage d, replace it with a ne w one. Pictures do not dis play properly on th e TV. Change th e HDMI Color Space setting (page 4 1). No sound i s produce d. Are you watc hing th e pi cture with the TV connected v ia an HDMI cable? If video signals are b eing output from a terminal oth er than the HDMI termina l, no audio signals ar e output from the HDMI terminal. Connect to the T V using an HDMI cable and press VIDEO SELECT to switch to the HDMI output ter minal (p ages 14, 17 and 24). Is a DVI device connected? The sound will not be o utput from the HDMI OUT terminal if a DVI device is connected. Connect the de vice to a DIGITAL OUT ( OPTICAL/ COAXIAL ) terminal or the AUDIO OUT (2 ch) terminals. HDMI Control fu nction does not work. Is the HDMI cabl e properly connec ted? Connect the HDMI cable pr operly. Is the HDMI ca ble you ar e using a High Spe ed HDMI⢠cable ? Us e a High Speed HDMI⢠cable. T he HDMI Control function may not work properly if HDMI cab le other than a Hig h Speed HDMI⢠cable is used. Are you co nnected to t he TV using a n HDMI cabl e to watch the picture? If video signals are b eing output from a terminal oth er than the HDMI terminal , HDMI Contro l function does not work. Connect to th e TV using an HDMI ca ble and press VIDEO SELECT to switch to the HDMI outp ut terminal (pages 14, 17 and 24). Is HDMI Control set to On on the player? Set HDMI Control to On on the player (page 41). Does the connected device support the HDMI Control function? ⢠The HDMI Control fu nction will not work with devices manufactur ed by companies othe r than Pioneer, even whe n connected using an H DMI cable. ⢠The HDMI Co ntrol functi on will not work i f devices that do not support the HDMI Co ntrol function or devices manufactu red by companies other th an Pioneer are co nnected between th e HDMI Control-compat ible device and the player. ⢠The HDMI Control fu nction may not work with certa in Flat Panel TVs. Also refer to the op er ating instructions of the connected device. Is HDMI Control set to On on the conn ected device? Set HDMI Control to On on the conne cted device. The HDMI Control function works when HDMI Control is set to On for all the devices connecte d by HDMI cable. Once connections and settings of all the devi ces are finished , be sure to check that the playerâÂÂs picture is output to the Flat Panel TV. (Also check after changing the conn ected devices and connecting and/or disconnect ing HDMI cables.) If th e playerâÂÂs picture is no t being output to the Flat Panel T V, the HDMI Control funct ion may not work properly. For details, refer to the ope rating instructio ns of the conne cted device. Are multiple players connected? The HDMI Contro l function may not work if t hree or more players, includin g this player, are connected by HDMI cable. Problem Check Remedy
07 55 En Others Problem Check Remedy The power turns off automatic ally. Is Auto Power Off set to On ?I f Auto Power Off is set to On , the power turns off automaticall y if no opera tion is perfor med for over 3 0 minutes (page 42). Is HDMI Control set to On ? The playerâÂÂs power ma y turn of f together with the power of th e connected TV . If you do not want the player âÂÂs power to turn off when the TVâÂÂs power is turned off, se t HDMI Control to Off (page 41). The power turns on automatic ally. Is HDMI Control set to On ? The playerâÂÂs power m ay turn on toge ther with the power of the connected TV. If you do not want the pl ayerâÂÂs power to turn o n when the TVâÂÂs power is turned on, set HDMI Control to Off (page 41). Inputs of connected TV a nd AV system, switches automatic ally. Is HDMI Control set to On ? The inputs of the c onnected TV or AV system ( AV receiver or amplifier, etc.) may automatica lly switch to the playe r when playback starts on the pla yer or the menu screen (Home Me dia Gallery, etc.) is displayed. If yo u do not want the in puts of the connected TV and/or AV system (A V receiver or amplifie r, etc.) to switch automatically, set HDMI Control to Off (page 41). Player cannot be operated with remote control. Is an AV receiver or amplifier connec ted to the CO NTROL IN terminal on the playerâÂÂs rear panel? Operate with the remote contro l of the devi ce connected to the CONTROL IN terminal. Are you operat ing the remote control from a po int too far away from the player? Operate from within 23 feet of the remote control sensor. Are the batt eries dead? Replace the ba tteries (pag e 7). Settings you have made have been cleare d. ⢠Have you discon nected the power cord while the playerâÂÂs power was on? ⢠Has there been a power failure? If the power cord is disconnect ed or there is a power failure while the playerâÂÂs power is on, the se ttings you have made may be cleared. Always press ïµ STANDBY/ON on the playerâÂÂs front pan el or ïµ S TANDBY/ON on the remote control and check that POWER OFF has turned off from the playerâÂÂs f ront panel display before disconn ecting the power cord. Be particularly careful when the power cord is connected to the AC outlet on another de vice because the player turns off in conjunction with t h e device. We recommend plugging the power cord into a wall ou tlet whenever possib le. After a disc is inserted, Loading stays di splayed and playb ack does not st art. Are there too many files recorded on the disc? When a di sc on which files are record ed is inserted, depending on the number of files recorded on the di sc, loading may t ake several dozen minutes. ï§ is displayed in file names, etc. The characters that cannot be display ed on this player are displayed in ï§ . The DVD layer of BD and DVD hybrid discs cannot be played. Is Hybrid Disc Playb ack properly set? Set Hybrid Disc Playback to DVD (page 42). The CD layer of BD and CD hybrid discs cannot be played. Is Hybrid Disc Playb ack properly set? Set Hybrid Disc Playback to CD (pag e 42). The Hybrid Disc Pl ayback setting cannot be changed (displayed in gray). Is a disc set in the disc tra y? The Hybrid Disc Playbac k setting ca nnot be change d when a disc is set. Remove the disc, then change the setting. BDMV/BDAV Playback Priority setting cann ot be changed ( displayed in gr ay). Is a disc set in the disc tra y? The BDMV/BDAV Playb ack Priority setting cann ot be changed when a disc is set. Re move the disc, then change the setting.
07 56 En Language Code Table and Country/Area Code Table Language Code Table Language name (langua ge code), input code Country/Area Code Table Country/Area name, input code, Country/Area code Japanese (ja/jpn), 1001 English (en/eng), 0514 French (fr/fra), 0618 German (de/deu), 0405 Italian (it/ita), 0920 Spanish (es/spa), 0519 Chinese (zh/zho), 2608 Dutch (nl/nld), 1412 Portuguese (pt/por), 1620 Swedish (sv/swe), 1922 Russian (ru/rus), 1821 Korean (ko/kor), 1115 Greek (el/ell), 0512 Afar (aa/aar), 0101 Abkhazian (ab/abk), 0102 Afrikaans (af/afr), 0106 Amharic (am/amh), 0113 Arabic (ar/ara), 0118 Assamese (as/asm), 0119 Aymara (ay/aym), 0125 Azerbaijani (az/aze), 0126 Bashkir (ba/bak), 0201 Belarusian (be/bel), 0205 Bulgarian (bg/bul), 0207 Bihari (bh/bih), 0208 Bislama (bi/bis), 0209 Bengali (bn/ben), 0214 Tibetan (bo/bod), 0215 Breton (br/bre), 0218 Catalan (ca/cat), 0301 Corsican (co/cos), 0315 Czech (cs/ces), 0319 Welsh (cy/cym), 0325 Danish (da/dan), 0401 Dzongkha (dz/dzo), 0426 Esperanto (eo/epo), 0515 Estonian (et/est), 0520 Basque (eu/eus), 0521 Persian (fa/fas), 0601 Finnish (fi/fin), 0609 Fijian (fj/fij), 0610 Faroese (fo/fao), 0615 Frisian (fy/fry), 0625 Irish (ga/gl e), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd/gla), 0704 Galician (gl/glg), 0712 Guarani (gn/grn), 0714 Gujarati (gu/guj), 0721 Hausa (ha/hau), 0801 Hindi (hi/hin), 0809 Croatian (hr/hrv), 0818 Hun garian (hu/hun), 0821 Armenian (hy/hye), 0825 Interlingua (ia/ina), 0901 Interlingue (ie/ile), 0905 Inupiaq (ik/ipk), 0911 Indonesian (in/ind), 0914 Icelandi c (is/isl), 0919 Hebrew (iw/heb), 0923 Yiddish (ji/yid), 1009 Javanese (jw/jav), 1023 Georgian (ka/kat), 1101 Kazakh (kk/kaz), 1111 Kalaallisut (kl/kal), 1112 Khmer ( km/khm) , 1113 Kannada (kn/kan), 1114 Kashmiri (ks/kas), 1119 Kurdish (ku/kur), 1121 Kirghiz (ky/kir), 1125 Latin (la/lat), 1201 Lingala (ln/lin), 1214 Lao (lo/lao), 1215 Lithuanian (lt/lit), 1220 Latvian (lv/lav), 1222 Malagasy (mg/mlg), 1307 Maori (mi/mri), 1309 Macedonian (mk/mkd), 1311 Malayalam (ml/mal), 1312 Mongolian (mn/mon), 1314 Moldavian (mo/mol), 1315 Marathi (mr/mar), 1318 Malay (ms/msa), 1319 Maltese (mt/mlt), 1320 Burmese (my/mya), 1325 Nauru (na/nau), 1401 Nepali (ne/nep), 1405 Norwegian (no/nor), 1415 Occitan (oc/oci), 1503 Oromo (om/orm), 1513 Oriya (or/ori), 1518 Panjabi (pa/pan), 1601 Polish (pl/pol), 1612 Pushto (ps/pus), 1619 Quechua (qu/que), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm/roh), 1813 Rundi (rn/run), 1814 Romanian (ro/ron), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw/kin), 1823 Sanskrit (sa/san), 1901 Sindhi (sd/snd), 1904 Sango (sg/sag), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh/scr), 190 8 Sinhalese (si/sin), 1909 Slovak (sk/slk), 1911 Slovenian (sl/slv), 1912 Samoan (sm/smo), 1913 Shona (sn/sna), 1914 Somali (so/som), 1915 Albanian (sq/sqi), 1917 Serbian (sr/srp), 1918 Swati (ss/ssw), 1919 Sotho, Southern (st/sot), 1920 Sundanese (su/sun), 1921 Swahili (sw/swa), 1923 Tamil (ta/tam), 2001 Telugu (te/tel), 2005 Tajik (tg/tgk), 2007 Thai (th/tha), 2008 Tigrinya (ti/tir), 2009 Turkmen (tk/tuk), 2011 Tagalog (tl/tgl), 2012 Tswana (tn/tsn), 2014 Tonga (Tonga Islands) (to/ton), 2015 Turkish (tr/t ur), 2018 Tsonga (ts/tso), 2019 Tatar (tt/tat), 2020 Twi (tw/twi), 2023 Ukrainian (uk/ukr), 2111 Urdu (ur/urd), 2118 Uzbek (uz/uzb), 2126 Vietnamese (vi/vie), 2209 Volapük (vo/vol), 2215 Wolof (wo/wol), 2315 Xhosa (xh/xho), 2408 Yoruba (yo/yor), 2515 Zulu (zu/zul), 2621 Anguilla, 0109, ai Antigua and Barbuda, 0107, ag Argenti na, 0118, ar Armenia, 0113, am Australia, 0121, au Austria, 0120, at Azerbaijan, 0126, az Bahamas, 0219, bs Barbados, 0202, bb Belarus, 0225, by Belgium, 0205, be Belize, 0226, bz Bermuda, 0213, bm Brazil, 0218, br Bulgaria, 0207, bg Canada, 0301, ca Cayman Islands, 1125, ky Chile, 0312, cl China, 0314, cn Colombia, 0315, co Croatia, 0818, hr Cyprus, 0325, cy Czech Republic, 0326, cz Denmark, 0411, dk Dominica, 0413, dm Dominican Republic, 0415, do Estonia, 0505, ee Finland, 06 09, fi France, 0618, fr Georgia, 0705, ge Germany, 0405, de Greece, 0718, gr Greenland, 0712, gl Grenada, 0704, gd Guyana, 0725, gy Haiti, 0820, ht Hong Kong, 0811, hk Hungary, 0821, hu Iceland, 0919, is India, 0914, in Indonesia, 0904, id Ireland, 0905 , ie Israel, 0 912, il Italy, 0920, it Jamaica, 1013, jm Japan, 1016, jp Kazakhstan, 1126, kz Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr Kyrgyzstan, 1107, kg Latvia, 1222, lv Liechtenstein, 1209, li L ithuania, 1220, lt Luxembourg , 1221, lu Macedonia, the Former Yugosl av Republic of, 1311, mk Malaysia, 1325, my Malta, 1320, mt Mexico, 132 4, mx Moldova, Republic of, 1304, md Monaco, 1303, mc Montserrat, 131 9, ms Netherlands, 1412, nl New Zealand, 1426, nz Norway, 1415, no Pakistan, 1611, pk Peru, 1605, pe Philippines, 1608, ph Poland, 1612, pl Portugal, 1620, pt Puerto Rico, 1618, pr Romania, 1815, ro Russian Federation, 1821, ru Saint Kitts and Nevis, 1114, kn Saint Lucia, 1203, lc Saint Vincent a nd the Grenadines, 2203, vc San Marino, 1913, sm Singapor e, 1907, sg Slovakia, 1911, sk Slovenia, 1909, si Spain, 0519, es Suriname, 1918, sr Sweden, 1905, se Switzerland, 0308, ch Taiwan, Province of China, 2023, tw Tajikistan, 2010, tj Thailand, 2008, th Trinidad and Tobago, 2020, tt Tunisia, 2014, tn Turkey, 2018, t r Turkmenistan, 2013, tm Turks and Caicos Islands, 2003, tc Ukraine, 2101, ua United Kingdom, 0702, gb United States, 2119, us Uruguay, 2125, uy Uzbekistan, 2126, uz Venezuela, 2205, ve Virgin Islands, British, 2207, vg
07 57 En Specifications Note ⢠The specifications and design of this product are subject to change with out notice. ⢠This produc t includes FontAvenue î fonts licensed by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. Model BDP-51FD Type Blu-ray Disc PLAYER Rated volt age AC 120 V Rated frequency 60 Hz Power consumption 34 W Power consumption (standby) 0.5 W Weight 5.6 kg (12 lb 6 o z) External dimensions (inc luding projec ting parts) 420 m m (W) x 124 mm (H) x 3 61 mm (D) (16 9 / 16 in. (W) x 4 15 / 16 in. (H) x 14 1 / 4 in. (D)) Tolerable op erating temperat ure 5 ðC to 35 ðC ( 41 ðF to 95 ðF) Tolerable op erating humi dity 5 % to 85 % (no conde nsation) Output terminal s Video outputs Video 1 set, RCA jack (1.0 Vp-p (7 5 é )) S-Video 1 set, S-Video j ack: Y (luminance): 1.0 Vp-p (75 é ) C (color): 0.286 V p-p (75 é ) Component video 1 set, pin-plug jacks: Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 é ) P B , PR : 0.7 Vp-p (75 é ) HDMI 1 set, 19-pin (5 V, 150 mA) Audio outputs 2- channel (stereo) Numbe r of channels: 2, RCA jacks 7.1-channel (multi-chan nel: front le ft/ right, surround left /right, center, surround back lef t/right, subwoofer) Number of channels: 8 , RCA jacks Audio outp ut level 200 mVrms (1 kHz, â 20 dB) Frequency r esponse 4 Hz to 88 kHz (192 kHz sampling) S/N ratio 115 dB Dynamic range 103 dB Total harmonic dist ortion 0.0015 % Wow & flutter Below measurab le limits (ñ0.001 % W. PEAK) Digital audio outputs Optical 1 set, Optical digita l jack Coaxial 1 set, RCA ja ck Control Input 1 set, Minijack (3.5 ø)
07 58 En Cautions on use ï° Moving the player If you need to move this unit, first rem ove the disc, if thereâÂÂs one loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press ïµ STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby, checking that the POWER OFF indication on the front panel disp lay goes off. Wait at least 10 seconds. Lastly, disconnect the power cord. Never lift or move the unit during pla yback â discs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged. Place of installation Select a stable place near the TV and AV system to which the unit is connected. D o n o t p l a c e t h e p l a y e r o n t o p o f a T V o r c o l o r m o n i t o r . K e e p i t a w a y from cassett e decks or other compo nents easily affe cted by magne tism. Avoid the following types of places: ⢠Pla ces exposed t o direct sun light ⢠Humid or poorly ven tilated places ⢠Extremely hot o r cold places ⢠Places subject to vibration â¢D u s t y p l a c e s ⢠Places ex posed to so ot, steam or heat (in kitchens, etc.) ï° Do not place objects on top Do not place objects on top of the player. ï° Do not obstruct the ventilation holes Do not use the player on a shaggy ru g, bed, or sofa, and do not c over the player with a cloth, etc. Doin g so will prevent heat dissipation and could lead to damage. ï° Keep away from heat Do not place the player on top of an amplifier or other device generating heat. When insta lling in a rack, to avoid the heat generated by the amplifier and other devices, place it on a shelf below the amplifier whenever possible. Turn the power off when not using the player Depending on the conditio ns of the TV broadcast signals, str iped patterns may appear on the screen whe n the TV is turned on while the playerâÂÂs power is turned on. Th is is not a malfun ction with the player or TV. If this happens, turn the player âÂÂs power off. In the same way, noise may be heard in the sound of a radio. Condensation If the player is moved suddenly from a cold pla ce into a warm room (in winter, for example) or if the te mperature in the room in which the player is installed rises sudde nly due to a heater, etc., water droplets (condensation) may form inside (on operating parts and the lens). When condensatio n is present, the player will not operate properly and pla yback is not possibl e. Let the player stand at room temperature for 1 or 2 ho urs with the power turned on (the time depends on the extent of condensation ). The water droplets will dissipate and playback will become possible. Condensation can also occur in th e summer if the player is expo sed t o t h e d i r e c t w i n d f r o m a n a i r - c o n d itioner. If this happens, move the player to a different place. Cleaning the player Normally, wipe the player with a soft cl oth. For tough dirt, apply some neutral detergent diluted i n 5 to 6 parts water to a soft cloth, wring out thoroughly, wipe off the dirt, then wipe again with a dry cloth. Note that gettin g alcohol, thinner, benzene or insecticide on the player could cause the print and co ating to peel off. Also, avoid leaving rubber or vinyl products in contact with th e player for long periods of time, as this c ould damage t he cabinet. When using chemical-im pregnated wipes, etc., read the wip eâÂÂs cautions careful ly. Unplug the power cord from the power outlet when clea ning the player. ï° Caution for when the unit is installed in a rack with a glass door Do not press the ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE on the remote cont rol to open th e disc tray while the glass door is closed. The door will hamper the movement of the disc tray, and the unit could be damaged. Cleaning the pickup lens The playerâÂÂs lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malf unction du e to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-author ized service center. Although lens cleaner s for players are commercially available, we advise a gainst using them since some may dama ge the lens.
07 59 En Handling discs Do not use damaged (cracked or warped) discs. Do not scratch the discâÂÂs signal surface or let it get d irty. Do not load more than one disc into th e player at a time. Do not glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a pencil, ball- point pen or o ther sharp- tipped writin g instrument. These could all damage the disc. ï° Storing Always store discs in their case s, and place the cases vertically, avoiding places exposed to high temperature or humidity, direct sunlight or extremely low temperatur es. Be sure to read the cautions included with the disc. ï° Cleaning discs It may not be possible to play the di s c if there are fin gerprints or dust on it. In this case, using a cleanin g cloth, etc., to wipe the disc gently from the center towards the outer edge. Do n ot use a dirty cleaning cloth. Do not use benzene, thinn er or other volatile chemicals. Also do not use record spray or antistatic agents. For tough dirt, apply some wate r to a soft cloth, wring out thoroughly, wipe off th e dirt, then wipe off the moisture with a dry cloth. ï° Specially shaped discs Specially shaped discs (heart-shape d, hexagonal, etc.) cannot be used on this player. Never use such discs, as they will damage the player. ï° Condensation on discs If the disc is moved suddenly from a cold place into a warm room (in winter, for example), water droplets (condensation) may fo rm on the disc surface. Discs will not play properly if there is condensa tion on them. Carefully wipe off the water droplets from the disc surfa ce before using the disc. Glossary ï° Aspect ratio The ratio of a TV screenâÂÂs width to its height. Conventional TVs have an aspect ratio of 4:3, while high definition (HD) and widescreen TVs have an aspect ratio of 16:9. ï° Audio language Multiple audio tracks, for ex ample the original sound and the dubbed sound, can be recorded on BD-ROM or DVD-Video discs. Up to 32 languages (32 audio tracks) can be recorded on BD-ROM discs, up to 8 languages (8 audio tracks) on DVD-Video discs, so you can select the desired language when watching the disc. ï° AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition) The AVCHD is a high definition (HD) di gital video camera recorder format recordin g high-defin ition onto certai n media by usin g highly efficient codec technologies. ï° BD-J With BD-ROMs, it is possible to use Java applications to create highly interactive titles, for example including ga mes. Java and all Java-re lated trademar ks and logos are tradema rks or registered trademarks of Sun Mi crosystems, Inc., in the United States and other countrie s. ï° BDAV Of the BD format, the Audio Visua l Format Specifications for HD digital broadcast recording is referre d t o a s B D A V o n t h i s p l a y e r a n d in this operating inst ructions. ï° BDMV Of the BD format, the Audio Visual Format Specifications de signed for pre-package d high defini tion (H D) movie co ntents is referred to as BDMV on this play er and in this operating i nstructions. ï° Component video output This video out put terminal p r ovides clearer pictures when connected to a TV equipped with compo nent inputs. Component video signals consist of three signal s, Y, P B and PR . ï° Composite video output Signals m ixing the lumi nance sign al (Y) and th e color signal (C) so they can be transferred on a single cord are output from this terminal.
07 60 En ï° Deep Color This is one of the ca pabilities of HDMIâ¢. The player s supporting Deep Color can transmit a video si gnal with a color bit depth of greater than 8 bits per color component. Su btle color gradations can be reproduced when connecte d to a TV that s upports Deep Color. ï° Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is an audio format to record the sound in up to 5.1 c h a n n e l s w i t h a f r a c t i o n o f t h e a m o u n t o f d a t a a s c o m p a r e d t o l i n e a r PCM audio sign als. ï° Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Pl us is an audio form at for high-definition media . Built on Dolby Digital, it combines th e e fficiency and flexibil ity to provide high quality mult i-channel aud io. With BD-ROMs , up to 7.1 channels of digital sound can be recorded. ï° Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueH D is an audio form at using loss less coding. Wit h BD- ROMs, up to 8 channels can be recorded at 96 kHz/24 bits, o r up to 6 channels at 192 kHz/24 bits. ï° DRM A technol ogy for prot ecting copy ri ghted digital data. Digitized movies, images and music retain the same quality even when they are copie d or transfe rred repeat edly. DRM is a t echnolog y for restrictin g the dis tribution or p layback of such di gital data without the authorization of the copyright holder. ï° DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is an a udio format to record 48 kHz/24 bits audio signals in 5.1 channels. ï° DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an audi o format using lossy coding. It can record 7.1 channe ls at 96 kHz/24 bits. ï° DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an audio format usi ng lossless coding. With BD-ROMs, 7.1 channels can be recorded at 96 kHz/2 4 bits, or 5.1 channels at 192 kHz/24 bits. ï° Dynamic range This refers to the difference between the maximum and minimum level of the sound. The dynamic range is measured in units o f decibels (dB). When the dynamic range is compressed (Audio DRC), the minimum signal level is increased and the max imum signal level decreased. This way, the volume of l oud sounds such as explosio ns is reduced, while the sounds with a low level, su ch as human voices, are easier to listen to. ï° Frames and fields A frame is the unit for one o f the still pictures which compose motion pictures. One frame con sists of a picture of odd lines and a picture of even lines called fields in video signal with interl aced scan method (480i, 1080i, etc.). ï° HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) A technol ogy for prot ecting copy ri ghts that encrypts digital video signals. ï° HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) A digital interface standard for next-generation TVs expanding the DVI (Digital Video Interface) termin al used for example for computer displays. It allows transfer of non-comp ressed di gital video an d audio signals (Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Dig ital, DTS- HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Digital Surround, MPEG or linea r PCM) with a single connector. ï° Interactive audio The audio signals recorded in the titles of BD-ROMs. Th ey include for example the clickin g sound ma de when the men u screen is operated. ï° Interlaced scan With this method, one picture i s di splayed by scanning it twice. The odd lines are displayed in th e first pass, the even lines are displayed in the second, to form a single pi cture (frame). Interlaced scan is indicated in thi s player and operat ing instruct ions by an âÂÂiâ afte r the resolution value (for example, 480i). ï° Linear PCM This is referred as the audio signals that are not compressed, frequently used for DVD-Video disc s con taining musica ls or music concerts. This can also be indicated âÂÂ48 kHz/16 bitâÂÂ, âÂÂ96 kHzâÂÂ, etc. ï° MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group) The name of a fami ly of standard s used to encode video and audio signals in a digital compressed format. The video encoding standards include MPEG-1 Video, MPEG-2 Video, MPEG-4 Visual and MPEG-4 AVC. The audio enco ding standards include MPEG-1 Audio, MPEG-2 Audio and MPEG-2 AAC. ï° Multi angle Up to 9 camera angles can be recorded simultaneously on BD -ROM or DVD-Video discs, letting you wa tch the same scene from different angles. ï° Parental Lock Playback of the con tents of some BD-ROM o r DVD-Video disc s can be restricted, for example for discs containin g scenes of violence. With BD-ROM discs, an age rest riction ca n be set to restric t playback. Playing DVD-Video title can be restricted by setting the parental lock level. ï° Picture-in-Picture (P-in-P) This is a fun ction for sup erimposin g a sub video on the main video. Some BD-ROMs include secondary video, which can be superimposed on the prima ry video. ï° Progressive scan With this method, one picture is consisted of a singl e picture, without dividing it in two pictur es. Progressive scan provides clear pictures with no flicker, in pa rtic ular for sti ll pictures that contain much text, graphics, or horizont al lines. Progressive scan is indicated in this player and operating instr uctions by a âÂÂp â after the resolution value (for example, 480p). ï° Region number A number assigned to Blu-ray Disc Players, BD-ROM and DVD- Video discs according to the region in which they are sold. A disc can be played if the region numbers indicated on the disc include the number set for the player or if âÂÂALLâ is indicated.
07 61 En ï° S-Video output An output t erminal for tra nsmitting sep arate lum inance (Y) and color (C) signals over a single cord. It offers clearer picture s than the composite video output. ï° Secondary audio Some BD-ROMs include sub audio streams mixed with the main audio. These sub audio streams are called âÂÂse condary audioâÂÂ. On some discs this secondary audio is recorded as the audio for the secondary video. ï° Secondary video Some BD-ROMs include sub videos superimposed on the main videos using the Picture-in-Picture function. These sub videos are called âÂÂsecondary videoâÂÂ. ï° Subtitle language This refers to the language o f the subtitles often used on movies. Up to 255 languages (255 types of subtitles) can be recorded on BD- ROM discs, 32 languages (32 types of subtitles) on DVD-Vid eo discs, so you can select the desired su btitle when watching t he disc. ï° VC-1 A video codec developed by Microsoft and standar dized by the Society of Motion Picture and Tel evision Engineers (SM PTE). Some BDs include videos encode d in this codec.
07 62 En Licenses The licenses for the software used on this player a re shown below. ï° libxml2 The MIT License Copyright é <year> <copyright holders> Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person ob taining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicens e, and/ or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do s o, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permissi on notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of t he Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", W ITHOUT WARR ANTY OF ANY KIND, EX PRESS OR IMPLIED, INC LUDING BUT NOT LI MITED TO THE WARRA NTIES OF MERCHANTABILI TY, FITNESS F OR A PARTICULAR P URPOSE AND NONI NFRINGEM ENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE A UTHORS OR COPYRIGH T HOLDERS BE LI ABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LI ABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TO RT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONN ECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OT HER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. ï° OpenSSL The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual licen se, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actu ally both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issue s related to OpenSSL please contact openssl- core@openssl.org. OpenSSL License Copyright é 1998-2007 The Ope nSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in sourc e and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following cond itions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must re tain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaime r in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising ma terials mentioning featur es or use of this software must displa y the following acknowledgment: "This product includes soft ware developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSS L Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "Op enSSL Pr oject" must not be used to endorse or pr omote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org. 5. Products derive d from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenS SL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the followi ng acknowledgment: "This product includes so ftware developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (htt p://www.openssl.org/)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PR OVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJ ECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRE SSED OR IMPLIED WARRANT IES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, TH E IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCH ANTABILITY AND FI TNESS FOR A PARTICULA R PURPOSE ARE DISCLA IMED. IN NO EVENT SHA LL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR IT S CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDI RECT, INCIDENT AL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR C ONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUD ING, BUT NOT L IMITED T O, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SE RVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINE SS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSE D AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILIT Y, WHETHER IN CONT RACT, STRICT LIAB ILITY, OR TORT (INCLU DING NEGLIGE NCE OR OTHERWISE) A RISING IN ANY WAY OU T OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EV EN IF ADVISED OF THE POSS IBILITY OF SUCH DAM AGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written b y Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Original SSLeay Licens e Copyright é 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation writ ten by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to confor m with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non- commercial use as long as the following co nditions are aheared to. The following c onditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not ju st the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this dist ribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@crypts oft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in t he code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in sourc e and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following cond itions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must re tain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaime r in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising ma terials mentioning featur es or use of this software must displa y the followin g acknowledgement: "This produ ct includes cryptographi c software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-). 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must includ e an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@c ryptsoft.co m)" THIS SOFTWARE I S PROVIDED BY ERIC Y OUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR I MPLIED WARRANTIES, I NCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IM PLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILIT Y AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE A RE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHAL L THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL , SPECIAL, EXEMPLA RY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DA MAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCU REMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION ) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIAB IL ITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRIC T LIABIL ITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGE NCE OR OTHERWIS E) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF TH IS SO FTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF T HE POSSIBILIT Y OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any pu blically availabl e version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [inc luding the GNU Public Licence.] ï° zlib This software is based in part on z lib s ee http://www.zlib.net for information. ï° FreeType2 The FreeType Project LICENSE 2006-Jan-27 Copyright 1996-2 002, 2006 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
07 63 En Introduction The FreeType Project i s distributed in several archive packages; so me of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font eng ine, various tools and c ontributions which rely on, or relate to, the FreeType Project. This license applies to all files found in such packages, and which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license a ffects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs, documentation and makefiles, at the very least. This license was inspired by the BSD, Arti stic, and IJG (Independent JPEG Group) lic enses, which all enco urage inclusion and us e of free software in commercial and freeware products alike. As a conseq uence, its main points are that: ⢠We don't promise that this software works. However, we will be interested in any kind of bu g reports.('as is' distribution) ⢠You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or full form, without having to pay us.('royalty-free' usage) ⢠You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it , or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge somew here in your documentation that you have used the FreeType code.('credits') We specifically permit and encourage the in clusion of this software, with or without modificati ons, in commercial p roducts. We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType Project and assume no liability related to The FreeType Project. Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for a credit/d isclaimer to use in compliance wi th this license . We thus enco urage you to use the following text: Portions of this software are copyright é <year> The Fr eeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved. Please replace <year> with the value fr om the FreeType version you a ctually use. Legal Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license, th e terms 'packa ge', 'FreeType Project', and 'FreeType archive' re fer to the set of files originally d istributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the 'FreeType Project' , be they named as alpha, beta or final release. 'You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where 'using' is a generic term incl uding compiling the project's so urce code as well as linking it to form a 'program' or 'executable' . This program is referred to as 'a program using the FreeType engine'. This license applies to all files distribute d in the original FreeType Project, includ ing all source code, binaries and documen tation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its original, unmodified form as distri buted in the origina l archive. If you are uns ure whether or not a particular fi le is covered by this licen se, you must contact us to verify this. The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 199 6-2000 by David Turner, Ro bert Wilhelm, and Werner Lember g. All rights reserved except as specified below. 1. No Warr anty THE FREETYPE PROJ ECT IS PROVIDED 'AS IS' WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF AN Y KIND, EITHER EX PRESS OR IMPLI ED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL ITY AND FITN ESS FOR A PARTI CULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL AN Y OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HO LDERS BE LIABLE FO R ANY DAMAGES C AUSED BY THE USE O R THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE F REETYPE PROJE CT. 2. Redistri bution This license grants a worldwide, royalty-fr ee, perpetual and irr evocable right and licen se to use, execute, perform, compile, d isplay, cop y, create derivative works of, distrib ute and sublicens e the FreeTyp e Project (in bo th source and object code forms) and der ivative works thereof for any pu rp ose; and to authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted herein, subject to the following conditions: ⢠Redistribution of source code must retain this license file ('FTL.TXT') unaltered; an y additions, deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. The copyright notices of the unalte red, original files must be preserved in all copies of source files. ⢠Redistribution in binary form mu st provide a disclaimer that states that the so ftware is based in part of the work of the Free Type Team, in the distribution documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeTy pe web page in your documentation, though this isn't mandatory. These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified files. If you use our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid to us. 3. Advertising Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional purposes without specific prior written permission. W e suggest, but do not r equire, tha t you use on e or more of th e following phrases to refer to this s oftware in your docum entati on or advertising m aterials: 'FreeType Project', 'FreeType Engine', 'FreeTyp e library', or 'FreeType Distribution'. As you have not signed this licen se, you are not required to accept it. However, as the FreeType Project is copyrighted materia l, only this license, or another one contracted with the authors, grants you the right to us e, distri bute, and modify it. Therefore, by using, dist ributing, or modi fying the FreeType Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms of th is license. 4. Contacts There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: ⢠freetype@nongnu.org Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as future and wanted additions to the library and distribution. If you are looking for support, start in this list if you haven't found anything to help you in t he documentation. ⢠freetype-devel@nongnu. org Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, spec ific licenses, porting, etc. Our home page can be found at http://www.freetype.org ï° libpng COPYRIGHT NOTIC E, DISCLAIMER, and LIC ENSE: If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this sentence. libpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.2.26, April 2, 2008, are Cop yright é 2004, 2006-2008 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, a nd are distribut ed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.2.5 with the followi ng individual added to the lis t of Contributing Authors Cosmin Truta libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 - October 3, 2002, are Copyright é 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-P ehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with th e following individuals added to th e list of Contributing Authors Simon-Pierre Cadi eux Eric S. Raymond Gilles Vollant and with the following additions to the disclaimer: There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and th e entire risk of satisfactory quality, pe rformance, accuracy, and effort is with the user. libpng versions 0.97, January 19 98, thro ugh 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, ar e Copyright é 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are di stributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the li st of Contributing Authors: Tom Lan e Glenn Randers-Pehrson Willem van Schaik
07 64 En libpng versions 0.89, June 199 6, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright é 1996, 199 7 An dreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng- 0.88, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: John Bowler Kevin Bracey Sam Bushell Magnus Holmgren Greg Roelofs Tom Tanner libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Cop yright é 1995 , 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc. For the purposes of this copyright and license, "Contributing Author s" is defined as the following set of individuals: Andreas Dilge r Dave Martindale Guy Eric Schalnat Paul Schmidt Tim Wegn er The PNG Reference Library is supplied "A S IS ". The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed o r implied, including, w ithout limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of fi tness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, I nc. assume no liabili ty for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages, which may result from the use of th e PNG Reference L ibrary, even if advised of the possibi lity of such damage. Permission is hereby granted to use, copy , modify, and distribute this source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, withou t fee, subject to the following restrictions: 1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented. 2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and mu st not be misrepresented as being the original source. 3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altere d from any source or alte red source distribution. The Contributing Author s and Group 42, Inc. spec ifically permit, without fee, and e ncour age the use of this source code as a c o mponent to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this source code in a p rod uct, acknowledgment is not requ ired but would be appreciated. A "png_get_copyright" function is availabl e, for convenient use in "about" boxes an d the like: printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NU LL));Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the files "pngbar.png" an d "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31). Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark of the Open Source Initiative. Glenn Randers-Pehrson glennrp at users. sourceforge.net 2-Apr-08 ï° libjpg The Independent JPEG Group's JPEG software README for release 6b of 27-Mar -1998 This distribution contains the sixth public release of the Independent JPEG Group's free JPEG software. You are welcome to re di stribute this software and to use it for any purpose, subject to the con ditions under LEGAL ISSUES, below. Serious users of this software (particular ly those incorporating it into larger prog rams) should contact IJG at jpeg-info@uunet .uu.net to be added to our electronic mailing list. Mailing list members are notified of updates and have a chance to participate in technical discussions, etc. This software is the work of Tom Lane, Philip Gladstone, Jim Bo ucher, Lee Crocker, Julian Ming uillon, Lu is Ortiz, George Philli ps, Davide Rossi , Guido Vollbeding, Ge' Weijers, and other members of the Independent JPEG Group. IJG is not affiliated with the official ISO JPEG standards co mmittee. DOCUMENTATION ROADMAP This file contains the followin g sections: OVERVIEW General description of J PEG and the IJG software. LEGAL ISSUES Copyright, lack of warranty, terms of distribution. REFERENCES Where to learn more about JPEG. ARCHIVE LOCATIONS Where to find ne wer versions of this software. RELATED SOFTWARE Other stuff you should get. FILE FORMAT WARS Software *not* to get. TO DO Plans for future IJG releases. Other documentation files in the distribution are: User documentation: install.doc How to configure and install the IJG software. usage.doc Usage instructions for cjpeg, djpeg, jpegtran, rdjpgcom, and wrjpgco m. *.1 Unix-style man pages for programs (same info as usage.doc). wizard.doc Advanced usage instru ctions for JPEG wizards only. change.log Version-to-version change highlights. Programmer and internal documentation: libjpeg.doc How to use the JPEG library in your own programs. example.c Sample code for calling the JPEG library. structure.doc Overview of the JPEG library's internal structure. filelist.doc Road map of IJG files. coderules.doc Coding style rules --- pl ease read if you contribute code. Please read at least the files install.doc and usage.doc. Useful information can also be found in the JPEG FAQ (Frequent ly Aske d Questions) article. See ARCHIVE LOCATIONS below to find out where to obtain the FAQ article. If you want to understand how the JPEG code works, we suggest re ading one or more of the REFERE NCES, then looking at th e docume ntation files (in roughly the order listed) before divi ng into the cod e. OVERVI EW This package contains C software to implem ent JPE G image compression and dec ompression . JPEG (pronounced "jay-peg") is a standa rdized compression method for full-color and gray-scale images. JPEG is intended for compressing re al-world scenes; line drawings, cartoons and other non-rea listic images are not its strong suit. JPEG is lossy, meaning that the output image is not exactly identical to the in put image. Hence you must not use JPEG if you have to have identical output bits. However, on typical photographic images, very good c ompression levels can be obtained with no visible chan ge, and remarkably high compressi on levels are possible if you can tolera te a low-quality image. For more details, see the re ferences , or just experiment with various compression settings. This software implements JPEG baseline, ex tended-sequential, and progre ss ive compression processes. Provision is made for suppo rting all variants of these processes, although some uncommon parameter settings aren't implemented yet. For legal reasons, we are not distributing code for the arithmetic-coding variants of JPEG; see LEGAL ISSUES. We have made no provisio n for supp orting the hierarchical or lo ssless processes define d in the standard. We provide a set of li brary routines for re ading and writing JPEG image files, plus t wo sample applications "cjpe g" and "djpeg" , which use the library to perform conversion between JPEG and some other popular imag e file formats. The library is intended to be reused in ot her applications.
07 65 En In order to support file conversion and viewing software, we have included considerable function ality bey ond the bare JPEG codi ng/decoding capability; for example, the color quantization modules are not strictly part of JPEG decoding , but they are essential for output to colormapp ed file format s or colormapped displays. Th ese extra functions can be compiled out of the library if not required for a particular application. We have also included jpegtran, a ut ility for lossless transcoding between different JPEG processes, and "rdjpg com" and "wrjpgcom", two simple applic ations for inserting and extracti ng textual comments in JFIF fi les. The emphasis in designing this software has been on achiev ing portability and flexibility, while al so making it fast enough to be useful. In particular , the software is not intended to be read as a tutorial on JPEG . (See the REFERE NCES section for introductory material.) Rather, it is intended to be reliable, portable, in dustrial-strength code. We do not claim to have achieved that goal in ev ery aspect of the software, but we st rive for it. We welcome the use of this software as a component of commercial products. N o royalty is requir ed, but we do ask for an acknowl edgement in produc t docum entation, as described under LEGAL I SSUES. LEGAL ISSUES In plain English: 1. We don't promise that this software works. (B ut if you find any bugs, please let us know!) 2. You can use this software for whatever you want. You don't have to pay us. 3. You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it in a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your document ation that yo u've used the IJG code. In legalese: The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either expre ss or implied, with respect to this software, its quality, accuracy , merchantability, or fitness for a particul ar purpose. This software is p rovided "AS IS", and you, its us er, assume the entire risk as to its quality and accuracy. This software is copyright é 1991-1998 , Thomas G. Lane. All Rights Reserved except as specified be low. Permission is hereby granted to use, copy , modify, and distribute this software (or portions thereof) for any purpose, without fee, subject to thes e conditions: (1) If any part of the source code for this software is distribute d, t he n th is REA DM E fi le mus t be include d, with this copyright and no-warranty notice unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes to the original files must be clearly in dicat ed in ac companyin g docum entation . (2) If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying documentation must state that "this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group". (3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts full responsibility for any undesirable consequences ; the authors accept NO LIABILITY for damages of any kin d. These conditions apply to any software deri ved from or based on the IJG code, not ju st to the unmodified library. If you use ou r work, you ought to acknowledge us. Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author's name or company name in advertising or publicity relating to this sof tware or products derived from it. Th is software may be referred to only as "t he Independent JPEG Group's software". We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of commercia l products, provided that all warranty o r liability cla ims are assumed by the product vendor. ansi2knr.c is included in this distribution by permission of L. Peter Deutsch, sole proprietor of its copyright holder, Aladdin En terprises of Menlo Park, CA. ansi2knr.c is NOT covered by the above copyright and conditions, but instead by the usual distribution terms of the Free Software Foundation; principally, tha t you must include source code if you redistribute it. (See the file ansi2knr.c for full deta ils.) However, since ansi2knr.c is not needed as part of any program generated from the IJG code, this does not limit you more than the foregoing paragraphs do. The Unix configuration script "configure" wa s produced with GNU A utoconf. It is copy right by the Free Software Foundation but i s freely distributable. The same holds for its supporting scripts (c onfig.guess, conf ig.sub, ltcon fig, ltmain.sh). Another suppor t script, install-sh, is copyright by M.I .T. but is also freely distributable. I t appears that the arithmetic coding option of the JPEG spec is covered by patents owned by IBM, AT&T, and Mitsubishi. Hence a rithmetic coding cannot legally be used without obtaining one or more licenses. For this reason, support for arithmetic coding has been removed from the free JPEG soft ware. (Since ari thmetic coding provide s only a marginal gain over the unpatented Huffman mode, it is un likely that very many implementations will support it.) So far a s we are aware, there are no patent restrictions on the remaining code. The IJG distribution formerly included code to read and write GIF files. To avoid enta nglement with the Unisys LZW patent, GIF r eading support has been removed altogether, and the GIF writer has been simplified to produce uncompressed GIFs. T his technique does not use the LZW algorithm; the resulting GIF files are larger than usual, but are readable by all standard GIF decoders. We are re quired to st ate that "The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of CompuServe Inc orporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of Comp uServe Incorporated. " REFERE NCES We highly recommend reading one or more of these references before trying to under stand the innards of the JPEG software. The best short technical introduction to the JPEG compression algorithm is Wallace, Gregory K. "The JPE G Still Picture Compr ession Standard", Communications of the ACM, April 19 91 (vol. 34 no. 4), pp. 30-44. (Adjacent articles in that issue discuss MPEG motion p icture co mpression, applications of JPEG, and relate d topics.) If you don 't have the CACM issu e ha ndy, a Post Script file containing a revised version of Walla ce's article is available at ftp://ftp.uu.ne t/graphics/jpeg/wallace.ps.gz. The file ( actually a preprint for an article that appeared in IEEE Trans. Consumer Electronics) omits the sample images that appeared in CACM, but it includes corrections and some added mat erial. Note: the Wal lace article is copyrigh t ACM and IE EE, and it ma y no t be used for commercial purposes. A somewhat less technical, more leisurely intr oduction to JPEG can be found in The Data Compression Book by Mark Nelson and Jea n-loup Gailly, published by M&T Books (New York), 2nd ed. 1996, ISBN 1-55851- 434-1. This book provides good explanations and example C code for a multitude of compression methods inc luding JPEG. It is an excellent source if you are comfortable reading C code but don't know much about data compression in general. The book 's JPEG sample code is far from industrial- strength , but w hen you are ready to look at a full implementation, yo u've got one here... The best full description of JPEG is the textbook "JPEG Still Im age Data Compression Standard" by William B. Pennebaker and Joa n L. Mitchell, published by Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1993, ISBN 0-442-01272-1. Price US $59.95, 638 pp . The book includes the complete text of the ISO JPEG standards (DIS 10918-1 and draft DIS 1 0918-2). This is by far the most complete exposition of JPEG in existence, and we highly recommend it. The JPEG standard itself is not available electronically; you must order a pa per copy through ISO or ITU. (Unless you feel a ne ed to own a certified official copy, we recommend buying the Pennebaker an d Mitchell book instead; it's much cheaper and includes a great deal of useful exp lanatory ma terial.) In the USA, copies of the standard may be ordered from ANSI Sales at (212) 642-4900, or from Global Engineering Documents at (800) 854-7179. (AN SI doesn' t take credit card orders, but Global does.) It's not cheap: as of 19 92, ANSI was charging $95 for Pa rt 1 and $47 for Part 2, plus 7% shipping/handlin g. Th e standard is divided into two pa rts, Part 1 being the actual specification, while Part 2 covers compliance testing meth ods. Part 1 is titled "Digital Compression and Coding of Conti nuous-tone Still Images, Part 1: Requirements and guidelines" and has doc ument numbers ISO/IEC IS 10918-1, ITU-T T.81. Part 2 is titled "Digital Compression and Coding of Continuous-tone Still Images, Part 2: Compliance testing" and has docume nt numbers ISO/IEC IS 10 918-2, ITU-T T.83. Some extensions to the original JPEG stan dard are defined in JPEG Part 3, a newer ISO standard numbered ISO/IEC IS 10918-3 and ITU-T T.84. IJG currently does not support any Part 3 extensions. The JPEG standard does not specify all deta ils of an in terchangeable file format. Fo r the omitted details we follow the "JFIF" conventions, rev ision 1.02. A c opy of the JFIF spec is available from: Literature Department C-Cube Microsystems, Inc. 1778 McCarthy Blvd. Milpitas, CA 95035 phone (408) 944-6300, fax (408) 944-6314 A PostScript version of this document is available by FTP at ftp: //ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jfif .ps.gz. There is also a plain t ext version at ftp:// ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/ jfif.txt.gz, but it is missing the figures.
07 66 En The TIFF 6.0 file format specif ication can be obtained by FTP from ftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/ti ff/TIFF6.ps.gz. The JPE G incorp oration scheme found in the TIFF 6.0 spec of 3-June-92 ha s a number of serious proble ms. IJG does n ot recommend use of the TIFF 6. 0 design (TIF F Compression t ag 6). Instea d , we recommend the JPEG design proposed by TIFF Technical Note #2 (Compressi on tag 7). Copies of this Note can be ob tained from ftp.sgi.com or from ftp://ftp. uu.net/graphics/jpeg/. It is expected that the next revision of the TIFF spec will replace the 6.0 JPE G desi gn with the Note's design. Alth ough IJG's own code does not su pport TIFF/JPEG, the fr ee libtiff library uses our library to implement TIFF/JPEG per the Note. libtiff is available from ftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/tiff/. ARCHIVE LOCA TIONS The "official" archive site for this softwa re is ftp.uu. net (Internet ad dress 192.48.96.9). The most recent released version ca n always be found there in di rectory graphics/ jpeg. This particular v ersion will be archived as ftp://ftp.uu.ne t/graphics/jpeg/jpegsr c.v6b. tar.gz. If you don't have direc t I nternet access, UUNET's archives are also available via UUCP; contact help@uunet.uu.net for information on retrieving files that way. Numerous Internet sites maintain c opies of the UUNET files. Ho wever, only ftp.uu.ne t is guaranteed to have the latest official versi on. You can also obtain this software in DOS- compatible "zip" archive format from the Si mTel archives (ftp://ftp.simtel.net/pub/sim telnet/msdos/graphics/), or on CompuServe in the Graphics Support forum (GO CIS:GRAPHS UP), library 12 JPEG Tools. Again, these versions may sometimes lag behind the ftp. uu.net release. The JPEG FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) article is a useful so urce of general information about JPEG. It is updated constantl y and therefore is not included in this distribution. The FAQ is posted every two weeks to Usenet newsgr oups comp.graphics.misc, news.answers, and other groups. It is available on the World Wide Web at http://www.faqs.org/faqs/jpeg-faq/ and other news.answers archive sites, including the official news. answers archive at rtfm.mi t.edu: ftp://rtfm.mit.edu/pub/us enet/ news.answers/jpeg-faq/. If yo u don't have Web or FTP ac cess, send e-mail to mail-server@rtfm.mit.edu with body send usenet/news.an swers/jpeg-faq/part1 send usenet/news.an swers/jpeg-faq/part2 RELATED SO FTWARE Numerous viewing and image m anipulation prog rams now support JPEG. (Quite a few of them use this library to do so.) The JPEG FA Q described above lists some of the more popular free and shareware viewers, and tells where to obtain them on Internet. If you are on a Unix machine, we highly recommend Jef Poskanzer' s free PBMPLUS software, which pr ovides many useful operations on PPM-format image files. In particular, it can convert PPM images to an d from a wide range of other formats, thus making cjpeg/djpeg considerably more usef ul. The latest version is distributed by the NetPBM group, and is available from numerous sites, notab ly ftp://wuarchive.wustl.edu/graphic s/graphics/packages/NetPBM/. U nfortunately PBMPLUS/NETPBM is not nearly as portable as the IJG softwa re is; you are likely to have difficulty making it work on any non-Unix machine. A different free JPEG implementation, writte n by the PVRG group at Stanford, is avai lable from ftp://havefun.stanford.edu/pub/j peg/. T his program i s designe d for researc h and experimentation rather than pr oduction use; it is slower, harder to use, an d less portable than the IJG code, but it is eas ier to read and modify . Also, th e PVRG code supports lossless JPEG, which we do not. (On the other hand, it doesn't do progressive JPEG.) FILE FORMAT WARS Some JPEG programs produce files that are not compatible with our library. The root of the problem is that the ISO JPEG committ ee failed to specify a concrete file format. Some vendors "filled in the blanks" on thei r own, creating proprietary formats that no one else could read. (For example, none of th e early co mmercial JP EG implementations for the Macintosh were able to exchange compressed files.) The file format we have adopted is called JFIF (see REFERENCES). Th is format has been agreed to by a number of major commercial JPEG vendors, and it has become the de facto standard. JFIF is a minimal or "low end" representa tion. We recommend the use of TIFF/JPEG (TIFF revision 6.0 as m odified by TIFF Tec hnical Note # 2) for "high end" applications that need to record a lot of additional data about an image. TIFF/JPEG is fairly new and not yet widely supported, unfortunately. The upcoming JPEG Part 3 standard defines a file format called SPIFF . SPIFF is intero perable with JF IF, in the sense that most JFIF decoders should be able to read the most common variant of SPIFF. SPIFF has som e technical advantages over JFIF, but its ma jor claim to fame is simply that it is a n official standard rather than an informal one. At this point it is unclear whether SPIFF will supersede JFIF or whether JFIF wi ll remain the de-facto standard. IJG inten ds to support SPIFF once the standard is frozen, but we have not d ecided whether it should become our defa ult output format or not. (In any case, our decoder will remain capable of reading JFIF indefinitely.) Various proprietary file formats incorporatin g JPEG compression also exist. We have li ttle or no sympathy for the existence of these f ormats. Inde ed, one of th e original reasons for developing this free software was to help force convergence on common, op en format standards for JPEG files. Don't use a proprietary file format! TO DO The major thrust for v7 will proba bly be improvement of visual qu ality. The curr ent method for sc aling the quantization tables is known not to be very good at low Q values. We also intend to investigate block boundary smoothing, "poor ma n's variable quantization", and other means of improving quality-vs-file-size performance without sacrificing compatibility. In future versions, we are consid ering supporting some of the upcoming JP EG Part 3 extensions --- principally, variable quantization and the SPIFF file format. As always, speeding things up is of great interest. Please send bug reports, offers of help , etc. to jpeg-info@uunet.uu.net. ï° GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright é 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Str eet, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Pu bl ic License is intended to gua rantee your freedom to share and change free software - to make sure the so ftware is free for all its users. This General Public Lice nse ap plies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to usin g it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are refe rring to freedom, not price. Our General Pub lic Licenses are designed to make sure t hat you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish ), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, t hat you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you c an do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make re strictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictio ns translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copi es of the software, or if you modify it. For examp le, if you dis tribute co pies of such a program, w hether grati s or for a fe e, you must give the reci pients all t he righ ts that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source c ode. And you mu st show them t hese terms so they know thei r rights. We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the softwa re, and (2) offer you this licens e which gives you legal permiss ion to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make ce rtain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for th is free software. If the software is modified by someone el se and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems int roduced by others will not refl ect on the original authors' reputations. Finally, any free program is threatened consta ntly by software patents. We wish to avoi d the danger that redistributors of a fr ee program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the pr ogram proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precis e terms a nd cond itions for c opying, distribut ion and m odificatio n follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyri ght holder saying it may be dis t ributed under the terms of this Gener al Public License. The "Program", below, refe rs to any such program or work, and a "wor k based on the Program " means either the Pr ogram or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or t ranslated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in th e term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
07 67 En Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this L i cense; they are outs ide its scope. The a ct of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having b een made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim cop i es of the Program's source c ode as you re ce ive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copy right notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any war ranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a co py of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in excha nge for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any port ion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy an d distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet a ll of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or a ny part thereof, to be lic ensed as a whole at no charge to all third part ies under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads co mmands interactively when run, you must ca us e it, when started running for such inte ractive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or e lse, saying that you pro vide a warranty) and that users ma y redistribute the program under these conditions, and tellin g the user how to view a copy of this L icense. (Exc eption: if th e Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announc ement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) These requirements apply to the modifie d wo rk as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the P rogra m, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themse lves, then this License, and its terms, do no t apply to those sections when you distrib ute them as separate works. But w hen you distribute the same sections as part of a whole w hich is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work wri tten entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Pr ogram with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) o n a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the ot her work under the scope of this Licens e. 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above p rovided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corr espond ing machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Secti ons 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b) A ccompany it with a wr itten offer, valid fo r at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your co st of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable co py of the corresponding source code, to be dis tributed under the terms of Sec tions 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accom pany it with the information you rece ived as to the offer to distribute corres ponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord wit h Subsecti on b ab ove.) The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work fo r making modifications to it. For an executable work, complet e source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface d efinition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exceptio n, the source code distributed nee d not in clude anything that is norma lly distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major compone nts (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operat ing system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies th e exe cutable. If distribution of executable or object co de is made by offering access to copy from a designated plac e, then offering equivale nt access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of th e source code, even though third parties ar e n ot compelled to copy the source along with the object co de. 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program excep t as expressly provided und er this License. Any atte mpt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically ter minate your rights under this License. Howev er, parties who have r eceived copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such p arties remain in full complianc e. 5. You are not required to accept this Lic ens e, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to mod ify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions ar e prohibited by law if you do no t accept this License. Therefore, by m odifying or distributin g the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this Lice nse to do so, and all its ter ms an d conditions for copying, distributing o r modifying the Program or works based on it. 6. Each time you re distribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatica lly receives a license fro m the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. Yo u may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compli ance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or fo r any other reason (not lim ited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherw ise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from th e conditions of t his License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligat ions under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a pate nt license would not permit royalty-free redi stribution of the Program by all those w ho receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain en tirely from distribution of the Program. If any por tion of th is sectio n is held in valid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section i s intended to ap ply and the section as a whole is intended to app ly in other circumstances. It is not the purp ose of this section to induce you to infrin ge any patents or other property ri ght cla ims or to contest v alidi ty of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software di stributio n syste m, which is impl eme nted by public license pract ices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distribut ed through th at system in reliance on c onsistent application of that syste m; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot i mpose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequen ce of the rest of this License. 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by pa tents or by c opyrighted interfac es, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an ex plicit geographical distribution limitatio n excluding those countries, so that dist ribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. I n such case, this License incorporat es the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 9. The Free Software Founda tion may publish re vised and/ or new versions of the General Pu blic License from time to time. Such ne w versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in deta il to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies t o it and "any later version", you have the option of following the t erms and conditions either of that version or of any later versio n published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever publis hed by the Free Software Foundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose di stribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software w hich is co pyrighted by the Free Software Fo undation, write to t he Free Soft ware Found ation; we sometime s make exce pti ons for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 11. BECAUSE THE PROG RAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRA NTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTE D BY APPLICABLE LA W. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE ST ATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AN D/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EX PRESSED OR IMPLI ED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIM ITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCH ANTABILITY AND FI TNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOS E. THE ENTIRE RIS K AS TO THE QUALI TY AND PERFORMANC E OF THE PROGRAM IS WI TH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NE CE SSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION .
07 68 En 12. IN NO EVEN T UNLESS REQUIR ED BY APPLICABLE L AW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRI GHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTH ER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUT E THE PROGRAM AS PERMI TTED ABOVE, BE LIA BLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GEN ERAL, SPECIAL, INCI DENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIA L DAMAGES ARISIN G OUT OF THE USE OR INABI LITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITE D TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED IN ACCURATE OR LOS SES SUSTAIN ED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS) , EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVI SED OF THE POSSIBILIT Y OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develo p a new pro gram, and y ou want it t o be of the gr eatest pos sible use to t he public, t he best way to achieve th is is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and chan ge under t hese terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most eff ectively convey the excl usion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" lin e and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it d oes.> Copyright é <year> <name of author> This program is free software; you can redi stribute it and/or modify it under the te rms of the GNU General Public License as pu blished by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the L icens e, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hop e that it will be useful , but WITH OUT ANY WARRANTY; withou t even the implie d warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNE SS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Publi c License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software F oundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA. Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: Gnomovision version 69, Copyright é year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANT Y; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistr ibute it under cert ain conditions; type `show c' for details. The hypothetical commands `show w' and `sh ow c' should show the appropriate parts of th e General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items - whatever suit s your program. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your sc hool, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for th e program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovisio n' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietar y programs. If your program is a subrouti ne library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications wi th the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. ï° GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright é 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the L esser GPL. It also coun ts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, versi on 2, hence the version number 2.1.] Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Publ ic Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software - to make sure the software is free for all it s users. This license, the Lesser General Public Lic ense, applies to some specially designated software packages - typically lib raries - of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. Yo u can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary Ge neral Public Lice nse is the better strategy to use in any particul ar case, based on the explanations below. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of us e, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrend er these rights. These re strictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copie s of the library or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whethe r grat is or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source c ode. If you link other code with the library, you mu st provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink t hem with the library after making changes to the library and re compiling it . And you must show them these terms so they know their right s. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal pe rmission to copy, distribute a nd/or modify the library. To protect each distributor, we want to ma ke it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someon e else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation wil l not be af fected by problems that might be introduced b y others. Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the e xistence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cann ot effectiv ely restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a re strictive license fr om a patent holder. Therefor e, we insist that any patent license obtained for a ve rsion of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. Most GNU software, includin g some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Pu blic License. This license, the GNU Lesse r General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the or dinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to perm it linking those libraries into non-free programs. When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or us ing a shared library, the comb ination of the two is legally sp eaking a combined work, a de rivative of the original library. The ordinary General Pub lic License therefore permits such linking only if the entire com bination fits its cr iteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits m ore lax criteria for linking other code with the library. We call this l icense the "Lesser " General Public Li cense because i t does Less to protec t the user's fre edom than the ordi nary G eneral Public License . It also provides other free software developers Less of an advant age over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the o rdinary General Publ ic License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license pr ovid es advantages in certain special circumstances. For exampl e, on rare occasi ons, there ma y be a special ne ed to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as wi dely used non-free libr aries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public Lic ense. I n o t h e r c a s e s , p e r m i s s i o n t o u s e a p a r t i c u l a r l i b r a r y i n n o n - f r e e p r o g r a m s e n a b l e s a g r e a t e r n u m b e r o f p e o p l e t o u s e a l a r g e b ody of fr ee software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non- free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its va riant, the GN U Linu x operati ng syste m. Although the Lesser General Public License is L ess protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that prog ram using a modified vers ion of th e Library. The precise terms and con ditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference betwe en a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.
07 69 En TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License Agreeme nt applies to any software library or othe r program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holde r or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (al so called "thi s License"). Each licen see is address ed as "you". A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application prog rams (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. Th e " L ib ra r y" , b e lo w, r ef e rs to a ny su c h s of t wa r e l ib ra r y o r work which has been distributed und er these terms. A "work based o n the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a wor k containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another la nguage. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source co de means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition fi les, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installat ion of the libr ary. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covere d by this Li cense; they are outside its scope. The a ct of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered on ly if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (indep endent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the L i brary does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1. You may copy and distribute ve rbatim copi es of the Library's complete source c ode as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuousl y and appropriately publish on eac h copy an ap propriate copyrig ht notice and disclaim er of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in excha nge for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any port ion of it , thus fo rming a wo rk base d on the L ibrary, and copy an d distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet a ll of these conditions: a) The modif ied work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modified to ca rry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that u ses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invo ked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does no t supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and pe rforms whatever part of its purpos e rem ains meaningful. (For exampl e, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Th erefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied f unction or table used by this function must be optional: if the applic ation does not supply it, th e square root func tion must still compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modi fied wor k as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not d erived from the Librar y, and ca n be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themse lves, then this License, and its terms, do no t apply to those sections when you distrib ute them as separate works. But w hen you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work wri tten entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or co llec tive works based on the Library. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) o n a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other wor k under the scope of this License. 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Pub lic License instead of this License to a given copy of the Li br ary. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the or dinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to thi s License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify tha t version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is i rreversib le for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This opti on is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is n ot a library. 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (o r a portion or derivative of it, under Se ct ion 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 a nd 2 above provided that you accom pany it with the co mplete cor responding machine- readable source code, which must be distributed under th e terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a me dium custom arily used f or software in terchange . I f d i s t r i b u t i o n o f o b j e c t c o d e i s m a d e b y o f f e r i n g a c c e s s t o c o p y f r o m a d e s i g n a t e d p l a c e , t h e n o f f e r i n g e q u i v a l e n t a c c e s s t o c opy the source code from the sa me place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even th ough third parties are not compelled to copy the source along w ith the object code. 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Li brary, but is designed to work with the Library by being compil ed or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolatio n, is not a derivative work of the Librar y, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (bec ause it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library" . The executable is therefore covered by th is License. Section 6 states terms for dis tribution of such executables. When a "work that uses the Library" uses materia l from a header file that is part of the Librar y, the object code for the work may be a der ivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especi ally significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a librar y. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only numeric al parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and sm all inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricte d, regardless of whether it is le gally a derivative work. (Executables c ontaining this object code plus portions of the Libr ary will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Librar y, you may distri bute the object code for the work under the terms of Secti on 6. Any executables containing that work also fall unde r Section 6, whe ther or not t hey are linked directly with the Library itself. 6. As an except ion to the Sec tions above, you may a lso combine or link a "work that us es the Library" with the Library to produc e a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under t erms of your choice, provided th at the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and rev erse engineerin g for debugging such modifications. You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and th at the Library and its use are c overed by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this Lice nse. Also, you must do one of thes e things: a) Accompany the work with the com plete corresponding mach ine-read able source code for the Library including whatever changes we re used in the wor k (which must be distributed under Sectio ns 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an execut able linked with the Libra ry, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses t h e L i b r a r y " , a s o b j e c t c o de a n d / o r s o u r c e c o d e , s o t h a t t h e u s e r c a n m o d i f y t h e L i b r a r y a n d t h e n r e l i n k t o p r o d u c e a m o d i f i e d executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be a ble to recompile the application to use the modified defi nitions.) b) Use a suitable shared libr ary me chanism for linki ng with the Libr ary. A suitable mechanism is on e that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copy ing library func tions into the executable, and (2 ) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as t he modi fied version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with. c) Accom pany the work with a written offer, valid for at least thre e ye ars, to give the same user the materials spec ified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribu tion. d) If distribution of the work is made by o ffering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the a bove specified materials from the same place. e) Verify that th e user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have al ready sent this user a copy. For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" m ust includ e any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in eit her source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that c omponent itself acc ompanies the executable.
07 70 En It may happen that this requirement contra dicts the license restrictions of other pr oprietary libraries tha t do not normally ac company the operating system. Such a contradiction means you c annot use both them and the Li brary together in an executable that you distribute. 7. You may plac e library facilities that are a work based on the Li brary side-by-side in a single libr ary together with other library facilitie s not covered by this License, and distribute s uch a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other l ibrary facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the combined librar y with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library faciliti es. Th is must be di stribute d under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give p rominent notice with the combined lib rary of the fact that part of it is a work b ased on the Library, and explaining wh ere to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or d istribute th e Library except as expressly pr ovided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. Howe ver, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 9. You are not required to accept this Lic ens e, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to mod ify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohi bited by law if you do no t accept this License. Therefor e, by modifying or distributin g the Li brary (or any w ork based o n the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so , and all its terms and conditions for copying, dist ributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any wor k based on the Libr ary), the recipient automatically rec eives a license fr om the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and condit ions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recip ients' exercise of th e right s gra nted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing co mpliance by third parties with this License. 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (n ot limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherw ise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from th e conditions of t his License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligat ions under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free re distribution of the Library by all those w ho receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain e ntirely from distribution of the Library . If a ny portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any partic ular circum stance, the balance of the section is intend ed to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstance s. It is not the purp ose of this section to induce you to infrin ge any patents or other property ri ght cla ims or to contest v alidi ty of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system whic h is implemented by public lic ense practi ces. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through th at system in reliance on consistent application of that syste m; it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot i mpose that choice. This section is intended to make thorou ghly clear what is believed to be a co nsequence of the rest of this License. 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by pa tents or by c opyrighted interfa ces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this Lic ense may add an explic it geographical distribution limitation excludin g those countries, so that dist ribution is permitted only in or among c ountries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporat es the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new ve rsions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing ve rsion number. If the Library specifies a ve rsion number of this License which appl ies to it and "any later version" , you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. I f the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any versio n ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other fr ee programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Softwa re Foundation, write to the Free Soft ware Foundation; we someti mes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of p reserving the free status of all derivat ives of our fr ee software and of promoting the shari ng and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 15. BECAUSE T HE LIBRARY IS LICENS ED FREE OF CHARGE, TH ERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR T HE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTEN T PERMITTED BY APPLI CABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHER WISE STATED I N WRITING THE C OPYRIGHT HOL DERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LI BRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR I MPLIED, INCLUDIN G, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , THE IMPLIE D WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL ITY AND FITN ESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE E NTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUAL ITY AND PERFORMANCE OF TH E LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOU LD THE LIBRARY PR OVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICIN G, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. IN NO EVEN T UNLESS REQUIR ED BY APPLICABLE L AW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRI GHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTH ER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAM AGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL , INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIA L DAMAGES ARI SING OUT OF TH E USE OR INABIL ITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT N OT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURA TE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY Y OU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY T O OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFT WARE) , EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVI SED OF THE POSSIBILIT Y OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library, and you want it t o be of the greate st possib le use to the public, we recommend making it free sof tware that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permi tting redistribution under these terms (or, alte rnatively, under the terms of the ordinary Genera l Public License). To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the librar y. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright é <year> <name of author> This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or mo dify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public Licens e as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This library is distri buted in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABIL ITY or FITNESS FO R A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Fre e Sof tware Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 0 2110-1301 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if a ny, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for th e library, if necessary. H ere is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James R andom Hacker. <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice That's all there is to it!
07 71 En [Notice on GNU General Public License] This product include the software licensed for use und er the terms of a GNU General Public License. A copy of the corresponding source code can be obtained by being charged the fee for distribution. To obtain a copy, contact your loca l Pioneer Customer Support Center. See the GNU website (http://www.gnu.org) for de tails of the GNU General Public License.
Should this product require ser vice in the U.S.A. and you wish to locate the nearest P ioneer Authorized Independent Ser vice Company , or if you wish to purchase replacement parts, operating instructions, ser vice manuals, or accessories, please call the number shown below . 1 â 8 0 0 â 4 2 1 â 1 4 0 4 Please do not ship your product to P ioneer without first calling the Customer Support at the above listed number for assistance. P ioneer Electronics Ser vice, Inc. P .O . BOX 1760, Long Beach, CA 90801-1760, U.S.A. F or warranty information please see the Limited W arranty sheet included with your product. Should this product require ser vice in Canada, please contact a P ioneer Canadian Authorized Dealer to locate the nearest P ioneer Authorized Ser vice Company in Canada. Alternatively , please contact the Customer Satisfaction Department at the following address: P ioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc. Customer Satisfaction Department 300 Allstate P arkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2 1-877-283-5901 905-479-4411 F or warranty information please see the Limited W arranty sheet included with your product. Si ce produit doit être réparé au Canada, veuillez vous adresser àun distributeur autorisé P ioneer du Canada pour obtenir le nom du Centre de Ser vice Autorisé Pioneer le plus près de chez-vous. V ous pouvez aussi contacter le Service àla clientèle de Pioneer: P ioneer ÃÂlectroniques du Canada, Inc. Ser vice Clientèle 300, Allstate P arkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2 1-877-283-5901 905-479-4411 P our obtenir des renseignements sur la garantie, veuillez vous reporter au feuillet sur la garantie restreinte qui accompagne le produit. S 018 _C_EF Printed in Japan <08F000001> <VRB1505-A> Register Your Product on http://www.pioneerelectronics.com (US) http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca (Canada) Published b y Pioneer Cor poration. Copyright é 2008 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reser ved. PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel A vila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Me xico,D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B_En